Orion I Pam Administrator Guide

SolarWinds Orion
IP Address Manager Administrator Guide
ORION IP ADDRESS MANAGER
Copyright 1995-2010 SolarWinds.net, Inc., all rights reserved worldwide. No part of this document may be reproduced by any means nor modified, decompiled, disassembled, published or distributed, in whole or in part, or translated to any electronic medium or other means without the written consent of SolarWinds All right, title and interest in and to the software and documentation are and shall remain the exclusive property of SolarWinds and its licensors. SolarWinds Orion, and SolarWinds Toolset are trademarks of SolarWinds and SolarWinds.net and the SolarWinds logo are registered trademarks of SolarWinds All other trademarks contained in this document and in the Software are the property of their respective owners. SOLARWINDS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS OR OTHER TERMS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, ON SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION FURNISHED HEREUNDER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SOLARWINDS, ITS SUPPLIERS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, WHETHER ARISING IN TORT, CONTRACT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY EVEN IF SOLARWINDS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Microsoft and Windows 2000 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Graph Layout Toolkit and Graph Editor Toolkit 1992 - 2001 Tom Sawyer Software, Oakland, California. All Rights Reserved. Portions Copyright ComponentOne, LLC 1991-2002. All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2005 Sebastien Lorion Fast CSV Reader Version 3.6.2 using a MIT license. Fluent is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation and the Fluent user interface is licensed from Microsoft Corporation. SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager, 2-25-11
SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager Administrator Guide
About SolarWinds
SolarWinds, Inc develops and markets an array of network management, monitoring, and discovery tools to meet the diverse requirements of todays network management and consulting professionals. SolarWinds products continue to set benchmarks for quality and performance and have positioned the company as the leader in network management and discovery technology. The SolarWinds customer base includes over 45 percent of the Fortune 500 and customers from over 90 countries. Our global business partner distributor network exceeds 100 distributors and resellers.
Contacting SolarWinds
You can contact SolarWinds in a number of ways, including the following: Team Sales Technical Support User Forums Contact Information sales@solarwinds.com www.solarwinds.com 1.866.530.8100 +353.21.5002900 www.solarwinds.com/support www.thwack.com
Conventions
The documentation uses consistent conventions to help you identify items throughout the printed and online library. Convention Bold Italics Specifying Window items, including buttons and fields. Book and CD titles, variable names, new terms File and directory names, commands and code examples, text typed by you Optional command parameters Required command parameters Exclusive command parameters where only one of the options can be specified
Fixed font
Straight brackets, as in [value] Curly braces, as in {value} Logical OR, as in value1|value2
About SolarWinds iii
Administrator Guide SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager
SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager Documentation

The following documents are included in the SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager documentation library: Document Administrator Guide Evaluation Guide Page Help Release Notes Purpose Provides detailed setup, configuration, and conceptual information. Provides an introduction to Orion Network Performance Monitor features and instructions for installation and initial configuration. Provides help for every window in the Orion IP Address Manager user interface Provides the latest information about known issues, and updates. The latest Release Notes can be found at www.solarwinds.com.
iv SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager Documentation
Contents
About SolarWinds ........................................................................................... iii Contacting SolarWinds ................................................................................... iii Conventions .................................................................................................... iii SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager Documentation ................................ iv
Chapter 1
Introduction .................................................................................................... 1 Why Install SolarWinds Orion IPAM ................................................................ 1 Key Features of Orion IPAM ............................................................................ 1 How Orion IPAM Works ................................................................................... 4
Chapter 2
Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM ....................................................... 7 Orion IPAM Requirements ............................................................................... 7 Requirements for Orion Common Components .......................................... 7 Preparing a SolarWinds Orion Installation..................................................... 11 Upgrade Paths .......................................................................................... 11 Installing Orion IPAM ..................................................................................... 11 Activating Your License ................................................................................. 13 Licensing Orion IPAM .................................................................................... 14 Checking License Status ............................................................................... 15 Maintaining Licenses with License Manager ................................................. 15 Installing License Manager ....................................................................... 15 Using License Manager ............................................................................ 15 Configuring Orion IPAM ................................................................................. 16 IPAM Getting Started Resource .................................................................... 16 Excluding Orion Data Directories from Anti-Virus Scanning ......................... 17 Configuring Subnet Scan Settings ............................................................ 17 Indirect Discovery ...................................................................................... 18 Managing CLI Credentials for Cisco DHCP Scope Scans ............................ 19 Managing Windows Credentials .................................................................... 20
Contents v
Managing SNMP Credentials ........................................................................ 21 Creating and Configuring Custom Fields .................................................. 24 Customizing the IPAM Summary View ..................................................... 25 Customize Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Tab Views ..................... 26 Managing Orion IPAM Users ........................................................................ 27 User Role Definitions ................................................................................ 27 Editing User Roles .................................................................................... 29
Chapter 3
Using Orion IPAM ........................................................................................ 31 Networking Concepts and Terminology ........................................................ 31 Viewing Networks with Orion IPAM............................................................... 34 Orion IPAM Status Icons .......................................................................... 35 Understanding the IP Address Manager Summary View ......................... 36 Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Page................................................ 38 DHCP Scope Monitoring Page ................................................................. 39 Importing IP Addresses and Settings from a File.......................................... 41 Updating IP Address properties from a File into an Existing Subnet ............ 43 Importing by Bulk Adding Subnets ................................................................ 43 Importing IPs and Subnets Using the SolarWinds Engineer's Toolset ......... 44 Viewing and Managing Orphaned IP Addresses .......................................... 45 Exporting IP Addresses and Settings ........................................................... 46 Managing IP Addresses with Orion IPAM ................................................. 47 Adding IPv4 Addresses ................................................................................. 47 Adding IPv6 Addresses ................................................................................. 47 Adding a Range of IP Addresses ............................................................. 48 Deleting IP Addresses from Monitoring .................................................... 49 Setting IP Address Status ......................................................................... 49 Editing IP Address Properties ................................................................... 50 Multiple Edit IP Address Properties .......................................................... 51 Searching for IP Addresses .......................................................................... 52 Historical Tracking ......................................................................................... 54 Managing Groups in Orion IPAM .................................................................. 54 Creating Groups ....................................................................................... 55 Editing Groups .......................................................................................... 55
vi Contents
Managing Subnets in Orion IPAM ................................................................. 56 Creating Subnets....................................................................................... 56 Allowing Duplicate Subnets ....................................................................... 57 Editing Subnets ......................................................................................... 58 Managing Subnet Scans ........................................................................... 58 Using the Subnet Allocation Wizard .............................................................. 59 Managing Supernets in Orion IPAM .............................................................. 61 Creating Supernets ................................................................................... 61 Editing Supernets ...................................................................................... 62 IPv6 Monitoring ............................................................................................ 62 Adding IPv6 Addresses ................................................................................. 63 Editing an IPv6 Prefix .................................................................................... 64 Adding IPv6 Subnets ..................................................................................... 64 Editing IPv6 Subnets ..................................................................................... 64 Adding IPv6 Addresses ................................................................................. 64 Edit an IPv6 Address ..................................................................................... 65 Edit Mulitple IPv6 Addresses ......................................................................... 65 Deleting IPv6 Subnets ................................................................................... 65 Deleting IPv6 Addresses ............................................................................... 66 Monitoring DHCP Scopes in Orion IPAM .................................................. 66 Creating DHCP Scopes ............................................................................ 67 Editing DHCP Scopes ............................................................................... 67 Removing Scopes ..................................................................................... 68 Monitoring DHCP Servers ........................................................................... 69 Editing DHCP Servers ............................................................................... 69 Removing Servers ..................................................................................... 70 DHCP Graph View .................................................................................... 70
Chapter 4
Creating Reports with Orion IPAM ............................................................. 71 Getting Started with Report Writer................................................................. 71 Preview Mode............................................................................................ 71 Design Mode ............................................................................................. 72 Using Predefined Orion IPAM Reports .......................................................... 72 Predefined Orion IPAM Current IPAM Statistics Report ........................... 72 Predefined Orion IPAM Events Report ..................................................... 73
Contents vii
Opening Predefined IPAM Reports .......................................................... 73 Orion IPAM Report Attributes........................................................................ 74 IPAM Network Statistics Attributes ........................................................... 74 IPAM Node Attributes ............................................................................... 75 IPAM Event Attributes ............................................................................... 76 IPAM IP History Attributes ........................................................................ 76 General Options Tab ..................................................................................... 77 Select Fields Options Tab ............................................................................. 77 Report Grouping Options Tab ....................................................................... 78 Field Formatting Options Tab........................................................................ 79 Customizing the Report Header and Footer Image ...................................... 79 Exporting Reports ......................................................................................... 79 Viewing Reports ............................................................................................ 80 Scheduling Reports ....................................................................................... 80 Using Alerts with Orion IPAM .................................................................... 81 Viewing Alerts in the Orion IPAM Web Console ........................................... 82 Viewing Alerts in Orion System Manager ..................................................... 82 Creating and Configuring Advanced Alerts ................................................... 83 IPAM Advanced Alert Example ..................................................................... 83
Chapter 5
Additional Orion IPAM Features ................................................................ 87 Integrating SolarWinds Engineers Toolset with Orion IPAM........................ 87 Interacting with the thwack User Community ................................................ 88 thwack Recent Orion IPAM Posts Resource ................................................ 88 Providing Feedback ...................................................................................... 88
Chapter 6
SolarWinds Orion Core Components ....................................................... 89 Discovery Central .......................................................................................... 89 Network Discovery .................................................................................... 89 Additional Discovery Central Resources .................................................. 89 Discovering and Adding Network Devices .................................................... 90
viii Contents
Network Discovery Using the Network Sonar Wizard ................................... 90 Using the Network Sonar Results Wizard ..................................................... 95 Importing a List of Nodes Using a Seed File ................................................. 96 Managing Scheduled Discovery Results ....................................................... 98 Using the Discovery Ignore List ..................................................................... 99
Chapter 4
Managing the Orion Web Console ........................................................... 101 Logging in for the First Time as an Administrator ........................................ 101 Windows Authentication with Active Directory ............................................ 101 Using the Web Console Notification Bar ..................................................... 102 Navigating the Orion Web Console ............................................................. 103 Using Web Console Tabs ....................................................................... 103 Using Web Console Breadcrumbs .......................................................... 103 Administrative Functions of the Orion Web Console ................................... 104 Changing an Account Password ............................................................. 104 Orion Website Administration .................................................................. 104 Viewing Secure Data on the Web ........................................................... 108 Handling Counter Rollovers .................................................................... 108 Orion General Thresholds ........................................................................... 109 Orion General Threshold Types .............................................................. 109 Setting Orion General Thresholds........................................................... 111 Customizing Views ...................................................................................... 111 Creating New Views ................................................................................ 111 Editing Views ........................................................................................... 112 Exporting Views to PDF .......................................................................... 113 Configuring View Limitations ................................................................... 114 Copying Views......................................................................................... 114 Deleting Views......................................................................................... 115 Views by Device Type ............................................................................. 115 Resource Configuration Examples.......................................................... 115 Using the Orion Web Console Message Center ......................................... 125 Creating a Custom Summary View ............................................................. 125 Creating and Editing External Website Views ............................................. 127 Customizing the Orion Web Console .......................................................... 127 Customizing Web Console Menu Bars ................................................... 127
Contents ix
Changing the Web Console Color Scheme ............................................ 129 Changing the Web Console Site Logo ................................................... 129 Configuring the Available Product Updates View ................................... 130 Updating your Orion Installation ............................................................. 130 Orion Web Console and Chart Settings ...................................................... 131 Web Console Settings ............................................................................ 131 Chart Settings ......................................................................................... 132 Discovery Settings .................................................................................. 133 Using Node Filters ....................................................................................... 133 Custom Charts in the Orion Web Console .................................................. 134 Customizing Charts in the Orion Web Console ...................................... 134 Custom Node Charts .............................................................................. 136 Custom Volume Charts ........................................................................... 137 Custom Chart View ................................................................................. 137 Integrating SolarWinds Engineers Toolset ................................................. 139 Configuring a Toolset Integration ........................................................... 139 Adding Programs to a Toolset Integration Menu .................................... 140 Accessing Nodes Using HTTP, SSH, and Telnet ....................................... 141 Using Integrated Remote Desktop .............................................................. 141 Managing Orion Web Console Configurations ............................................ 141 Creating a Web Console Configuration Backup ..................................... 142 Restoring a Web Console Configuration Backup ................................... 142 Clearing a Web Console Configuration .................................................. 143
Chapter 5
Managing Devices in the Web Console .................................................. 145 Adding Devices for Monitoring in the Web Console.................................... 145 Deleting Devices from Monitoring ............................................................... 148 Viewing Node Data in Tooltips .................................................................... 150 Editing Object Properties ............................................................................ 150 Promoting a Node from ICMP to SNMP Monitoring.................................... 151 Viewing Node Resources ............................................................................ 153 Setting Device Management States ............................................................ 153 Unscheduled Device Polling and Rediscovery ........................................... 154 Monitoring Windows Server Memory .......................................................... 155
x Contents
Scheduling a Node Maintenance Mode Time Period .................................. 155

Chapter 6
Managing Groups and Dependencies ..................................................... 157 Managing Groups ........................................................................................ 157 Creating Groups ...................................................................................... 157 Editing Existing Groups ........................................................................... 158 Deleting Groups ...................................................................................... 159 Managing Dependencies ............................................................................. 159 Creating a New Dependency .................................................................. 160 Editing an Existing Dependency ............................................................. 161 Deleting an Existing Dependency ........................................................... 162 Viewing Alerts on Child Objects .............................................................. 163
Chapter 7
Managing Web Accounts .......................................................................... 165 Creating New Accounts ............................................................................... 165 Editing User Accounts ................................................................................. 166 User Account Access Settings ................................................................ 166 Setting Account Limitations ..................................................................... 167 Defining Pattern Limitations .................................................................... 168 Setting Default Account Menu Bars and Views ...................................... 169 Configuring an Account Report Folder .................................................... 170 Configuring Audible Web Alerts .............................................................. 171
Chapter 8
Managing Orion Polling Engines ............................................................. 173 Viewing Polling Engine Status in the Web Console .................................... 173 Configuring Polling Engine Settings ............................................................ 173 Orion Polling Settings .................................................................................. 173 Polling Intervals ....................................................................................... 174 Polling Statistics Intervals ....................................................................... 174 Database Settings ................................................................................... 174 Network ................................................................................................... 175 Calculations & Thresholds ...................................................................... 176 Calculating Node Availability ....................................................................... 177 Calculating a Baseline ................................................................................. 178
Contents xi
Setting the Node Warning Interval .............................................................. 178 Using the Polling Engine Load Balancer ..................................................... 179
Chapter 10
Monitoring Network Events in the Web Console ................................... 181 Viewing Event Details in the Web Console ................................................. 181 Acknowledging Events in the Web Console ............................................... 182
Chapter 11
Using Orion Advanced Alerts .................................................................. 183 Creating and Configuring Advanced Alerts ................................................. 183 Creating a New Advanced Alert.............................................................. 184 Naming, Describing, and Enabling an Advanced Alert ........................... 184 Setting a Trigger Condition for an Advanced Alert ................................. 185 Setting a Reset Condition for an Advanced Alert ................................... 186 Setting a Suppression for an Advanced Alert ......................................... 188 Setting the Monitoring Period for an Advanced Alert ............................. 189 Setting a Trigger Action for an Advanced Alert ...................................... 189 Setting a Reset Action for an Advanced Alert ........................................ 190 Alert Escalation ....................................................................................... 191 Understanding Condition Groups ........................................................... 191 Using the Advanced Alert Manager ........................................................ 192 Adding Alert Actions .................................................................................... 196 Available Advanced Alert Actions ............................................................... 196 Sending an E-mail / Page ....................................................................... 197 Playing a Sound ...................................................................................... 198 Logging an Advanced Alert to a File ....................................................... 199 Logging an Advanced Alert to the Windows Event Log ......................... 200 Sending a Syslog Message .................................................................... 201 Executing an External Program .............................................................. 202 Executing a Visual Basic Script .............................................................. 203 Emailing a Web Page ............................................................................. 204 Using Text to Speech Output ................................................................. 205 Sending a Windows Net Message .......................................................... 206 Sending an SNMP Trap .......................................................................... 207 Using GET or POST URL Functions ...................................................... 208 Testing Alert Actions ................................................................................... 209 Viewing Alerts in the Orion Web Console ................................................... 210 Acknowledging Advanced Alerts in the Web Console ................................ 210
xii Contents
Escalated Advanced Alerts .......................................................................... 211 Escalated Alert Example ......................................................................... 211 Creating a Series of Escalated Alerts ..................................................... 212 Viewing Alerts from Mobile Devices ............................................................ 215
Chapter 12
Creating Network Maps ............................................................................. 217

Chapter 13
Creating and Viewing Reports ................................................................. 219 Predefined Orion Reports ............................................................................ 219 Availability ............................................................................................... 219 Current Node Status ............................................................................... 220 Current Volume Status ............................................................................ 220 Daily Node Availability ............................................................................. 221 Events ..................................................................................................... 221 Historical CPU and Memory Reports ...................................................... 222 Historical Response Time Reports.......................................................... 222 Historical VMware ESX Server Reports .................................................. 222 Groups: Current Groups and Groups Members Status .......................... 223 Groups: Daily Group Availability ............................................................. 223 Groups: Group Availability (with members) ............................................ 224 Groups: Historical Groups Status............................................................ 224 Historical Volume Usage Reports ........................................................... 224 Inventory .................................................................................................. 224 Viewing Reports ........................................................................................... 225 Viewing Reports in the Orion Web Console ............................................ 225 Viewing Reports in the Orion Report Writer ............................................ 225 Using Report Writer ..................................................................................... 226 Preview Mode.......................................................................................... 226 Design Mode ........................................................................................... 227 Creating and Modifying Reports .................................................................. 227 General Options Tab ............................................................................... 227 Select Fields Options Tab ....................................................................... 228 Filter Results Options Tab ....................................................................... 229 Top XX Records Options Tab ................................................................. 230 Time Frame Options Tab ........................................................................ 230 Summarization Options Tab.................................................................... 230 Report Grouping Options Tab ................................................................. 231 Field Formatting Options Tab.................................................................. 231
Contents xiii
Customizing the Report Header and Footer Image .................................... 232 Exporting Reports ....................................................................................... 232 Example Report .......................................................................................... 233 Using Orion Report Scheduler .................................................................... 234 Creating a Scheduled Report Job .......................................................... 234 Using Orion Report Scheduler with HTTPS ........................................... 236 Reports and Account Limitations ................................................................ 237
Chapter 16
Creating Custom Properties .................................................................... 238 Creating a Custom Property........................................................................ 239 Removing a Custom Property ..................................................................... 240 Importing Custom Property Data................................................................. 241 Custom Property Editor Settings ................................................................. 242 Editing Custom Properties .......................................................................... 242 Using Filters in Edit View ............................................................................ 243 Creating Custom Properties Filters ........................................................ 243 Removing Custom Properties Filters ...................................................... 244
Chapter 17
Creating Account Limitations .................................................................. 245 Using the Account Limitation Builder .......................................................... 245 Creating an Account Limitation ............................................................... 245 Deleting an Account Limitation ............................................................... 246
Chapter 18
Managing the Orion Database ................................................................. 247 Using Database Manager ........................................................................... 247 Adding a Server ...................................................................................... 247 Creating Database Backups ................................................................... 248 Restoring a Database ............................................................................. 249 Compacting your Database .................................................................... 249 Compacting Individual Tables................................................................. 250 Viewing Database Details ....................................................................... 250 Viewing Table Details ............................................................................. 251 Editing Database Fields .......................................................................... 252
xiv Contents
Detaching a Database ............................................................................. 253 Creating a Database Maintenance Plan ................................................. 253 Using SQL Server Management Studio ...................................................... 254 Database Maintenance ................................................................................ 257 Running Database Maintenance ............................................................. 257 Migrating your Database ......................................................................... 257
Chapter 19
Common Orion Tasks ............................................................................... 261 Scheduling and Emailing Business Hours Reports ..................................... 261 Creating a Business Hours Report.......................................................... 261 Scheduling and Emailing a Report .......................................................... 262 Creating Geographic or Departmental Views .............................................. 263 Creating a Custom Group ....................................................................... 264 Creating a Custom View ......................................................................... 264 Troubleshooting your Installation ................................................................. 266
Chapter 20
Orion Product Family ................................................................................ 267 Monitoring Network Performance (Orion NPM) ........................................... 267 Monitoring Network Application Data (Orion APM) ..................................... 268 Managing IP Service Level Agreements (Orion IP SLA Manager) ............. 268 Why Install Orion IP SLA Manager ......................................................... 269 What Orion IP SLA Manager Does ......................................................... 269 Monitoring NetFlow Traffic Analysis Data (Orion NTA) ............................... 269 Orion Scalability Engines ............................................................................. 270 Using an Orion Additional Web Server ........................................................ 270 Orion Failover and Disaster Recovery......................................................... 273 Using a Hot Standby Engine ................................................................... 274 Installing a Hot Standby Engine .............................................................. 275 Configuring a Hot Standby Engine .......................................................... 277 Testing a Hot Standby Engine ................................................................ 278
Index
Index ........................................................................................................... 279

Contents xv
xvi Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction
IP Address Manager (Orion IPAM) leverages an intuitive point-and-click web interface to allow you to easily investigate IP address space issues. By periodically scanning the network for IP address changes, Orion IPAM maintains a dynamic list of IP addresses and allows engineers to plan for network growth, ensure IP space usage meets corporate standards, and reduce IP conflicts. Using Orion IPAM, network engineers can discover non-responsive IP addresses and coordinate team access to address IP space and track changes.
Why Install SolarWinds Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM allows network engineers to: o o o o o o o o Manage your entire IP infrastructure from an intuitive Web-Console Consolidate your IP addresses into a single repository Monitor DHCP Server and Scope capacity Keep better records by periodically scanning your network for IP address changes Create, schedule and share reports on the IP address space percent utilization Keep network devices up by identifying and eliminating IP address conflicts Coordinate team access to your address space with role-based access control and track changes Identify non-responsive IP addresses to optimize your IP space
Key Features of Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM provides the following features to help manage IP addresses. Cisco IOS DHCP and Microsoft DHCP support DHCP Server and Scope capacity monitoring Alerting capabilities Alert on high Subnet and DHCP Scope utilizations. Scheduled Scanning
Introduction 1
Schedule and automatically scan your network on a regular basis to ensure your IP space is correctly configured Scan Segmentation Allows to manage some IP addresses manually and others with automatic scanning to ensure your network is running smoothly Subnet Allocation Wizard Specify a supernet and subnet sizes and Orion IPAM automatically allocates the correct sized subnet for your network Change Auditing Enables you to investigate IP address issues by knowing who made what changes when User-defined Grouping Create your own unique groups to categorize IP addresses by department, geography, device vendor, or your own custom fields Global Search Track down any specific IP address on your entire network in seconds by performing a global search directly from the Orion IPAM web console. Serach results can include historical details of specific IP addresses by displaying MAC Address, Hostname and IP Address Histories Historical Tracking Offers the historical tracking of IP addresses to see how certain properties have changed over time. Engineers Toolset Integration Integrate with SolarWinds Engineers Toolset for right-click access to your favorite network management troubleshooting tools Multi Editing Capabilities Mass edit properties of multiple Subnets from a centralized location. Bulk Add Subnets Add multiple subnets from your environment via the Bulk Add Subnet interface. Custom Property URLs Create custom property URLs that directs users to web based data.
2 Introduction
Flexible Reporting Generate IP address reports using out-of-the-box templates that can be easily customized with a few mouse clicks; automate report creation and distribution IPv6 Planning View and track dual-stacked IPv4 and IPv6 enabled devices. Organize address spaces to assist with planning and space allocation.
Introduction 3
How Orion IPAM Works

Orion IP Address Manager extends SolarWinds products into the realm of IP address management. Using ICMP and SNMP calls to collect details from devices on your network, IPAM tracks and displays IP address usage, in addition to automatically marking IP addresses that are no longer in use. Additionally, calls to DHCP servers are made to retrieve lease and scope details. Data is stored for tracking and auditing purposes in the database. All statistics are accessible using the Orion web interface.
4 Introduction
Introduction 5
Chapter 2
Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM employs a simple, wizard-driven install process allowing you to quickly start managing your network. Refer to the following sections for more information about licensing, system requirements and configuration procedures.
Orion IPAM Requirements

Orion IPAM is now a standalone product that does not require Orion Network Performance Monitor (Orion NPM). You can also install it as module with Orion NPM, however in this scenario you must have Orion NPM 10.1.2.
Requirements for Orion Common Components

SolarWinds recommends installing your Orion product on its own server, with the Orion database hosted separately, on its own SQL Server. Installations of multiple Orion servers using the same database are not supported. Orion Server Software Requirements The following table lists minimum software requirements and recommendations for your Orion server.
Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM 7
Software
Requirements Windows Server 2003 or 2008, including R2, with IIS in 32-bit mode. IIS must be installed. SolarWinds recommends that Orion administrators have local administrator privileges to ensure full functionality of local Orion tools. Accounts limited to use of the Orion Web Console do not require administrator privileges. Notes: SolarWinds does not support production installations of Orion products on Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7 systems. Microsoft IIS, version 6.0 and higher, in 32-bit mode. DNS specifications require that hostnames be composed of alphanumeric characters (A-Z, 0-9), the minus sign (-), and periods (.). Underscore characters (_) are not allowed. For more information, see RFC 952. Note: SolarWinds neither recommends nor supports the installation of any Orion product on the same server or using the same database server as a Research in Motion (RIM) Blackberry server. Version 3.5. .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is recommended. Windows operating system management and monitoring tools component Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 or higher with Active scripting Firefox 3.0 or higher (Toolset Integration is not supported on Firefox)
Operating System
Web Server
.NET Framework SNMP Trap Services Web Console Browser
Orion Server Hardware Requirements The following table lists minimum hardware requirements and recommendations for your Orion server. Note: Hardware requirements are listed by Orion license level.
Hardware CPU Speed IP1000, or IP4000 2.0 GHz 2 GB Hard Drive Space IP16000 2.4 GHz 5 GB IPLX 3.0 GHz 20 GB
Note: Dual processor, dual core is recommended. Note: A RAID 1 drive for server operating system, Orion installation, and tempdb files is recommended. The Orion installer needs 1GB on the drive where temporary Windows system or user variables are stored. Per Windows standards, some common files may need to be installed on the same drive as your server operating system. 3 GB 4 GB 4 GB 161/SNMP and 443/SNMP. VMware ESX/ESXi Servers are polled on 443. 17777/TCP open for Orion module traffic 17778/ HTTPS open to access the SolarWinds Information Service API
Memory Application Ports
Requirements for Virtual Machines and Servers Orion installations on VMware Virtual Machines and Microsoft Virtual Servers are fully supported if the following minimum configuration requirements are met for each virtual machine.
8 Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM
Note: SolarWinds strongly recommends that you maintain your SQL Server database on a separate physical server.
Virtual Machine Configuration CPU Speed Allocated Hard Drive Space Memory Orion Requirements by License Level IP1000, or IP4000 2.0 GHz 2GB IP16000 2.4 GHz 5GB IPLX 3.0 GHz 20GB
Note: Due to intense I/O requirements, SQL Server should be hosted on a separate physical server configured as RAID 1+0. RAID 5 is not recommended for the SQL Server hard drive. 3 GB 4 GB 4 GB Each virtual machine on which Orion is installed should have its own, dedicated network interface card. Note: Since Orion uses SNMP to monitor your network, if you are unable to dedicate a network interface card to your Orion server, you may experience gaps in monitoring data due to the low priority generally assigned to SNMP traffic.
Network Interface
Requirements for the Orion Database Server (SQL Server) The following table lists software and hardware requirements for your Orion database server. Orion license levels are provided as a reference.
Requirements
IP1000, or IP4000
IP16000
IPLX
SQL Server
SQL Server 2005 SP1 Express, Standard, or Enterprise SQL Server 2008 Express, Standard, or Enterprise Notes: Due to latency effects, SolarWinds does not recommend installing your SQL Server and your Orion server or additional polling engine in different locations across a WAN. For more information, see SolarWinds Knowledge Base article, Can I install my Orion server or Additional Polling Engine and my Orion database (SQL Server) in different locations across a WAN? Either mixed-mode or SQL authentication must be supported. If you are managing your Orion database, SolarWinds recommends you install the SQL Server Management Studio component. If your Orion product installs SQL Server System CLR Types, a manual restart of the SQL Server service for your Orion database is required. Use the following database select statement to check your SQL Server version, service pack or release level, and edition: select SERVERPROPERTY ('productversion'), SERVERPROPERTY ('productlevel'), SERVERPROPERTY ('edition') 2.0 GHz 2 GB 2.4 GHz 5 GB 3.0 GHz 20 GB
CPU Speed
Hard Drive Space
Note: Due to intense I/O requirements, a RAID 1+0 drive is strongly recommended the SQL Server database and Orion data and log files. RAID 5 is not recommended for the SQL Server hard drive. The Orion installer needs at least 1GB on the drive where temporary Windows system or user variables are stored. Per Windows standards, some common files may need to be installed on drive as your server operating system. 2 GB 3 GB 4 GB Note: SolarWinds recommends additional RAM, up to 8 GB, for Orion IPAM installations including more than 1000 monitors.
Memory
The Configuration Wizard installs the following required x86 components if they are not found on your Orion database server: SQL Server System Common Language Runtime (CLR) Types. Orion products use secure SQL CLR stored procedures for selected, non-business data operations to improve overall performance. Microsoft SQL Server Native Client Microsoft SQL Server Management Objects
Preparing a SolarWinds Orion Installation

Orion products use a simple wizard to direct the installation process. Note: Downgrades of Orion products are not supported. If you are upgrading or installing multiple Orion products, confirm that you are installing them in the order given in the Upgrade Instructions document located in the SolarWinds Customer Portal. http://www.solarwinds.com/customerportal/.
Upgrade Paths
SolarWinds Orion modules and standalone products are compatible with the specific versions of SolarWinds Orion Network Performance Monitor (NPM). Reference this KB article for the latest. http://knowledgebase.solarwinds.com/kb/questions/1888/Upgrade+paths+for+Sol arWinds+Orion+product+modules+and+standalone+products Standalone products do not require any other SolarWinds products to be installed. To upgrade from earlier versions of Orion IPAM, follow the given upgrade path. Suggested Upgrade Paths: o o o o Orion IPAM 1.0.1 Orion NPM 9.5 10.0.1 SP1 IPAM 1.5 1.7 Orion NPM 10.1.2 Orion IPAM 1.5 1.7.1 2.0
Orion 1.6 2.0
Orion 1.7.1 2.0
Installing Orion IPAM

The following procedure guides you through the installation of Orion IPAM. Ensure that the server on which you install Orion IPAM meets or exceeds the stated requirements. Complete the following procedure to install Orion IPAM. Note: If you have additional Orion pollers or Web Consoles, upgrade them at the same time as your Orion server.
To install Orion IP Address Manager: 1. Log on to the Orion server that you want to use for IP address management. Note: Consider backing up your Orion database before performing any upgrade. 2. Navigate to your download location and launch the executable. 3. Review the Welcome text, and then click Next. 4. Accept the terms in the license agreement, and then click Next. 5. Click Install, and then click Finish. 6. Click Enter Licensing Information. 7. If the computer on which you installed IPAM is connected to the Internet, complete the following procedure. a. Click I want to activate my license over the Internet. b. Browse to http://www.solarwinds.com/customerportal/. c. Login to the customer portal using your CustomerID and Password. d. Copy your IPAM Activation Key to the clipboard, and then paste it into the Activation Key field on the Activate IPAM window. e. Click Next. f. Enter your contact information. g. If you use a proxy server to access the Internet, check the Proxy Server checkbox, and then type the proxy address and port number. h. Click Next. 8. When the Orion IP Address Manager Setup Wizard completes, click Finish. 9. If the Configuration Wizard does not start automatically, click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Configuration Wizard. 10. Review the Orion Configuration Wizard welcome text, and then click Next. 11. Confirm that all services that you want to install are checked in the Service Settings window, and then click Next. 12. Click Finish when the Orion Configuration Wizard completes.
Activating Your License

After installing the software through the setup wizard, you are prompted to enter the license activation key for your product. If you do not have an activation key, the product runs in a time-limited evaluation mode. To evaluate the software without a license: Click Continue Evaluation. To license the software on a server with Internet access: 1. Click Enter Licensing Information. 2. Select I have internet access and an activation key. 3. Click the http://www.solarwinds.com/customerportal link to access the customer portal on the SolarWinds web site. 4. Log on to the portal using your SolarWinds customer ID and password. 5. Click License Management on the left navigation bar. 6. Navigate to your product, choose an activation key from the Unregistered Licenses section, and then copy the activation key. 7. If you cannot find an activation key in the Unregistered Licenses section, contact SolarWinds customer support. 8. Return to the Activate window, and then enter the activation key in the Activation Key field. 9. If you access Internet web sites through a proxy server, click I access the internet through a proxy server, and enter the proxy address and port. 10. Click Next. 11. Enter your email address and other registration information, and then click Next. To license the software on a server without Internet access: 1. Click Enter Licensing Information 2. Select This server does not have internet access, and then click Next. 3. Click Copy Unique Machine ID. 4. Paste the copied data into a text editor document. 5. Transfer the document to a computer with Internet access. 6. On the computer with Internet access, complete the following steps:
7. Browse to http://www.solarwinds.com/customerportal/licensemanagement.aspx and then log on to the portal with your SolarWinds customer ID and password. 8. Navigate to your product, and then click Manually Register License. 9. If the Manually Register License option is not available for your product, contact SolarWinds customer support. 10. Provide the Machine ID from Step 5, and then download your license key file. 11. Transfer the license key file to the server. 12. Return to the Activate IPAM window, browse to the license key file, and then click Next.
Licensing Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM is licensed in accordance with the number of IP addresses you manage in one of three statuses; Used, Reserved and Transient. Unused and available IPs do not count towards managed IP count. The following licensing tiers of Orion IPAM are currently available: o IPAM IP1000 for managing up to 1024 managed IP addresses. IPAM IP4000 for managing up to 4096 managed IP addresses. IPAM IP16000 for managing up to 16384 managed IP addresses. IPAM IPX for managing an unlimited number of managed IP addresses.
Orion IPAM allows you to designate managed IP addresses for management up to your license limit using any of the following methods: o o o o Importing your own network definitions and settings. For more information about importing network definitions and settings into Orion IPAM, see Importing IP Addresses and Settings on page 41. Adding a range of IP addresses within a previously unfilled subnet. For more information about adding IP address ranges, see Adding a Range of IP Addresses on page 48. DHCP Server and scope monitoring. For more information about adding DHCP servers, see "DHCP Scope Monitoring" on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. Using the Subnet Allocation Wizard to create managed subnets, and then select IP addresses existing within your new managed subnets. For more information about the Subnet Allocation Wizard, see Using the Subnet Allocation Wizard on page 59.
Checking License Status

Orion IPAM provides a tool to display the current usage of your license by indicating the number of currently managed addresses. This number also appears in the bottom right of the Manage Subnets page. 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion IP Address Manager > Orion IP Address Manager Licensing. 2. Click Restart IPAM Services to update the website with the license change. 3. Click Close.
Maintaining Licenses with License Manager

SolarWinds License Manager is an easily installed, free utility that gives you the ability to migrate Orion licenses from one computer to another without contacting SolarWinds Customer Service. The following sections provide procedures for installing and using License Manager.
Installing License Manager

Install License Manager on the computer from which you are migrating currently licensed products. Note: You must install License Manager on a computer with the correct time. If the time on the computer is off by as little as 5 minutes, in either direction, from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), you will be unable to reset licenses without calling SolarWinds Customer Service. Time zone settings do not affect and do not cause this issue. To install License Manager: 1. Navigate to http://support.solarwinds.com/support/default.cfm. 2. Provide your SolarWinds Customer ID and password, and then click Login. 3. Click Downloads & Updates in the left navigation pane. 4. Locate the Download Licensed Software section of the page, and click SolarWinds License Manager. 5. Unzip the downloaded file, and then run LicenseManager.exe.
Using License Manager

You must run License Manager on the computer where the currently licensed SolarWinds product is installed before you can move licenses to a new installation. The following procedure deactivates currently installed licenses that can then be transferred to a new installation.
To deactivate currently installed licenses: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds > SolarWinds License Manager. 2. Check products to deactivate on this computer, and then click Deactivate. 3. Specify your SolarWinds Customer ID and password when prompted, and then click Deactivate. Note: Deactivated licenses are now available to activate on a new computer. When you have successfully deactivated your products, log on to the computer on which you want to install your products, and then begin installation. When asked to specify your licenses, provide the appropriate information. The license you deactivated earlier is then assigned to the new installation.
Configuring Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM provides an easily configurable, custom user interface. The following sections detail available options for configuring the customizable aspects of your Orion IPAM installation.
IPAM Getting Started Resource

The Getting Started with IP Address Manager resource allows you to quickly begin using Orion IP Address Manager. After installing the product, you will need to enter the credentials required for IPAM to communicate with your devices. You can quickly add subnets and IP Addresses by bulk or uploading from a file. You can also import an existing Toolset database to use in IPAM and add DHCP servers. Once completing these steps, you can click Remove This Resource to remove this resource from appearing on the summary page.
Excluding Orion Data Directories from Anti-Virus Scanning

Anti-virus programs may lock files used by the SolarWinds Job Engine v2 during scanning. This can cause the SolarWinds Job Engine v2 services to stop and restart, causing delayed polling and gaps in data for a poll cycle. Therefore SolarWinds recommends that you exclude the following Orion data directory (depending on your Windows platform) from your anti-virus scanning to improve performance and stability: For Windows XP/Server 2003: c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\SolarWinds\ For Windows Vista/7/Server 2008: c:\ProgramData\SolarWinds\
Configuring Subnet Scan Settings

Orion IPAM is capable of using both SNMP and ICMP scanning to continuously determine the status of your monitored network. The Subnet Scan Settings view allows you to select how Orion IPAM automatically scans your network for changes. To configure Orion IPAM subnet scan settings: 1. Click IP Addresses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click IPAM Settings. 3. Click Subnet Scans. 4. Provide an appropriate value for the Transient Period. The Transient period must be a value from .2 to 340 days. Note: Orion IPAM continuously scans all managed IP addresses on your network. If a device fails to respond to any SNMP or ICMP requests for the period of time designated as the Transient Period, Orion IPAM changes the status of the unresponsive IP address from Used to Available. Any associated custom attribute will be overwritten. Note: Transient scan intervals can be configured on a per subnet basis from the Edit Subnet window.
5. Enter the maximum number of simultaneous scans you want IPAM to attempt. 6. ICMP is used by default to scan your network subnets for changes, complete the following steps to configure ICMP: a. Provide an appropriate number of Pings per address. b. Designate both the Delay between Pings and the Ping Timeout, in ms, for ICMP requests on your network. 7. If you want to collect device details using SNMP to scan your network subnets, complete the following steps: a. Check Enable SNMP Scanning in the SNMP Scanning section. b. Provide an appropriate number of SNMP Retries. c. Designate the SNMP Timeout for SNMP requests on your network. The timeout value is measured in milliseconds. d. Enable SNMP neighbor scanning. For more information see "Indirect Discovery" on page "18". 8. Click Save. Note: You can disable scanning on a per subnet basis. For more information about editing subnet properties, see Editing Subnets on page 58.
Indirect Discovery
IPAM utilizes a feature called Neighbor Scanning as an additional method of retrieving information. Neighbor Scanning pulls information from the ARP table of neighboring devices when ICMP and SNMP is blocked or disabled. Note: Neighbor Scanning is disabled by default. To enable Neighbor Scanning: 1. From the Manage Subnets & IP Addresses tab select a subnet
2. Click Properties 3. Scroll to the bottom of the Subnet Properties window. 4. You should see an option that says "Disable Neighbor Scanning". This is checked (disabled) by default. 5. When you un-check it, additional options will appear where you can add the IP of the neighbor device.
Managing CLI Credentials for Cisco DHCP Scope Scans

IPAM gathers data from CISCO devices using CLI commands and telnet or ssh protocols. Verify that your CISCO DHCP servers have configurable connection types (ssh or telnet), ports (default depends on type), and a user name and password. The section details the how to provide the CLI Credentials IPAM will use to connect to your devices. The username and password used is the same user account you would use to log into the device via CLI to perform system configurations. The enable level you select must have privileges to execute configure terminal commands as well as be able to configure IP SLA operations. For information on configuring network devices, please see your manufacturers documentation.
Note: As you change passwords on managed devices, ensure that you also change them in the IPAM credentials list. To add a Cisco CLI credential 1. Click IP Addresses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click IPAM Settings. 3. Click Manage Credentials for Scope scans. 4. Click Add New in the tool bar and select Cisco. 5. Provide an appropriate Display Name for your new credential.
6. Enter the User Name of your new credential. 7. Enter the Password of your new credential. 8. Select the Enable Level. 9. Enter the Enable Password. 10. Select the correct protocol. 11. Select the associated port. 12. Click Save.
Managing Windows Credentials

The Windows Credentials view allows you to configure and save Windows credentials for use when scanning Windows DHCP devices on your network. The following sections provide instructions for managing Windows credentials for your devices. Adding Windows Credentials The following procedure helps you store Windows credentials for Orion IPAM. Orion IPAM attempts to communicate with your DHCP network devices using these credentials. To add a Windows Credential to Orion IPAM: 1. Click IP Addresses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click IPAM Settings. 3. Click Manage Windows Credentials for Scope scans. 4. Click Add in the tool bar. 5. Provide an appropriate Display Name for your new credential. Note: The Windows Credentials view uses the Display Name to reference the different Windows credentials you have saved. 6. Enter the Password of your new credential. 7. Click Save. Note: All Windows credentials are sent in clear text during configuration only. Consider updating credentials while locally logged into the IPAM server or over an HTTPS connection. The Windows account specified within IPAM must be on the DHCP server and of the three following groups: DHCP Users, DHCP Administrators and or local Administrators. IPAM impersonates the specified account on the local computer in order gain access. If the IPAM computer is not within the same windows domain as the DHCP server, the IPAM computer must have the identical account and password.
Managing SNMP Credentials

The SNMP Credentials view allows you to configure and save SNMP credentials for use when scanning SNMP devices on your network. The following sections provide instructions for managing SNMP credentials for your devices. Adding SNMP Credentials The following procedure helps you store SNMP credentials for Orion IPAM. Orion IPAM attempts to communicate with your network devices using the credentials in the order they are entered. To change the SNMP credential order see Ordering SNMP Credentials page 10. To add an SNMP credential to Orion IPAM: 1. Click IP Addresses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click IPAM Settings. 3. Click SNMP Credentials. 4. Click Add in the tool bar. 5. Provide an appropriate Display Name for your new credential. Note: The SNMP Credentials view uses the Display Name to reference the different SNMP credentials you have saved. 6. Select the SNMP Version of your new credential. Notes: Orion IPAM uses SNMPv2c by default. If the credential you are adding is required to scan devices using the enhanced security features of SNMPv3, select SNMPv3 If you select SNMPv2c and you do not want Orion IPAM to use SNMP v1 if an SNMPv2c request fails, confirm that Use SNMP v2 only is checked.
7. If the default SNMP port for the devices requiring your new credential is not 161, provide the actual SNMP Port number for these devices.
8. If you want to use either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c for subnet scanning with your new SNMP credential, provide at least one valid read-only Community String for the devices you want to scan with your new credential. Note: Orion IPAM requires the public Community String, at minimum, for subnet scanning. 9. If you want to use SNMPv3 for subnet scanning with your new SNMP credential, you will need the following information: SNMPv3 User Name and Context SNMPv3 Authentication Method and Password/Key SNMPv3 Privacy/Encryption Method and Password/Key
10. Click Save. Ordering SNMP Credentials The following procedure provides the steps required to reorder stored SNMP credentials. Orion IPAM attempts SNMP communication using the stored credentials in the order provided. To order SNMP credentials in Orion IPAM: 1. Click IP Addresses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click IPAM Settings. 3. Click SNMP Credentials. 4. Check the credentials you want to reorder, and then click Up or Down in the tool bar, as appropriate, to move selected credentials up or down, respectively, in the list of stored credentials. Editing SNMP Credentials The following procedure guides you through editing stored SNMP credentials Orion IPAM uses to monitor your network. To edit an SNMP credential in Orion IPAM: 1. Click IP Addresses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click IPAM Settings. 3. Click SNMP Credentials. 4. Check the Display Name of the credential you want to edit, and then click Edit in the tool bar. 5. If you want to edit the credential Display Name, provide the new Display Name for the selected credential in the designated field.
Note: The SNMP Credentials view uses the Display Name to reference the different SNMP credentials you have saved. 6. If you want to edit the SNMP version of the selected credential, select a different SNMP Version for the selected credential. Notes: Orion IPAM uses SNMPv2c by default. If you select SNMPv2c and you do not want Orion IPAM to use SNMP v1, confirm that Do not drop down to SNMP v1 is checked. If the credential you are editing is required to scan devices that require the enhanced security features of SNMPv3, confirm that SNMPv3 is selected.
7. If you want to provide a different SNMP port number for the selected credential, provide the new SNMP Port number. 8. If you want Orion IPAM to use either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c for subnet scanning with the selected credential, provide at least one valid read-only Community String for the devices to scan with the selected credential. Note: Orion IPAM requires the public Community String, at minimum, for subnet scanning. 9. If you want Orion IPAM to use SNMPv3 for subnet scanning with the selected credential, provide the following settings: SNMPv3 User Name and Context SNMPv3 Authentication Method and Password/Key SNMPv3 Privacy/Encryption Method and Password/Key
10. Click Save. Deleting SNMP Credentials Complete the following procedure to delete an SNMP credential from the credential library. To delete an SNMP credential from Orion IPAM: 1. Click IP Addresses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click IPAM Settings. 3. Click SNMP Credentials. 4. Check the Display Name of the credential you want to delete, and then click Delete in the tool bar. 5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the selected credential.
Creating and Configuring Custom Fields

Depending on the type of component selected, Orion IPAM provides a number of predefined text properties to help organize your network, in addition to the ability to create URL custom links. Users have the ability to add descriptive text fields to addresses, subnets, supernets, and groups or link to external URLs. Note: The Orion Network Performance Monitor Custom Property Editor capabilities are not integrated with the Orion IPAM module at this time. To create or edit an Orion IPAM custom field: 1. Click IP Addresses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click IPAM Settings. 3. Click IPAM Custom Fields > Manage IPAM Custom Fields. 4. If you want to add a custom field, click Add. 5. If you want to edit an existing custom field, check the field to edit, and then click Edit. 6. Provide a Database Column for your custom field. The Database Column is the label used wherever Orion IPAM references the custom field you are defining in the Orion Web Console. 7. Edit the Database Column entry, as appropriate. The value is the alphanumeric label used in the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database for the custom field you are defining. By default, Orion IPAM generates this value sequentially. 8. Edit the Description of this field as necessary. The Description text is displayed if the custom field you are defining may be edited. 9. Select the appropriate Field Type for the custom property. Text based or a URL linked property. 10. Provide a Link Title for your URL link custom property. For example: a link to your IP SLA module web interface. 11. Provide a Max String Length for your custom field. The Max String Length sets a limit to the number of characters you may use for any value of the custom field you are defining.
12. If you want to make this custom field available to all network components defined in Orion IPAM, check Add to Groups, Supernets, and Subnets, DHCP scopes, and DHCP servers. Making this custom field available to all network components defined within Orion IPAM gives you the option to edit this field whenever you edit any network component. 13. If you want to make this custom field available to all IP addresses monitored by Orion IPAM, check Add to IP addresses. Making this custom field available to all IP addresses monitored by Orion IPAM gives you the option to edit this field whenever you edit any IP address. 14. When you have completed configuration of your custom field, click Save.
Customizing the IPAM Summary View

The IP Address Manager view provides a highly customizable display of the current status of managed IP addresses on your monitored network. By default, the IP Address Manager view provides the following resources: o o o o o o Top 10 Subnets by % IP Address Space Usage Top 10 DHCP Scopes by % IP Address Space Usage Search for IP Address Custom List of Reports Getting Started with IPAM Resource thwack Recent IPAM Posts
You can customize your IP Address Manager view by adding, deleting, or reordering any available Orion resources. To customize the IP Address Manager view: 1. Click IP Addresses in the Modules toolbar. 2. Click Customize Page in the upper right corner. 3. If you want to change the column layout of your IPAM Summary view, click Edit and then configure the column layout of your view as follows: a. Select the number of columns under Layout. b. Provide the width, in pixels, of each column in the appropriate fields. c. If you have finished setting the column layout for your view, click Submit.
4. If you want to add a resource, repeat the following steps for each resource that you want to add: a. Click + next to the column in which you want to add a resource. b. Click + next to a resource group on the Add Resources page to expand the resource group tree displaying all available resources for the group. c. Check the resources you want to add. d. If you have completed the addition of resources to the selected view, click Submit. 5. If you want to delete a resource from a column, select the resource, and then click X next to the resource column. 6. If you want to copy a resource in a column, select the resource, and then click next to the resource column to copy the selected resource. 7. If you want to change the order in which resources appear in your view, select resources, and then use the arrow keys to arrange them. 8. If you have finished configuring your view, click Preview. A preview of your custom view displays in a new window. A message acting as a placeholder may display in some assigned resource locations, and resources will display as empty if resource information has not been polled yet. 9. Close the preview window. 10. If you still want to change aspects of your view, repeat the preceding steps as needed. 11. If you are satisfied with the configuration of your view, click Done.
Customize Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Tab Views

Both the Network View and the IP Address View may be personalized by reordering their respective default column arrangements.
To customize either the Network View or the IP Address View, simply click a column header and drag it to your preferred location. Your view personalization is saved immediately, and it is retained for the next time you use Orion IPAM. From the dropdown arrow you can select which resources to add and resize the columns to fit your needs.
Managing Orion IPAM Users

As a site administrator, you can use role definitions to adaptively restrict user access, as necessary, to maintain security without limiting your ability to delegate required network management activities. The following sections describe how to use role definitions to manage Orion IPAM users.
User Role Definitions

Orion IPAM allows site administrators to securely grant varying privilege levels to different types of Orion IPAM users. You may define users' roles from the web console menu via the Settings > Manage Accounts > Add New Account and when you get to the define settings page you need to click > IP Address Manager Settings.
The following user roles are available: Read-Only Granted the basic level of access to Orion IPAM, Read-Only users are given read-only access to the following Orion IPAM views and features:
All Orion IPAM web console resources, including search and Top XX resources not previously limited by Orion account limitations. For more information, see Understanding the IP Address Manager Summary View on page 36. All IP address and network component properties and custom fields on the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page. For more information, see Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Page on page 38. The Chart View on the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page. For more information, see For more information, see Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Page on page 38.
Operator Operators maintain the same rights granted to Read-Only users with the addition of the following abilities: IP address property and custom field management, including the ability to edit IP address properties on portions of the network made available by the site administrator. For more information, see Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Page on page 38. Addition and deletion of IP address ranges from portions of the network made available by the site administrator. For more information, see Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Page on page 38. Subnet status selection on the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page. For more information, see Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Page on page 38.
Power User Power Users maintain the same rights granted to Operators with the addition of the following abilities: Drag-and-drop reorganization of network components in the left pane of the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses view. For more information, see Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Page on page 38. Supernet and group properties management, including the ability to edit supernet and group properties and custom fields on portions of the network made available by the site administrator. For more information, see Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Page on page 38.
Administrator Administrators are granted the same access to Orion IPAM that is granted to Power Users with the following added privileges: SNMP credentials management. For more information see "Managing SNMP Credentials" on page 21.
Default
Custom fields management. For more information see Creating and Configuring Custom Fields on page 24. Subnet scan settings configuration. For more information see Managing Subnet Scans on page 58.
The Default role will have full, unlimited access to the Orion IPAM application, if the user is an Orion administrator. This role will act as read only for non-Orion administrators.
Editing User Roles

The following procedure edits existing Orion IPAM user roles. This is also where you change account passwords. To edit Orion IPAM user roles: 1. Click Settings > Accounts > Manage Accounts > in the Views menu bar. 2. Check the Account you wish to edit and click Edit. 3. Select the Orion Web Console account corresponding to which Orion IPAM user role you are defining, and then click Edit. 4. Edit as needed and then click Submit.
Chapter 3
Using Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM gives you the ability to easily monitor IP address space usage and to optimally manage IP address availability on your network. The following sections describe the various tools Orion IPAM provides to keep you informed of your network capacity.
Networking Concepts and Terminology

The following sections define the networking concepts and terminology that are used within Orion IPAM. Some Orion IPAM terms correspond specifically to status icons. For more information about the icons used in Orion IPAM, see Orion IPAM Status Icons on page 35. Available All addresses in defined groups, subnets, and supernets are, by default, considered Available until they are otherwise assigned unless they are typically reserved, as in the case of the network and broadcast addresses. In Orion IPAM, available IP addresses are indicated with a gray IP icon. For more information, see Orion IPAM Status Icons on page 35. Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) CIDR is the standard, scalable method for both designating and organizing IP addresses using variable length subnet masking to optimize packet routing efficiency over the Internet. In the CIDR standard, IP address blocks are represented using an IP address with a suffix, as in 214.100.48.00/20, where the suffix, /20, indicates the number of leading bits in the binary form of the IP address corresponding to the intended subnet. The following examples, with the leading bits of the binary expansion underlined, show equivalent representations of the same subnet:
11010110.01100100.00111001.11010101 = 214.100.57.213/32 11010110.01100100.00111001.11010000 = 214.100.57.208/28 11010110.01100100.00111001.00000000 = 214.100.57.00/24 11010110.01100100.00110000.00000000 = 214.100.48.00/20
formula for determining the size of a CIDR subnet is S = 2( n 32) , where S =

Using Orion IPAM 31
Using CIDR, network administrators have a great amount of flexibility in terms of defining the size of available IP address allocations. The basic
the number of available IP addresses and n = the CIDR suffix. The following table displays the correlation between the CIDR suffix (/n) and the number of available IP addresses, or hosts, for multiple, different CIDR suffixes.
CIDR Suffix (/n) /31 /30 /28 /26 /24 Available IP Addresses (S) 2 2=S-2 14 = S - 2 62 = S - 2 254 = S - 2 CIDR Suffix (/n) /22 /20 /18 /16 /12 Available IP Addresses (S) 1022 = S - 2 4094 = S - 2 16382 = S - 2 65534 = S - 2 1048574 = S - 2
Note: In subnets defined to contain more than 2 IP addresses, typically the smallest address identifies the subnet to the rest of the network and the largest address is designated as the broadcast address for all addresses contained within the subnet.
As a simple example case of CIDR notation with respect to subnets, both 214.100.50.20 and 214.100.61.45 are in the subnet 214.100.00.00/16 because they both share the same sixteen leading bits, represented by the decimal digits 214.100. These two IP addresses also exist in an even smaller subnet, 214.100.48.00/20, as revealed when the two addresses are expressed in binary, as follows, where the twenty leading bits, which are identical, are underlined:
11010110.01100100.00110010.00000100 = 214.100.50.04 11010110.01100100.00111101.00101101 = 214.100.61.45 11010110.01100100.00110000.00000000 = 214.100.48.00/20
Group In Orion IPAM, groups serve as containers for the subnets, supernets, and even other groups you define to organize and manage your network. For more information about creating and using groups in Orion IPAM, see Managing Groups in Orion IPAM on page 54. Reserved Typically, in subnets defined to contain more than 2 IP addresses, the smallest addressthe network addressidentifies the subnet to the rest of the network and the largest addressthe broadcast addressis used to communicate to all addresses within the subnet. Both the network address and the broadcast address are considered to be Reserved for a defined subnet. In Orion IPAM, reserved IP addresses are indicated with a purple IP icon. For more information, see Orion IPAM Status Icons on page 35.
32 Using Orion IPAM
Subnet A subnet is any logical or physical subdivision of a network consisting of a collection of IP addresses for which some number of the leading address bits, commonly called an IP address routing prefix, are identical. For example, as a simple case, both 214.100.50.20 and 214.100.61.45 are in the subnet 214.100.00.00/16, as they both share the same sixteen leading bits, represented by the decimal digits 214.100. Less obviously, these two IP addresses exist in an even smaller subnet, 214.100.48.00/20, as revealed when the two addresses are expressed in binary, as follows, where the twenty leading bits, which are identical, are underlined:
214.100.50.04 = 11010110.01100100.00110010.00000100 214.100.61.45 = 11010110.01100100.00111101.00101101 11010110.01100100.00110000.00000000 = 214.100.48.00/20
Organizing your network using well-defined subnets can greatly increase the efficiency and minimize the bandwidth load on your network. At a basic level, assigning IP addresses to devices on your network in such a way that highly interactive devices reside within smaller or closer subnets reduces the amount of network traffic that must be routed over longer network distances. For more information about creating and managing subnets in Orion IPAM, see Managing Subnets in Orion IPAM on page 56. Supernet A supernet is an element of network organization consisting of contiguous CIDR blocks, or subnets. In networks with well-defined subnets, supernets allow network administrators to consolidate and limit IP traffic to optimize routing efficiency across a network. As an example, given the following two subnets, 222.22.12.0/24 and 222.22.10.0/24, 222.22.0.0/20 is a supernet, as shown in the following expansions, where the underlining highlights the common address bits of the supernet.
222.22.12.0/24 = 11011110.00010110.00001100.00000000 222.22.10.0/24 = 11011110.00010110.00001010.00000000 222.22.0.0/20 = 11011110.00010110.00000000.00000000
Transient Orion IPAM uses the term Transient to describe IP addresses that are dynamically assigned to devices. IP addresses designated as Transient may be assigned to any of the following types of devices: devices that power on and off regularly like laptops or some user workstations
Using Orion IPAM 33
devices that enter and exit the network frequently, like laptops on a wireless network any devices on a DHCP-enabled network
Note: Transient scan intervals can be configured on a per subnet basis from the Edit Subnet window. In Orion IPAM, Transient IP addresses are indicated with a cyan colored IP icon. For more information, see Orion IPAM Status Icons on page 35. Used The Used label is provided to indicate any IP address that is currently assigned and not otherwise available. For more information, see Orion IPAM Status Icons on page 35.
Viewing Networks with Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM provides direct insight into the organization and availability of IP addresses on your network. This information is displayed using the resources of the IP Address Manager view and the three views of the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page. The following sections describe the information available on these views.
34 Using Orion IPAM
Orion IPAM Status Icons

In Orion IPAM, network components are represented by colored icons indicating the extent to which each component is used, as shown in the following table.
Icon Component Group Status Used (Closed) Used (Opened) Status Description The group is closed, but it contains at least one other component (group, subnet, or supernet). The group is open, and it cintains at least one other component (group, subnet, or supernet). All addresses in defined groups, subnets, and supernets are, by default, considered Available unless they are typically reserved, as in the case of the network and broadcast addresses, or until they are otherwise assigned. Typically, in subnets defined to contain more than 2 IP addresses, the smallest address the network addressidentifies the subnet to the rest of the network and the largest addressthe broadcast addressis used to communicate to all addresses within the subnet. Both addresses are considered to be Reserved for a defined subnet. Addresses that are dynamically assigned to devices that may power on and off regularly or that may enter and exit the network frequently are designated as Transient. Any address currently assigned to a monitored device is considered Used. At least 80 percent of all possible addresses in the subnet are designated as Used. 60 to 80 percent of all possible addresses in the subnet are designated as Used. Less than 60 percent of all possible subnet addresses are designated as Used. At least 80 percent of all possible addresses in the supernet are designated as Used. 60 to 80 percent of all possible addresses in the supernet are designated as Used. Less than 60 percent of all possible addresses in the supernet are designated as Used.
Group
Grey
IP Address
Available
Purple
IP Address
Reserved
Cyan
IP Address
Transient
Yellow Red Yellow Green Red Yellow
IP Address Subnet Subnet Subnet Supernet Supernet
Used Critical Warning Good Critical Warning
Green
Supernet
Good
Using Orion IPAM 35
Icon Red Yellow
Component DHCP Scope DHCP Scope DHCP Scope DHCP Scope
Status Critical Warning
Status Description At least 80 percent of all possible addresses in the Scope are designated as Used. 60 to 80 percent of all possible addresses in the Scope are designated as Used. Less than 60 percent of all possible addresses in the Scope are designated as Used. DHCP scope is currently disabled.
Green
Good
Disabled
Disabled
Understanding the IP Address Manager Summary View

The IP Address Manager view is the interactive center of your managed IP network. The following sections describe the default resources available on this view for managing your network. Top 10 Subnets by % IP Address Space Usage The Top 10 Subnets by % IP Address Space Usage resource provides an easily accessible report of IP address availability by defined subnet. Defined subnets are listed in decreasing order of IP address space percentage used (% IP Address Space Used). For each defined subnet, this resource provides a colored bar graph indicating the percentage of the total IP address space of your network that is currently in use or reserved. To provide further detail, this resource displays both the number of IP addresses designated for a selected subnet (IPs Used) and the number of IP addresses currently available for assignment (IPs Available) such that the % IP Address Space Used value is calculated as follows:
% IP Address Space Used =
All IPs in Subnet IPs Available All IPs in Subnet
Top 10 DHCP Scopes by % IP Address Space Usage This view displays the Top XX DHCP Scope availability. Defined Scopes are listed in decreasing order of IP address space percentage used (% IP Address Space Used). For each defined Scope, this resource provides a colored bar graph representing the percentage of IP address space available. To provide further detail, this resource displays both the number of IP addresses designated for a selected subnet (IPs Used) and the number of IP addresses currently available for assignment (IPs Available).
36 Using Orion IPAM
Search for IP Address The Search for IP Address resource allows you to search multiple fields within the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database for IP addresses you are managing with Orion IPAM. For more information about searching the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database, see Searching for IP Addresses on page 47. Custom List of Reports The Custom List of Reports resource provides a list of selected Orion reports. Any report that is either predefined or subsequently created using Orion Report Writer may be listed in this resource. For more information about creating your own custom Orion IPAM reports, see "Creating Reports with Orion IPAM" on page 71. To edit the displayed list of reports, click Edit in the resource title bar. The Edit Custom List of Reports page opens, and then you can select from available network reports to list in this resource and edit the resource Title and Subtitle. Getting Started with IP Address Manager This resource provides a quick method to get your environment configured to work with IPAM by providing quick links to set up credentials, import devices from the Engineer's Toolset, bulk add subnets and add DHCP servers to be monitored. Once completed, you can click Remove This Resource to remove this resource from appearing on the summary page. Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Tab Clicking anywhere in the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses resource provides direct access to the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page. For more information about the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page, see Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Page on page 38. DHCP Scope Management Tab Clicking anywhere in the DHCP Scope Monitoring tab provides direct access to the DHCP Scope Monitoring page. For more information about the DHCP Scope Monitoring page, see DHCP Monitoring DHCP Servers on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. thwack Recent IPAM Posts thwack.com is the online SolarWinds community for network engineers. The thwack Recent IPAM Posts resource shows the most recent Orion IPAM-related posts submitted by users to the Orion IPAM forum. Clicking the title of any listed post opens the corresponding thwack.com post in a new browser.
Using Orion IPAM 37
Clicking Edit gives you the option to set the Maximum Number of Posts to Display in the resource. Type the number of post titles you want to display in the resource, and then click Submit. Clicking View All opens the thwack.com Orion IPAM forum, where you can read all posts related to Orion IPAM.
Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Page

The Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page is the primary management interface for Orion IPAM. The page is divided into two panes. The left pane displays your entire managed network as it is organized into subnets, supernets and groups. For more information about organizing your network with subnets, see Managing Subnets in Orion IPAM on page 56. For more information about organizing your network with supernets, see Managing Supernets in Orion IPAM on page 61. For more information about organizing your network with groups, see Managing Groups on page 54. Depending on the current selection in the left pane, the right pane contains two tabs, each of which provides one of the following views: IP Address, Network, and Chart. The following sections describe the information that is available on each these Manage Subnets and IP Addresses views. IP Address View
The IP Address View displays whenever a subnet is selected, either in the Network View on the right or in the network organization pane on the left of the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page. This view provides a list of all IP addresses that are within the selected subnet. This view can be filtered by selecting the DHCP Managed dropdown menu. Each IP address is listed with a selection of IP address properties. With the exception of Last Update, which is reported by Orion IPAM as the result of a network scan, values for displayed IP address properties are set using the Edit IP Address window. For more information about editing IP address properties, see Adding IPv4 Address on page 47.
38 Using Orion IPAM
Network View
The Network View displays whenever a group or supernet is selected in the network organization pane on the left of the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page. If a group is selected, this view provides a list of all other groups, supernets, and subnets that are defined within the selected group. If a supernet is selected, this view provides a list of all subnets that are defined within the selected supernet. The Network Tab also provides the ability to edit a single IP Address, delete and import subnets by bulk. The status of displayed network components is designated using colored icons. For more information about network component icons, see Orion IPAM Status Icons on page 35. Each network component (group, subnet, and supernet) is listed with a selection of component properties. With the exception of Last Discovery, which is reported by Orion IPAM as the result of a network scan, values for displayed network component properties are set using the appropriate Edit Network Component Properties window. For more information about editing group, properties, see Editing Groups on page 55. For more information about editing subnet properties, see Editing Subnets on page 58. For more information about editing supernet properties, see Editing Supernets on page 62. Chart View The Chart View is always available in the right pane of the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page, and it provides a concise, visual report of your IP address allocation for any network component selected in the network organization pane to the left. A pie chart displays the designated statuses of your monitored IP addresses and an availability report displays both the percentage of all possible IP addresses in the selected group, subnet, or supernet that are present for monitoring and the percentage of present IP addresses that are available for assignment. For more information about IP address states in Orion IPAM, see Orion IPAM Status Icons on page 35.
DHCP Scope Monitoring Page

The DHCP Scope Monitoring page is divided into two panes. The left pane displays your entire managed network as it is organized into Scopes or Servers. You can filter how these are grouped by using the drop down arrow.
Using Orion IPAM 39
The right pane contains two tabs, each of which provides one of the following views: Scopes tab and the DHCP Servers tab. The following sections describe the information that is available on each these views. Scopes tab
The Scopes View displays a list of all DHCP Scopes that are monitored with IPAM. Selecting a Scope switches the view to the Manage Subnets & IP Addresses view where all the IP Addresses within that scope are displayed. Information such as Type, Status, MAC address, DNS, Lease Expiration and Lease Remaining time frames are displayed. This selection of properties is reported by Orion IPAM as the result of a network scan. For more information about editing DHCP Scope properties, see DHCP Scope Monitoring Page" on page "Error! Bookmark not defined.". DHCP Servers tab
The DHCP Servers View displays a list of all DHCP Scopes that are monitored with IPAM. Selecting a Server switches the view to the Manage Subnets & IP Addresses view where all the IP Addresses within that server are displayed. Information such as Type, Status, MAC address, DNS, Lease Expiration and Lease Remaining time frames are displayed. This selection of properties is reported by Orion IPAM as the result of a network scan. For more information about editing DHCP Server properties, see Monitoring DHCP Servers on page Error! Bookmark not defined..
40 Using Orion IPAM
Importing IP Addresses and Settings from a File

Orion IPAM supports the import of IP addresses and settings from a spreadsheets, such as Microsoft Excel .xls and .csv files. The following columns list the types of network information that Orion IPAM can import directly. Users can choose which columsn to import.
The following procedure imports IP addresses and settings into the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database.
Using Orion IPAM 41
To import IP addresses and settings into Orion IPAM using a file: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click IPAM Settings in the right corner. 3. Click IP Address & Subnet Import. 4. Next to the File to Upload field, click Browse. 5. Locate the file containing the IP addresses, subnets, or settings you want to import, and then click Open. 6. Select the File Type for the file you want to upload, and then click Next. 7. For each Spreadsheet Column value from the import file select a corresponding Database Column name to use in the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database. 8. Click Next. 9. If the spreadsheet column values from the import file do not match the column types you have selected for the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database, complete the following steps to correct the indicated mismatches, repeating as necessary: a. Hover over an incorrect value, as indicated by a red icon or underline, to determine the cause of the mismatch. b. Click Back to correct your column selections. c. Click Next. 10. If the spreadsheet column values match the column types you have selected, click Next to complete the import. 11. If a subnet does not exist for any of your imported IP addresses, click Next to create subnets for these orphaned IP addresses. For more information about creating and assigning subnets to orphaned IP addresses, see Viewing and Managing Orphaned IP Addresses on page 45. Notes: An IPv4 Address column is required for all imports. Confirm that at least one spreadsheet column maps to an IPv4 Address column in the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database. Only rows appearing to have a valid IPv4 address are imported. Orion IPAM uses the data in the first non-empty row of the imported file to suggest appropriate labels for the columns in the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database.
42 Using Orion IPAM
Attempt to map all unlabeled Spreadsheet Columns to a provided Database Column name. Orion IPAM provides a preview before any changes are made permanent.
Updating IP Address properties from a File into an Existing Subnet

The following procedure gives you the ability to add and edit IP addresses and properties of existing subnets monitored within Orion IPAM To import IP addresses and settings into Orion IPAM using a file: 1. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses tab 2. Select the subnet you wish to insert IP Addresses. 3. Select Import 4. Browse to select a file. 5. Select File type. 6. If you do not want to overwrite existing addresses ensure the Restrict to subnet is checked. 7. Click Next 8. Match the spreadsheet column header on the left with the IPAM database column on the right, depending on which properties you want to change. 9. Click Next 10. View any import validation errors. 11. Click Next to complete the import. 12. Click Done.
Importing by Bulk Adding Subnets

From the ManageSubnets & IP Addresses page users can easily bulk import subnets by typing or copying IP Addresses in the page.
Using Orion IPAM 43
To import subnets with the bulk feature: 1. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses tab 2. Click Import 3. Select Bulk Add Subnets 4. Insert Subnet/CIDR Prefixes in the box 5. Click Parse and Show Results Below 6. Click Next 7. Click to view the selected subnets. 8. If you want to move the new subnets into the smallest appropriate supernet check Move new subnets into the smallest appropriate supernet. 9. Enter appropriate subnet properties. 10. If you do not want system scans to overwrite system information check Disable Automatic Scanning. 11. Enter the desired scanning interval in minutes. 12. Click Done.
Importing IPs and Subnets Using the SolarWinds Engineer's Toolset

To import subnets and IP Addresses from the Engineer's Toolset: 1. Locate the Toolset IP Address Manager database on your Toolset server. Note: The Toolset IP Address Manager database has an .ipdb extension. 2. Copy the Toolset IP Address Manager database to an appropriate location on your Orion server. 3. Open a Command Prompt on the Orion server. 4. Enter CD "\Program Files\SolarWinds\Orion\IPAM" 5. Enter NET STOP "SolarWinds IPAM Information Service" 6. Enter SolarWinds.IPAM.Init.exe -import <Fullpath to your Toolset IP Address Manager database> 7. Enter NET START ''SolarWinds IPAM Information Service''
44 Using Orion IPAM
Viewing and Managing Orphaned IP Addresses

After the importing of IP addresses from a spreadsheet it is possible that one or more IP addresses may have been imported without being assigned to a managed subnet. In order to properly manage your network, Orion IPAM requires that all IP addresses are assigned to a managed subnet, even if the managed subnet contains only a single IP address. If Orion IPAM is unable to locate a configured subnet for each imported IP address, the following warning banner displays above the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses view: X imported IP addresses do not have a parent subnet. These orphaned IP addresses will not appear in Orion until parent subnets are assigned. The following procedure assigns parent subnets to orphaned IP addresses to enable their management by Orion IPAM. Notes: o If you try to manage more IP addresses than your current license allows, Orion IPAM will add as many IP addresses as allowed. The remaining addresses will be added as orphaned IP addresses.
To assign a parent subnet to an orphaned IP address: 1. Click Assign parent subnets to orphaned IPs in the warning banner. 2. Check a single orphaned IP address. 3. Click Assign Subnet. 4. If you do not want to use the default Subnet Name provided by Orion IPAM, provide a new Subnet Name for the new parent subnet. Orion IPAM suggests both a Subnet Address and a CIDR prefix length based on the actual orphaned IP address. The default Subnet Name provided by Orion IPAM is a concatenation of the Subnet Address and the CIDR prefix length. 5. If you do not want to use the default Subnet Address and CIDR prefix length provided by Orion IPAM, provide a new Subnet Address and an appropriate CIDR prefix length for the new parent subnet. Notes: Orion IPAM suggests both a Subnet Address and a CIDR prefix length based on the actual orphaned IP address. For more information about CIDR and subnet addressing, see Networking Concepts and Terminology on page 31. Orion IPAM instantly confirms the validity of provided Subnet Address and CIDR prefix length combinations. For more information about CIDR and subnet addressing, see Networking Concepts and Terminology on page 31.
Using Orion IPAM 45
6. These fields are optional; provide a Description, VLAN ID, and Location for the new parent subnet. 7. Use the slider to set the Scan Interval. 8. If you do not want Orion IPAM to automatically scan your new parent subnet for changes, check Disable Automatic Scanning. 9. Click Save when you have completed configuring your new parent subnet.
Exporting IP Addresses and Settings

Orion IPAM also allows you to export IP addresses and settings, including any custom fields you have defined, as Microsoft Excel (.xls and .csv) files. The following procedure exports IP addresses and settings from the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database as columns in a new spreadsheet. To export IP addresses and settings from Orion IPAM: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. If you want to export an entire group, click the parent group of the group you want to export in the network organization pane on the left, and then check the group in the Network View on the right. 4. If you want to export an entire supernet, click a parent group or supernet of the supernet you want to export in the network organization pane on the left, and then check the supernets in the Network View on the right. Note: Before Orion IPAM can export any supernet, the supernet must be populated with at least one defined subnet. 5. If you want to export an entire subnet, click a parent group or supernet of the subnet you want to export in the network organization pane on the left, and then check the subnets in the Network View on the right. Note: Orion IPAM can only export subnets that have been properly defined and populated with IP addresses. 6. If you want to export IP addresses, click the parent subnet of the IP address you want to export in the network organization pane on the left, and then check the IP addresses to export in the Network View on the right. 7. Click Export in the toolbar. 8. Check the columns you want to export.
46 Using Orion IPAM
Note: The IPv4 Address column is selected automatically, and it becomes the first column in the generated spreadsheet. Each additional setting or property you check becomes an additional column in the generated spreadsheet. 9. Click Export. 10. When you are prompted to open or save the file, click Save. 11. Provide an appropriate file name and location for the generated spreadsheet, and then click Save.
Managing IP Addresses with Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM automatically monitors all IP addresses in subnets defined with 4096 IP addresses (/21 or 255.255.248.0 mask) or fewer. IP address ranges allow you to manage IP addresses in larger subnets. The following sections provide details with respect to managing IP addresses on your network.
Adding IPv4 Addresses

To help you maintain an organized network, Orion IPAM does not allow for the addition of an individual IP address unless it exists within a subnet previously designated for monitoring. The following options are available for adding IP addresses to Orion IPAM: o A range of IP addresses can be added to any defined subnet. This is usually done when you want to monitor specific addresses within a large subnet. For smaller subnets containing 4096 or fewer IP addresses (/21 or 255.255.248.0 and higher mask), Orion IPAM automatically monitors all included IP addresses. For more information, see Adding a Range of IP Addresses on page 48. IP addresses may be added for monitoring by adding a parent subnet into any existing group, supernet, or subnet that Orion IPAM is already monitoring. Adding such a subnet is a straightforward process. For more information about adding subnets, see Creating Subnets on page 56. The Subnet Allocation Wizard allows you to directly define subnets and allocate included IP addresses. For more information about the Subnet Allocation Wizard, see Using the Subnet Allocation Wizard on page 59.

IPAM provides the ability to add IPv6 Sites and Addresses for planning purposes. These addresses can then be grouped and organized to have their statuses monitored. See "Adding IPv6 Addresses" on page "72" for more information.
Using Orion IPAM 47
Adding a Range of IP Addresses

Particularly in the case of larger subnets, it can be useful to deal with IP addresses in terms of defined IP address ranges, such as 6.6.16.16.6.16.15 in a 6.6.16.0 / 20 subnet. The following procedure provides the steps required to add a range of IP addresses within a defined subnet. Note: By default, Orion IPAM displays all IP addresses in a subnet if the selected subnet contains 4096 or fewer IP addresses (/21 or 255.255.248.0 and higher mask). For these smaller subnets, it is not necessary to add IP address ranges for monitoring unless you have previously deleted the addresses in the range you want to add. To add a range of IP addresses within a defined subnet: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses 3. In the network tree pane on the left, click the subnet into which you want to add your new range of IP address range. Note: For subnets with more than 4096 IP addresses (lower than /21 or 255.255.248.0 mask), the right pane displays No IP addresses have
previously been added unless you have already added a range of IP addresses within the selected subnet. 4. Click IP Range > Add in the IP Address view in the right pane.
5. Provide both the Starting IP Address and the Ending IP Address of your new IP address range. Orion IPAM will not allow IP address ranges defined outside the subnet indicated in the Parent Address field. 6. Click Save.
48 Using Orion IPAM
Deleting IP Addresses from Monitoring

Complete the following procedure provides the steps required to delete monitored IP addresses from within a defined subnet. If a defined subnet contains more than 4096 IP addresses (lower than /21 or 255.255.248.0 mask), Orion IPAM only displays IP addresses in previously added ranges. For these larger subnets, you must add IP address ranges for monitoring before Orion IPAM can display addresses that may be deleted. To delete IP addresses from within a defined subnet: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Click the subnet from which you want to delete a range in the left tree pane of IP addresses. Note: For subnets with more than 4096 IP addresses (lower than /21 or 255.255.248.0 mask), the right pane displays No IP addresses have previously been added unless you have already added a range of IP addresses within the selected subnet. 4. Check the IP addresses to delete in the right pane IP Address view. 5. Click IP Range > Remove. 6. Click Yes to confirm the deletion, and then click Save.
Setting IP Address Status

The status of any monitored IP address within a defined subnet may be set from the IP Address View on the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page, as shown in the following procedure. Note: If a subnet contains more than 4096 IP addresses (lower than /21 or 255.255.248.0 mask), Orion IPAM only displays IP addresses in previously added ranges. For these larger subnets, you must add IP address ranges for monitoring before Orion IPAM can display addresses that may be managed. To set the status of an IP address within a defined subnet: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses, and then click the subnet containing the IP address for which you want to set the status in the left tree pane.
Using Orion IPAM 49
Note: For subnets with more than 4096 IP addresses (lower than /21 or 255.255.248.0 mask), the right pane displays No IP addresses have previously been added unless you have already added a range of IP addresses within the selected subnet. 3. Check the IP addresses to modify in the right pane IP Address view. 4. Click Set Status, and then select the appropriate status. For more information about the definition of available status icons, see Orion IPAM Status Icons on page 35.
Editing IP Address Properties

Orion IPAM can store a wide array of information about the devices to which IP addresses are assigned. The following table lists the properties Orion IPAM can record in the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database.
IP Address Properties Comment Last Credential MAC Address Status System Location Vendor Lease Expiration DNS Last Response Time Machine Type System Contact System Name Device Status Scanning Status IPv6 Address Last Synchronization Node Alias System Description Type Dynamic Node Alias
You can edit IP address properties directly from the IP Address View, including custom properties, on the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page. The following procedure provides the steps required to edit the properties of an IP address within a defined subnet. Note: If a defined subnet contains more than 4096 IP addresses (lower than /21 or 255.255.248.0 mask), Orion IPAM only displays IP addresses in previously added ranges. For these larger subnets, you must add IP address ranges for monitoring before Orion IPAM can display addresses that may be managed. To edit an IP address within a defined subnet: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses tab. 3. Click the subnet containing the IP address you want to edit in the left tree pane.
50 Using Orion IPAM
Note: For subnets with more than 4096 IP addresses (lower than /21 or 255.255.248.0 mask), the right pane will display No IP addresses have previously been added unless you have already added a range of IP addresses within the selected subnet. 4. Check the IP address to edit in the in the right IP Address view pane. 5. Click Edit and then select or provide appropriate values for each listed IP address property. Note: If you have defined custom fields for IP addresses, they are available for editing. For more information about configuring custom fields in Orion IPAM, see Creating and Configuring Custom Fields on page 24. 6. Click Save when you have completed configuration of IP address properties. Note: Selecting the Scanning option to Off will not modify values normally overwritten by network scanning.
Multiple Edit IP Address Properties

Orion IPAM allows you to mass edit properties of selected IP Address ranges. Mass editing allows you to change the Status, Type and Scanning statuses for selected ranges, along with additional user fields and system information. To edit multiple IP ranges: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click the Manage Subnets & IP Addresses tab. 3. Select the subnet you want to edit from the left pane. 4. Click Select IP Range from the right menu pane. 5. Enter the starting and ending IP Addresses. 6. Click Select + Edit to edit the properties. 7. Check the necessary boxes to edit and select from the dropdown choices. 8. Click Save Note: System Information will be overwritten if scanning is enabled. You can turn off automatic scanning by selecting Off from the Scanning dropdown menu. To remove multiple IP ranges: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click the Manage Subnets & IP Addresses tab. 3. Select the subnet you want to edit from the left pane. 4. Click Select IP Range.
Using Orion IPAM 51
5. Enter the starting and ending IP Addresses. 6. Click Select + Remove to remove the selected range from IPAM. 7. Click Yes
Searching for IP Addresses

The Orion IPAM Search feature provides the ability to search for all of the IP Address resources existing within the IPAM database. The following table provides the available search criteria.
Search Criteria All Fields Alias Comments Contact DNS Group Description Group Name Hostname IPv4 Address IPv6 Address MAC Address Machine Type Scope Name Status System Description System Location System Name Vendor VLAN ID Custom Property Description This field will search all search criteria fields Search by the address alias Search for a specific comment Search for a contact name Search using the DNS Search by a group/subnet+ description Search by a group name Search by Hostname Search for a IPv4-formatted addresses Search for a Dual Stack IPv6-addresses Search by a specific MAC address Search by the machine type Search by scope name Search by status; Used, Available, Reserved, Transient Search by system description Search by a physical location Search by system name Search by vendor Search by VLAN ID Search by an existing custom property
The following procedure details how to use the IPAM search resource. To search the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database:
52 Using Orion IPAM
1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Under the Search for IP Address dropdown you can check the criteria relevant to your search. 3. Type a string or IP address and then click Search. Note: Wildcards (*,?) are permitted, as shown in the following examples:
Cisco*, 10.15.*.*, W?ndows, Server-*, *.SolarWinds.com
Orion IPAM queries the Orion IPAM table of your Orion database and displays a list of IP addresses matching the provided criteria. Each IP address is listed, in numerical order, with the following user selected information, if available:
Clicking any listed IP address opens the IP Address View for that IP address. From the IP Address View you can edit properties and set the status of the
Using Orion IPAM 53
selected IP address. For more information about the IP Address View, see Understanding the IP Address View on page 38.
Historical Tracking
IPAM offers the historical tracking of addresses to see how certain properties have changed over time. For example, you can track MAC addresses and hostnames previously assigned to an IP Address. This feature is available from the IP Address view page by clicking View Details and the Search Results page, where you can select the option to include historical results previously assigned to an IP Address. To view Historical Tracking options from the IP Address view: 1. Select the IP Address you want to view. 2. Click View Details.
To view Historical Tracking options using the Search feature: 1. 2. Enter a Search term and proceed to the Search Results page Click View Assignment History
3. Select one of the following: IP Address Assignment History, MAC Assignment History, DNS Assignment History Note: The displayed DateTime format depends on browser settings, not on regional system settings.
Managing Groups in Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM provides groups as a general aid to network organization. The drag-and-drop user interface makes it easy to create groups that contain any number of other groups, supernets, subnets or individual IP addresses. For example, in the case of a large network spread over multiple offices, each with its own sales, marketing and development, departments, Orion IPAM allows you to create groups to organize your entire network:
54 Using Orion IPAM
BranchOffice1 Sales1 Marketing1 Development1
Each branch office unit may have its own assigned IP addresses or subnet of your entire network. Using Orion IPAM, you can group all the various network components related to each department of each branch office into its own group. The following sections provide general instructions for creating and editing IP network groups in Orion IPAM.
Creating Groups
The following procedure creates a group for organizing your network components. To create a network group: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Click the network or group into which you want to add your new group in the left network tree pane. 4. Click Add > Group. 5. Provide an appropriate Group Name and Description for your new group. 6. If you have defined custom fields for groups, provide appropriate values in the available custom fields. For more information about configuring custom fields in Orion IPAM, see Creating and Configuring Custom Fields on page 24. 7. Click Save. 8. Drag-and-drop other groups, subnets, and supernets into your new group to organize your network.
Editing Groups
The following procedure edits the properties of an existing group. To edit an existing network group: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Click the group you want to edit in the left tree pane.
Using Orion IPAM 55
4. Click Properties. 5. Edit the existing Group Name and Description as appropriate. 6. If you have defined custom fields for groups, edit the values in the available custom fields, as necessary. For more information about configuring custom fields in Orion IPAM, see Creating and Configuring Custom Fields on page 24. 7. Click Save.
Managing Subnets in Orion IPAM

Subnet creation and editing are primary functions Orion IPAM provides for network managers. The following sections detail the creation and editing of subnets with Orion IPAM.
Creating Subnets
Orion IPAM provides two methods for creating subnets. The Orion IPAM Subnet Allocation Wizard creates subnets within a designated supernet based on a desired subnet size. For more information about the Subnet Allocation Wizard, see Using the Subnet Allocation Wizard on page 59. The second method creates individual subnets within selected subnets, supernets, and groups, directly from the Manage Subnets and IP Addresses page, as shown in the following procedure. To create a new network subnet: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. In the network tree pane on the left, click the network, group, or supernet into which you want to add your new subnet. 4. Click Add > Subnet. 5. Provide an appropriate Subnet Name for your new subnet.If you leave this field empty, Orion IPAM automatically generates a name based on the Subnet Address and CIDR prefix length you provide. 6. Provide a new Subnet Address and an appropriate CIDR prefix length for the new subnet. Note: Orion IPAM instantly confirms the validity of provided Subnet Address and CIDR prefix length combinations. For more information about CIDR and subnet addressing, see Networking Concepts and Terminology on page 31. 7. If you want to further identify your new subnet, provide a Description, VLAN ID, or Location for the new subnet.
56 Using Orion IPAM
8. If you have defined custom fields for subnets, provide appropriate values. For more information about configuring custom fields in Orion IPAM, see Creating and Configuring Custom Fields on page 24. 9. Use the slider to set the Scan Interval. 10. If you do not want Orion IPAM to automatically scan your new subnet for changes, check Disable Automatic Scanning. 11. Click Save when you have completed configuring your new subnet. You can now drag-and-drop your new subnet into other groups and supernets, to organize your network.
Allowing Duplicate Subnets

The ability to add duplicate subnets is disabled by default. You can enable this in the IPAM Settings page. There are some specific use cases where duplicate subnets are desirable. Most of those involve using IPAM as a passive address management system. For example, if an MSP has customers on duplicate internal addresses, IPAM would allow you to create the duplicate space and give the subnet a different name. Obviously in this scenario, they are not scanning because the scan would return the same results. If you find the need to have duplicate subnets, the following steps detail how to enable this setting. To enable duplicate subnets: 1. Click IPAM System Settings.
2.
Check Enable Duplicated Subnets.
Using Orion IPAM 57
3.
Click Save.
Editing Subnets
The edit subnet properties box allows you to edit the properties of an existing subnet, as well as add additional custom information and custom URLs. You can disable the Automatic Scanning or change the scan interval. To edit an existing network subnet: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Click the subnet you want to edit in the left tree pane. 4. Click Properties. 5. Edit the existing Subnet Name and the CIDR prefix length for your subnet. 6. Edit the Description, VLAN ID, or Location for your subnet, as necessary. 7. Click Save when you have completed configuring your subnet.
Managing Subnet Scans

Orion IPAM is capable of conducting both automatic and manual scans of monitored subnets, and the Subnet Scan Status view displays all subnet scans that are either currently in progress or scheduled for completion. Subnet scans are listed according to the Database Column property for each scanned subnet. For more information about subnet properties, see Editing Subnets on page 58. For each subnet scan listed, the Subnet Scan Status view displays the following: o Status provides the time when the next scan of the corresponding subnet will begin. If the scan is in progress, Status displays the time elapsed since the scan started.
58 Using Orion IPAM
o o
The Scan Type is either Automated or Last Discovery indicates the date and time when the corresponding subnet was last scanned.
The following procedure provides the steps required to manage subnet scans from the Subnet Scan Status view. To manage subnet scans: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click IPAM Settings. 3. Click View subnet scan status in the Subnet Scans grouping. 4. If you want to change the settings of any listed subnet scan, click Edit at the end of the corresponding row. Clicking Edit at the end of a listed subnet scan row opens the Edit Subnet Properties window wherein you can enable or disable automatic scanning and set an appropriate scan interval for the selected subnet. For more information about editing subnet properties, see Editing Subnets on page 58.
Using the Subnet Allocation Wizard

Orion IPAM provides the Subnet Allocation Wizard to help you efficiently organize your managed IP address space into subnets that are sized appropriately for the extent and traffic of your network. With its realtime subnet calculator, the Orion IPAM Subnet Allocation Wizard allows you to quickly determine the most efficient way to subdivide any supernet, as shown in the following procedure. To create subnets from supernets using the Subnet Allocation Wizard: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. In the network tree pane on the left, click Add > Subnet Allocation Wizard. 4. Type the address of the supernet to divide in the Supernet Address field.
Using Orion IPAM 59
5. Select an appropriate CIDR prefix length. Note: Orion IPAM instantly confirms the validity of provided the Supernet Address and CIDR prefix length combinations. For more information about CIDR, see Networking Concepts and Terminology on page 31. 6. Select the Desired Subnet Size. Note: Typically, in subnets defined to contain more than 2 IP addresses, the first and last addresses are reserved as the network address, for identifying the subnet to the rest of the network, and the broadcast address, for communicating with all addresses within the subnet, respectively. As a result, the number of available IP addresses is always two fewer than the number actually contained within a given subnet. 7. If you only want to see subnets that have already been allocated, clear Show subnets not already allocated. 8. Click Refresh to display a list of all possible subnets that may be allocated, based on your provided criteria. 9. Check the subnets you want to manage in Orion IPAM, and then click Next. 10. If you want to view the subnets you are currently adding, click + next to the XX Selected Subnets header. 11. If you do not want to keep the supernet you used on the previous view to define the subnets you are adding, clear Add Supernet X.X.X.X / X. Note: By default, Orion IPAM adds the supernet you used to define your subnets to make it easier to organize your network. Although it is optional, SolarWinds recommends that you check this option and use the supernet unless you are only adding a few subnets. 12. If you do not want to organize your added subnets into the smallest available supernet, clear Move newly added subnets into smallest appropriate supernet. Note: Adding subnets either to an existing supernet or to a newly defined supernet can make it easier to organize your network. Although it is optional, SolarWinds recommends that you check this option and keep the supernet unless you are only adding a few subnets. 13. If you want to further identify your new subnets, provide a Description, VLAN ID, or Location for the new subnets. 14. If you do not want Orion IPAM to automatically scan your new subnets for changes, check Disable Automatic Scanning. 15. If you want Orion IPAM to automatically scan your new subnets for changes, use the slider to set the Scan Interval. 16. Click Done when you have completed configuring your new subnets.
60 Using Orion IPAM
Managing Supernets in Orion IPAM

Supernets are extremely useful organizational tools for managing your network. The following sections detail the creation and editing of supernets in Orion IPAM.
Creating Supernets
The following procedure creates a new supernet for organizing your network components. To create a new network supernet: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. In the network tree pane on the left, click the network, supernet, or group into which you want to add your new supernet. 4. Click Add > Supernet. 5. Provide an appropriate Supernet Name for your new subnet. Note: If you leave this field empty, Orion IPAM automatically generates a name based on the Supernet Address and CIDR prefix length you provide. 6. Provide a new Supernet Address and an appropriate CIDR prefix length for the new subnet. Note: Orion IPAM instantly confirms the validity of provided Supernet Address and CIDR prefix length combinations. For more information about CIDR and supernet addressing, see Networking Concepts and Terminology on page 31. 7. If you want to further identify your new supernet, provide a Description for the new supernet. 8. If you have already defined any custom fields for supernets, provide appropriate values in the available custom fields. For more information about configuring custom fields in Orion IPAM, see Creating and Configuring Custom Fields on page 24. 9. When you have completed configuring your new supernet, click Save. You can now drag-and-drop your new supernet into other groups and supernets and drag-and-drop other supernets and subnets into your new supernet to organize your network.
Using Orion IPAM 61
Editing Supernets
The following procedure edits the properties of an existing supernet. To edit an existing network supernet: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Click the supernet you want to edit in the left tree pane. 4. Click Properties. 5. Edit the existing Supernet Name and the CIDR prefix length for your supernet. Note: Orion IPAM instantly confirms the validity of provided Supernet Address and CIDR prefix length combinations. For more information about CIDR and supernet addressing, see Networking Concepts and Terminology on page 31. 6. Edit the Description for your subnet, as necessary. 7. If you have defined custom fields for supernets, edit the values in the available custom fields, as necessary. For more information about configuring custom fields in Orion IPAM, see Creating and Configuring Custom Fields on page 24. 8. When you have completed configuring your supernet, click Save.
IPv6 Monitoring
IPAM provides the ability to add IPv6 Sites and Subnets for planning purposes. IPv6 addresses can then be grouped to assist with network organization. To leverage the amount of addresses available, as well as the organizational features inherent with the implementation, you should create a logical address plan. For example, you could designate two nibbles (a nibble is 4 bits or 1 hex character) for your country code. This will give you 2^8, or 256, possibilities for unique countries. Next, you would want to designate another nibble for state or location. Finally, you would designate bits for site, building, and floor. 1. Create an IPv6 Global site called SolarWinds v6 Lab.
62 Using Orion IPAM
2. Then add you IPv6 Sites,
3. Then add a building and floors.

The following steps detail the process of adding an IPv6 Addresses. The process entails three parts: Creating a IPv6 Global Prefix, creating an IPv6 Site, and then assigning IPv6 Addresses to the site. To add an IPv6 Global Prefix: 1. Click IP Addesses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Select a directory folder from the left menu tree and then Click Add > IPv6 Global Prefix.* 4. Provide an appropriate Name and Description. 5. Enter the Global Prefix address.
Using Orion IPAM 63
6. Click Save. *Note: An IPv6 address global prefix is a combination of an IPv6 prefix (address) and a prefix length. The prefix takes the form ipv6-prefix/prefix-length and represents a block of address space (or a network). The ipv6-prefix variable follows general IPv6 addressing rules (see RFC 2373 for details). The /prefixlength variable is a decimal value that indicates the number of contiguous, higher-order bits of the address that make up the network portion of the address. For example, 10FA:6604:8136:6502::/64 is a possible IPv6 prefix.
Editing an IPv6 Prefix

Once an IPv6 Global Prefix has been created and addresses have been assigned, you cannot edit the prefix. To change an IPv6 Global Prefix you must delete the prefix and create a new one. If you have only created a Prefix, then you can click Edit to edit the prefix before adding addresses.
Adding IPv6 Subnets

To add IPv6 subnets: 1. Click IP Addesses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. From the left tree menu select the IPv6 Site you want to add the subnet under. 4. Click Add IPv6 Subnet. 5. Enter Name and Description and click Save.
Editing IPv6 Subnets

To Edit IPv6 subnets: 1. Click IP Addesses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Expand the IPv6 Site in the left tree and select the subnet. 4. Click Edit IPv6 Subnet. 5. Edit as needed and click Save.

To Add IPv6 addresses:
64 Using Orion IPAM
1. Click IP Addesses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Expand the IPv6 Site in the left tree and select the subnet for which you want to assign addresses to.. 4. Click Add IP Address. 5. Enter address and select the status as needed and then click Save.
Edit an IPv6 Address

To edit an IPv6 address: 1. Click IP Addesses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Place a check in front of the address you want to edit 4. Click Edit. 5. Edit as desired and then click Save.
Edit Mulitple IPv6 Addresses

To edit multiple IPv6 addresses: 1. Click IP Addesses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Select from the left tree parent IPv6 Subnet. 4. Under the IP Address View tab, place checks in front of the addresses you want to edit. You can select all by checking the top box. Hold down ctrl and click to select various addresses. 5. Click Edit. 6. Click Save.
Deleting IPv6 Subnets

To delete multiple IPv6 subnets: 1. Click IP Addesses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Select from the left tree the IPv6 Subnet you want to delete.
Using Orion IPAM 65
4. Click Delete. 5. Verify the subnet in the popup window as the one you want to delete and then click Delete Listed Itmes.
Deleting IPv6 Addresses

To delete multiple IPv6 addresses: 1. Click IP Addesses in the Modules menu bar. 2. Click Manage Subnets & IP Addresses. 3. Select from the left tree the parent IPv6 Subnet 4. Under the IP Address View tab, place checks in front of the addresses you want to delete. You can select all by checking the top box. Hold down ctrl and click to select various addresses. 5. Click Delete. 6. Verify the addresses in the popup window as the ones you want to delete and then click Delete Listed Items.
Monitoring DHCP Scopes in Orion IPAM

This section details how to configure IPAM to monitor Cisco IOS and Microsoft DHCP servers. Note: Before adding Cisco DHCP devices in IPAM, the devices being added must support the following: 1. Cisco Commands that need to be supported: - show running-config - show ip dhcp pool - show ip dhcp binding 2. The device needs to be a Layer 3 Switch or Router. 3. The IOS must be version 12.2(8)T or later. Enable level 15 is required to view the complete configuration. This is due to how IOS manages permission levels and configuration information. For more information see http://www.cisco.com/en/US/tech/tk59/technologies_tech_note09186a00800949d 5.shtml.
66 Using Orion IPAM
Creating DHCP Scopes

The following procedure creates a new DHCP Scope for organizing your network components. To create a new DHCP Scope: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. Click DHCP Scope Monitoring. Click Scopes. Click Add New > Found DHCP Scope. Select the DHCP node to be added from the list of nodes.
6. Choose or create the necessary credentials from the drop down list. Then click TEST to verify the credential. For more details on CLI credentials see "Managing CLI Credentials for Cisco DHCP Scope Scans" on page "19". 7. Select the Server Scan Settings. Default is set to 4 hours.
8. If you want to automatically add new scopes and subnets after scanning, check the box. 9. If you want to IPAM to scan using ICMP and SNMP to obtain additional IP Address details, check the Enable subnet scanning box and select the scanning interval. 10. To finish, click ADD DHCP Scope
Note: DHCP Servers must already be defined as Nodes. All Windows credentials are sent in clear text during configuration only. The Windows account specified within IPAM must be on the DHCP server and one of the three following groups: DHCP Users, DHCP Administrators and or local Administrators. IPAM impersonates the specified account on the local computer to gain access. If the IPAM computer is not within the same windows domain as the DHCP server, the IPAM computer must have the identical account and password.
Editing DHCP Scopes

The following procedure edits the scope detail properties of an existing IPAM DHCP Scope. To edit an existing DHCP Scope: 1. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar.
Using Orion IPAM 67
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Click DHCP Scope Monitoring. Click Scopes. Select the Scope Name that you want to edit by using the check box. Click Edit Scope Details in the menu bar. Edit as necessary and then click Save.
Note: The edited properties are fields specific to IPAM and not related to any data in the DHCP server.
Removing Scopes
The following procedure will remove an existing DHCP Scope. To remove an existing DHCP Scope: 1. 2. 3. Click IP Address Manager in the Modules menu bar. Click DHCP Scope Monitoring. Click Scopes tab.
4. Select the DHCP Servers that you want to remove by checking the boxes. 5. 6. Click Remove Servers. Click Delete Listed Items
68 Using Orion IPAM
Monitoring DHCP Servers

DHCP Scope Monitoring allows you to add/edit DHCP Servers or Scopes and configure the scan settings. To configure DHCP scan settings 1. Click on the DHCP Scope Monitoring tab. 2. Click Add New DHCP Server. 3. Select the DHCP node to be added from the list of nodes. 4. Choose or create the necessary Windows Credentials or CLI Credentials from the drop down list. Then click Test to verify the credential. 5. Select the DHCP Server Scan Settings. Default is set to 4 hours. 6. If you want to automatically add new scopes and subnets after scanning, check the box. 7. New Scope and Subnet Settings: If you want IPAM to scan for additional IP Address details using ICMP and SNMP, check the Enable subnet scanning to pick up additional IP Address details box and select the scanning interval. 8. To finish, click Add DHCP Server Note: Only Cisco DHCP and Microsoft DHCP Servers on Windows 2003 and 2008 are supported. DHCP Servers must already be defined as Nodes. Note: All Windows credentials are sent in clear text during configuration only. Consider updating credentials while locally logged into the IPAM server or over an HTTPS connection. The Windows account specified within IPAM must exist on the DHCP server and be a member of one of the three following groups: DHCP Users, DHCP Administrators and or local Administrators. IPAM impersonates the specified account on the local computer in order gain access. If the IPAM computer is not within the same windows domain as the DHCP server, the IPAM computer must have the identical account and password.
Editing DHCP Servers

The following procedure edits the properties of an existing DHCP Server. To edit an existing DHCP Server: 1. Click on the DHCP Scope Monitoring tab. 2. Select the DHCP Server that you want to edit by checking the box.
Using Orion IPAM 69
3. Click Edit Server. 4. Edit as necessary and then click Save. Note: The edited properties are fields specific to IPAM and not related to any data in the DHCP server.
Removing Servers
The following procedure will remove an existing DHCP Server. To remove an existing DHCP Server: 1. Click on the DHCP Servers tab. 2. Select the DHCP Servers that you want to remove by checking the boxes. 3. Click Remove Servers. 4. Click Delete Listed Items
DHCP Graph View

The Graph View tab presents a graphical representation of the selected DHCP Servers IP Address percentage use. Unless certain Scopes/Servers are selected, the DHCP graph view will collect statistics for what is visible in the current tab. To view a DHCP Server Graph View: 1. Click on the DHCP Servers tab. 2. Select the DHCP Servers that you want to graph by checking the boxes. 3. Click Graph View.
70 Using Orion IPAM
Chapter 4
Creating Reports with Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM uses the Orion Report Writer to create reports for viewing on the web console or for scheduling reports to email and printout. By using the capabilities of Orion Report Writer, Orion IPAM data can be extracted and presented in a useful format. Orion Report Writer allows you to format your data and preview reports before you display them. When you have finished editing your reports, you can use the scheduler tool to schedule report emails and enable them for viewing through the Orion Web Console. For more information about adding reports to Orion Web Console views, see "Customizing Views" on page "111".
Getting Started with Report Writer

Before you can use Orion Report Writer, you must have collected at least a few minutes worth of data. The following procedure starts Report Writer. To start Report Writer: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Report Writer. 2. Click File > Settings. 3. In the General tab of the Report Writer Settings window, select either of the following as a default viewing mode: Preview displays the report as it will appear in printed form. For more information, see Report Writer Preview in the SolarWinds Orion Network Performance Monitor Administration Guide. Report Designer is the report creation and editing interface. For more information, see Design Mode on page 72.
Note: You can toggle between Preview and Report Designer modes at any time by clicking Preview or Design, respectively, on the toolbar. 4. If you want to separate the data for individual network objects with horizontal lines, click Report Style, and then check Display horizontal lines between each row. 5. Click OK to exit Report Writer Settings.
Preview Mode
Preview mode shows a report as it will print. When you open a report in Preview mode, or switch to Preview mode from Design mode, Orion NPM runs the query to generate the report and Report Writer displays the results.
Using Orion IPAM 71
The Preview window toolbar provides the following actions and information: Current page number and total number of pages in the report in the form current# / total# Page navigation buttons: First Page, Page Up, Page Down, and Last Page Zoom views Note: Double-click on a report preview to zoom in and double-right-click to zoom out. Print report
Design Mode
Use Design mode to create new reports and modify or rename existing reports. The options available for both creating and modifying reports are the same. Design mode options are also dynamic, based upon the type of report, included report data, and report presentation. Available options differ according to the type of report that you are designing, but all reports require that you select the data to include and decide how that data will be sorted, ordered, filtered, and presented.
Using Predefined Orion IPAM Reports

Orion IPAM provides a number of predefined reports that may be viewed and edited in Orion Report Writer. To access these reports by clicking on Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Report Writer. The left pane presents all the currently available reports. IPAM related reports are grouped under Current IPAM Statistics. The following section provides brief descriptions of the predefined reports that are available with Orion IPAM.
Predefined Orion IPAM Current IPAM Statistics Report

The following predefined statistics reports are included with Orion IPAM and can be modified to your needs. IPAM - All available IP Addresses Displays all available IP addresses on your network designated as Available. For each IP address, this report provides the Display Name, Reverse DNS, System Name and MAC Address. IPAM - All reserved IP Addresses Displays All reserved IP Addresses in IP Networks including the Display Name, Ipv4 Address, Reverse DNS, and System Name.
72 Using Orion IPAM
IPAM - All used IP Addresses Displays All used IP Addresses in IP Networks including the Display Name, Ipv4 Address, Reverse DNS, and System Name. IPAM - All Subnets Displays the total usage percentage of all Subnets including the total percentage of allocated, used, transient, available and reserved IPs.
Predefined Orion IPAM Events Report

The following predefined Event reports are included with Orion IPAM and can be modified to your needs. IPAM Last 250 Events Displays the last 250 IPAM events including event time, event type icon, username, event type names, and event message.
Opening Predefined IPAM Reports

Use the following procedure to modify or create reports in Report Writer. To open a predefined report with Report Writer: 1. If you want to modify an existing report, click an existing report from the inventory in the left pane of the main Report Writer window. 2. If you want to create a new report, click File > New Report, select the type of report that you would like to create, and then click OK. Each report offers different configuration options on the separate tabs of the Report Designer, so, depending on the report, some of the formatting tabs described in the following sections may not be available. Notes: The SQL query used to generate a report may be viewed in an additional tab. Click Report > Show SQL to add a read-only SQL tab to the Design window. A preview of your report is also available at any time. Click Preview to enter Preview Mode, and then click Design to return to Design Mode.
Using Orion IPAM 73
Orion IPAM Report Attributes

The following sections provide attributes for use within Orion IPAM reports.
IPAM Network Statistics Attributes

Values for reporting on IPAM Network Statistics include the following attributes.
Statistics Attributes Network Address Address Sort Key CIDR Display Name Group Type MASK Comments VLAN ID Location Scan Interval Last Discovery IP: Allocated IP: Used IP: Transient IP: Total IP: Reserved IP Available IP: % Usage IP: % Allocated Description Network address IP Address sort key Classless Inter-Domain Routing Name given to particular IP addresses Group name given to a particular group of IP addresses Subnet Mask User supplied comments VLAN ID Location of subnet Selected scanning interval Last completed discovery Allocated IP Address's IP address in a used state IP address in transient state Total number of IP Addresses Number of IP addresses in reserved state Number IP addresses available Total % of IP usage Total % of allocated IPs
74 Using Orion IPAM
IPAM Node Attributes

Values for reporting on specific IP nodes include the following attributes.
Node Attributes SubnetID IPv4 Address IPv4 Sort Key IPv6 Address Alias Reverse DNS System Name MAC Contact Description Location System ObjectID Vendor VendorIcon Machine Type Comments Response Time Last Synchronization Status Type Last Boot Time Description Subnet Identifier Displays IPv4 addresses Key Sort Displays IPv6 addresses Device known as DNS Name System Name MAC Address Who to Contact Description Location of the Device System Object Identifier Device manufacturer Icon of the device vendor Machine Type given User Comments Current Response Time Last Synchronization with database Current IP Status Type of device Last time entered for reboot
Using Orion IPAM 75
IPAM Event Attributes

Values for reporting on specific IPAM Events Log include the following attributes:
Event Attributes Event Time Message Event Type Event Type Icon Event Type Name Acknowledged Username Common Event Type Description Time the event occurred Displays the message event Displays the event type Event type icon Event type name Event has been acknowledged Username Displays Object Type
IPAM IP History Attributes

Event Attributes History Primary Key IP Primary Key IP Address IP Sort Key Time User Name From Value Into Value History Type Source ICMP SNMP DNS DHCP ARP Description Time the event occurred Displays the message event Displays the event type Event type icon Event type name Event has been acknowledged Username Displays Object Type
76 Using Orion IPAM
General Options Tab

The General tab opens by default and shows titling and display options that may be configured as follows. To configure General options: 1. Specify the Report Group, Report Title, Subtitle, and Description. Note: If you use an existing report group name, the new report is added to that existing group in the left pane of the main window. 2. Select the display Orientation of your report. 3. If you do not want to make this report available on your Orion Web Console, clear Make this Report available from the Orion website. Note: By default, most reports are made available for display in the Orion Web Console. For more information about adding reports to Orion Web Console views, see Viewing Reports on page 80.
Select Fields Options Tab

The Select Fields tab allows you to select the data fields in a report, as shown in the following procedure. To select and configure fields: 1. Click Select Fields. 2. If you are creating a new report or adding fields to an existing report, click the ellipsis, select Add a new field, and then dynamically define each new report field as follows: a. Click the asterisk after Field: and select the type of information that you want to include in the current report field. b. If you want to sort the data in the current field, click the sort asterisk and select a sort order. c. If you want to perform an operation on the data in the current field, click the function asterisk and select an operation. 3. If you are modifying an existing report, click the Field, sort, or function that you want to change and select a new value as follows. a. Click the asterisk after Field: and select the type of information that you want to include in the current report field.
Using Orion IPAM 77
b. If you want to sort the data in the current field, click the sort asterisk and select a sort order. c. If you want to perform an operation on the data in the current field, click the function asterisk and select an operation. 4. If you want to test your selections as you assemble your report, click Execute SQL Query to view the current query results. 5. If you want to preview your report, click Preview. Note: Click Design in the toolbar to return to the Design Mode window. 6. If you want to delete a field or rearrange the order of the fields that are listed in your report, select a field, click Browse (), and then select the appropriate action. Note: Unchecked fields are not displayed in your report, but their sort and function configurations are retained.
Report Grouping Options Tab

The Report Grouping tab allows you to group results by field descriptor within your report. Add, edit and delete report groups to organize the data in your report. Establish and edit report groups as follows. To add and edit report groups: 1. If you want to add a new report group, select a field from the list to define your group, and then click Add Report Group to add your selected field to the Report Groups list. Note: Use up and down arrows to change the grouping order accordingly. 2. If you want to edit an existing report group, select the field from the Report Groups list, and then click Edit Report Group. 3. The following options may be changed as needed: The Group Header is the text that designates groups on your report. The Web URL is the dynamic location of your published report with respect to your Orion Web Console. Font size, face, color, and background may all be modified by clicking associated ellipses. Alignment may be left, center, or right. Check Transparent Background for better results when publishing your report to the Web. If you want to change the grouping order, use the up and down arrows to change the grouping order accordingly.
78 Using Orion IPAM
Field Formatting Options Tab

The Field Formatting tab allows you to customize the format of the various results fields in your report. To format results fields, select the field you want to format, and then edit labels and select options as appropriate. Notes: The formatting options available for each field may be different according to the nature of the data contained in that field. Check Hidden Field to hide any field in your report. To view your changes at any time, click Preview.
Customizing the Report Header and Footer Image

The image that is displayed at the top and bottom of each report can be changed. To add your company logo as the report header and footer, save your logo as Header.jpg in the SolarWinds\Common\WebResources folder, typically located in C:\Program Files\, and then click Refresh. Note: The image must be in JPEG format with a height of 150 pixels or less.
Exporting Reports
Orion Report Writer gives you the ability to present your created reports in a variety of different, industry-standard formats. The following formats (and extensions) are currently supported: Comma-delimited (*.csv, *.cdf) Text (*.txt) HTML (*.htm, *.html) MIME HTML, with embedded images (*.mhtml) Excel spreadsheet (*.xls) Adobe PDF (*.pdf) Image (*.gif)
The following procedure presents the steps required to export an open report from Orion Report Writer into any of the previously listed formats. To export a report from Report Writer: 1. Select a report to export by clicking any of the following: Select a report from the file tree in the left pane
Using Orion IPAM 79
File > Open to open an existing report File > New Report to create a new report. For more information about creating reports, see "Creating Reports" in the SolarWinds Orion Network Performance Administrator Guide.
2. Select File > Export and then click the format in which you want to export your report: 3. Check the fields in your open report that you want to export into the selected format, and then click OK. 4. Select a location to save your file. 5. Provide a File name, and then click Save.
Viewing Reports
All reports, custom or predefined, are available for viewing in Report Writer, as shown in the following procedures. To view reports with Orion IPAM Report Writer: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Report Writer. 2. Click + next to a report group name to expand the group. 3. Click the title of the report you want to view. 4. Click Preview.
Scheduling Reports
Orion provides a scheduling tool to schedule report emails and printouts. To schedule a report: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Orion Report Scheduler. 2. Click Edit > Add New Job. 3. Type a name for your new report scheduler job, and then click Continue. 4. Click Browse () button, and then browse to the report you want to send in the Orion Web Console. 5. Click Use Current URL. 6. If you want to exclude the Orion web page banner and menu bar, check Retrieve a Printable Version of this Page. 7. Check Send Orion Username / Password in URL.
80 Using Orion IPAM
8. Provide the user account credentials needed to view the Orion NPM web report. 9. If you need to provide Windows login credentials, click the NT Account login tab, and then provide the user account details needed to log in. 10. Click Continue. 11. Provide the appropriate schedule interval for your job, and then click Continue. 12. If you want to email the report, complete the following procedure: a. Ensure Email the Web Page is selected. b. Provide the email addresses and subject in the appropriate fields on the Email To tab. c. Provide name and reply address in the appropriate fields on the Email From tab. d. Type the hostname or IP address of the SMTP server and port number on the SMTP Server tab. 13. If you want to print the report, click Print the Web Page, select the printer, orientation, and number of copies you want to print. 14. Click Continue. 15. Type the Windows user account details, and then click Continue. 16. Type any comments you want to add to the job description, and then click Finish.
Using Alerts with Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM provides the ability to alert on high Subnet and DHCP scope utilizations. By default, Orion IPAM provides advanced alerts that are configured at install. The following alerts are available and functional as soon as Orion IPAM is installed, giving you immediate insight into the status and performance of your subnets and DHCP scope management:
Using Orion IPAM 81
o o
High DHCP Scope Usage Monitoring. This alert will write to IPAM event log when a scopes usage surpasses 75% High Subnet Usage Monitoring. This alert will write to IPAM event log when a subnets usage surpasses 75%
When you first log on to the Orion Web Console, if there are any devices on your network that trigger any of these alerts, the Active Alerts resource on the Network Summary Home view displays the triggered alerts with a brief description. You can then acknowledge these alerts from the Alerts view.
Viewing Alerts in the Orion IPAM Web Console

The Triggered Alerts for All Network Devices page provides a table view of your alerts log. You can customize the list view by using the following procedure to select your preferred alert grouping criteria. To view alerts in the Web Console: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Alerts in the Views toolbar. 3. If you want to filter your alerts table view by Scopes, select the Scope to which you want to limit your alerts view in the Network Object field. 4. If you want to filter your alerts table by type of Scope, select the Scope type to which you want to limit your alerts view in the Type of Device field. 5. If you want to limit your alerts table to show a specific type of alert, select the alert type in the Alert Name field. 6. In the Show Alerts field, provide the number of alerts you want to view. 7. If you want to show all alerts, even if they have already been cleared or acknowledged, check Show Acknowledged Alerts. 8. Click Refresh to complete your Alerts view configuration.
Viewing Alerts in Orion System Manager

The Active Alerts window displays a table view of your alerts log. You can customize the list view by using the following procedure to select your preferred alert grouping criteria. To view alerts in System Manager: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > System Manager. 2. Click Alerts > Active Alerts. 3. Select Advanced Alerts.
82 Using Orion IPAM
4. If you are viewing advanced alerts, customize your Active Alerts display as follows: a. Select from the following options in the Group By list to change your Active Alerts view: Alert Name, Object Type, Object Name, Alert State, Acknowledged, Acknowledged By, or No Grouping. b. Order your Alerts list by any of the following criteria by clicking the appropriate column: Acknowledged, Alert Name, Alert State, Object Name, Triggered Time, Acknowledged By, or Acknowledge Time. 5. Click Refresh at any time to display the most recently triggered alerts.
Creating and Configuring Advanced Alerts

The Orion IPAM advanced alert engine allows you to configure alerts with the following features: o o o o Sustained state trigger and reset conditions Multiple condition matching Automatic alert escalation Separate actions for triggers and resets
Advanced alerts are configured using the Advanced Alert Manager. For more information about the Advanced Alert Manager, see "Creating and Configuring Advanced Alerts" in the SolarWinds Orion Network Performance Monitor Administrator Guide. Note: If you want to configure advanced alert features, such as timed alert checking, delayed alert triggering, timed alert resets, or alert suppression, check Show Advanced Features at the lower left of any Advanced Alert windows. For the purposes of this document, Show Advanced Features should always be enabled.
IPAM Advanced Alert Example

The following procedure modifies an existing advanced alert. To modify a default advanced alert: To set the trigger conditions for an advanced alert: 1. Click Start > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Configure Alerts.
Using Orion IPAM 83
3. Click High Subnet Usage Monitoring. 4. Click Edit. 5. Click Trigger Condition. 6. Add a Simple Condition 7. Click Add a Simple Condition. 8. Click Browse () and set to CIDR: 9. If you need an additional condition, click Add, and then select the type of condition you want to add. 10. If you need to delete a condition, select the condition from the condition list, and then click Delete. Notes: Conditions may be exported for use with other alerts by clicking Export Conditions and saving as appropriate. Click Import Conditions to import existing conditions from other alerts. Warning: Imported trigger conditions automatically overwrite any existing trigger conditions.
11. If you want to specify a time duration for the condition to be valid, type the time interval and select Seconds, Minutes, or Hours from the list.
84 Using Orion IPAM
Note: You may need to delay alert trigger actions until a condition has been sustained for a certain amount of time. For example, an alert based on CPU load would not trigger unless the CPU Load of a node has been over 80% for more than 10 minutes. To set up a sustained-state trigger condition, at the bottom of the Trigger Condition tab, provide an appropriate amount of time the alert engine should wait before any actions are performed. By default, the alert triggers immediately, if the trigger condition exists. The maximum alert action delay is eight hours after the trigger condition is met. 12. If you are finished configuring your advanced alert, click OK. To learn more about the Advanced Alerting capabilities, including reset conditions, alert suppression, trigger and reset actions for an Advanced Alert see "Creating and Configuring Advanced Alerts" in the SolarWinds Orion Network Performance Monitor Administrator Guide.
Using Orion IPAM 85
86 Using Orion IPAM
Chapter 5
Additional Orion IPAM Features

As an Orion module, Orion IPAM provides access to both the SolarWinds Engineer Toolset integration and thwack, the SolarWinds online community.
Integrating SolarWinds Engineers Toolset with Orion IPAM

When you are browsing the Orion Web Console from a computer that has SolarWinds Engineers Toolset installed, you can launch Toolset tools directly from your web browser. Right-clicking on any node, interface, or volume will display a menu of available Engineers Toolset tools and functions. The following procedure configures SolarWinds Engineers Toolset for integration within the Orion Web Console. Note: The first time the Toolset tools are accessed, a security warning may be displayed. Click Yes to allow the toolset integration. To configure Engineers Toolset integration settings: 1. Right-click on any node, interface, or volume from within the web console. 2. Click Settings, and then click SNMP Community String. Note: The first time a tool requiring an SNMP community string is launched from the right-click menu, the Add Community String window is displayed. If the option Remember this community string is checked, the community string will be saved for future access. 3. If you want to delete any or all saved community strings, select the strings that you want to delete, and then click Remove, or click Remove All. 4. Click Menu Options, and then configure the right-click menu as follows: a. If you want to add or remove menu items from the right-click menu, move menu items between the list of Available Menu Options on the left and Selected Menu Options on the right by selecting items in either column and clicking the right and left arrows, as appropriate. b. If you want to change the order of menu items, select items and then click the up and down arrows next to the Selected Menu Options list. c. If you want to add a separator between items, move the "--------------" menu option from the Available list to the Selected list, and then move it to your preferred location within the Selected Menu Options list.
Discovering and Adding Network Devices 87
5. Click Automatic Menu Items. 6. Check either or both of the following options: Automatically add sub-menu items to the MIB Browser (Query MIB) menu option from the MIB Browers Bookmarks. Automatically add sub-menu items to the Real Time Interface Monitor menu option from the Real-Time Interface Monitor saved report types.
Note: These options expand the list of available menu items by incorporating menu links to MIB browser bookmarks and Real-time Interface Monitor saved reports, respectively.
Interacting with the thwack User Community

thwack is a community site that SolarWinds developed to provide users and the broader networking community with useful information, tools and valuable resources related to SolarWinds network management solutions. Resources that allow you both to view recent posts and to search all posts are available from the Orion Web Console, providing direct access to the thwack community. IPAM comes with the Thwack integration imbedded in the resource page.
thwack Recent Orion IPAM Posts Resource

This resource shows the most recent Orion IPAM posts that have been submitted to thwack.com, the online SolarWinds user community. Clicking any post title listed in the resource opens the associated post in the IPAM forum. 1. Click the title of a listed post to open in a new browser. 2. Click Edit to set the number of posts to display in the resource. 3. Click View All to see a list of all Orion IPAM posts 4. Click Submit when you are done. 5. To remove this resource from view Click Customize Page and select thwack.com in the resource column. 6. Click the red x. and click Done.
Providing Feedback
thwack also offers the ability to submit product feedback and feature requests via the IPAM Feature requests forum. You may navigate to that forum via the thwack forums page.
88 Discovering and Adding Network Devices
Chapter 6
SolarWinds Orion Core Components

IPAM comes with additional core components.
Discovery Central
Discovery Central provides a centralized overview of the types and number of network objects you are monitoring with your currently installed Orion products. The Discovery Central view is subdivided into sections corresponding to the Orion products you have installed. The Network Discovery section displays for all Orion products. For more information about the Network Discovery section, see Network Discovery on page 89. For more information about specific sections, see the Administrator Guide for the corresponding Orion product. Clicking Go to Orion Home opens the Orion Summary Home view for your entire monitored network. Network Discovery The Network Discovery resource provides the number of nodes and volumes that are currently monitored. This information is both available and applicable to all installed Orion products. Click Network Sonar Discovery to start a Network Sonar Discovery. For more information, see Discovering and Adding Network Devices on page 90. Click Add a Single Device to open the Add Node Define Node view of the Orion Node Management utility. For more information, see Adding Devices for Monitoring in the Web Console on page 145.
Additional Discovery Central Resources

As they are released following the release of Orion NPM 10.1.2, each Orion module will provide its own Discovery Central resource. These additional Discovery Central resources provide the number of module-related network objects that are currently monitored. For more information about any of these additional Discovery Central resources, see the corresponding Orion module Administrator Guide.
Discovering and Adding Network Devices

There are two waysWeb Node Management and network discovery using the Network Sonar Wizardto add nodes to the Orion database, The method recommended largely depends on the number of devices added. To discover and add a larger number of devices across your enterprise, the Network Sonar and Network Sonar Results Wizards are available. This chapter provides instructions for quickly populating your Orion database with the network objects you want to monitor and manage with Orion. The Orion Web Console also provides an easyto-use Web Node Management wizard suited to discovering and adding individual network objects. For more information, see Managing Devices in the Web Console on page 145.
Network Discovery Using the Network Sonar Wizard

Orion products employ the easy-to-use Network Sonar Wizard to direct you in the discovery of devices on your network. Before using the Network Sonar Wizard, consider the following points about network discovery in Orion: The Network Sonar Wizard recognizes network devices that are already in your Orion database and prevents you from importing duplicate devices. CPU and Memory Utilization charts are automatically enabled for your Windows, Cisco Systems, VMware, and Foundry Networks devices. The community strings you provide in the Network Sonar Wizard are only used for SNMP GET requests, so read-only strings are sufficient.
The following procedure steps you through the discovery of devices on your network using the Network Sonar Wizard. To discover devices on your network: 1. If the Network Sonar Wizard is not already open, click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Configuration and Auto-Discovery > Network Discovery. 2. If you want to create a new discovery, click Add New Discovery, click Add New Discovery. 3. If you have already defined a network discovery, a number of options are available on the Network Sonar Discovery tab. Select one of the following: If you want to edit an existing discovery before using it, select the discovery you want to edit, and then click Edit. If you want to use an existing discovery to rediscover your network, select the discovery you want to use, click Discover Now, and then complete the Network Sonar Results Wizard after dicovery completes.
For more information about network discovery results, see Using the Network Sonar Results Wizard on page 95. If you want to import some or all devices found in a defined discovery that you may not have already imported for monitoring, select a currently defined discovery, and then click Import All Results. For more information about network discovery results, see Using the Network Sonar Results Wizard on page 95. If you want to import any newly enabled devices matching a defined discovery profile, select a currently defined discovery, and then click Import New Results. For more information about network discovery results, see Using the Network Sonar Results Wizard on page 95. If you want to delete an existing discovery profile, select a currently defined discovery and then click Delete.
4. If the devices on your network do not require community strings other than the default strings public and private provided by Orion, click Next on the SNMP Credentials view. 5. If any of your network devices require community strings other than public and private or if you want to use an SNMPv3 credential, complete the following steps to add the required SNMP credential. Note: Repeat the following procedure for each new community string. To speed up discovery, highlight the most commonly used community strings on your network, and then use the arrows to move them to the top of the list. a. Click Add New Credential, and then select the SNMP Version of your new credential. b. If you are adding an SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c credential, provide the new SNMP Community String. c. If you are adding an SNMPv3 credential, provide the following information for the new credential: User Name, Context, and Authentication Method Authentication Password/Key, Privacy/Encryption Method and Password/Key, if required.
d. Click Add. 6. Click Next on the SNMP Credentials view.
7. If you want to discover any VMware VCenter or ESX Servers on your network, confirm that Poll for VMware is checked, and then complete the following steps to add or edit required VMware credentials. Note: Repeat the following procedure for each new credential. To speed up discovery, use the arrows to move the most commonly used credentials on your network to the top of the list. a. Click Add vCenter or ESX Credential. b. If you are using an existing VMware credential, select the appropriate credential from the Choose Credential dropdown menu. c. If you are adding a new VMware credential, select <New Credential> in the Choose Credential dropdown menu, and then provide a new credential name in the Credential Name field. Note: SolarWinds recommends against using non-alphanumeric characters in VMware credential names. d. Add or edit the credential User Name and Password, as necessary. e. Confirm the password, and then click Add. 8. Click Next on the Local vCenter or ESX Credentials for VMware view. 9. If you want to discover devices located on your network within a specific range of IP addresses, complete the following procedure. Note: Only one selection method may be used per defined discovery. a. Click IP Ranges in the Selection Method menu, and then, for each IP range, provide both a Start address and an End address. Note: Scheduled discovery profiles should not use IP address ranges that include nodes with dynamically assigned IP addresses (DHCP). b. If you want to add another range, click Add More, and then repeat the previous step. Note: If you have multiple ranges, click X to delete an incorrect range. c. If you have added all the IP ranges you want to poll, click Next. 10. If you want to discover devices connected to a specific router or on a specific subnet of your network, complete the following procedure: Note: Only one selection method may be used per defined discovery. a. Click Subnets in the Selection Method menu. b. If you want to discover on a specific subnet, click Add a New Subnet, provide both a Subnet Address and a Subnet Mask for the desired subnet, and then click Add. Note: Repeat this step for each additional subnet you want to poll.
c. If you want to discover devices using a seed router, click Add a Seed Router, provide the IP address of the Router, and then click Add. Notes: Repeat this step for each additional seed router you want to use. Network Sonar reads the routing table of the designated router and offers to discover nodes on the Class A network (255.0.0.0 mask) containing the seed router and, if you are discovering devices for an Orion installation, the Class C networks (255.255.255.0 mask) containing all interfaces on the seed router, using the SNMP version chosen previously on the SNMP Credentials page. Networks connected through the seed router are NOT automatically selected for discovery.
d. Confirm that all networks on which you want to conduct your network discovery are checked, and then click Next. 11. If you already know the IP addresses or hostnames of the devices you want to discover and include in the Orion database, complete the following procedure: a. Click Specific Nodes in the Selection Method menu. b. Type the IPv4 addresses or hostnames of the devices you want to discover for monitoring into the provided field. Note: Type only one IPv4 address or hostname per line. c. Click Validate to confirm that the provided IPv4 addresses and hostnames are assigned to SNMP-enabled devices. d. If you have provided all the IPv4 addresses and hostnames you want to discover, click Next. 12. Configure the options on the Discovery Settings view, as detailed in the following steps. a. Provide a Name and Description to distinguish the current discovery profile from other profiles you may use to discover other network areas. Note: This Description displays next to the Name in the list of available network discovery configurations on the Network Sonar view. b. Position the slider or type a value, in ms, to set the SNMP Timeout. Note: If you are encountering numerous SNMP timeouts during Network Discovery, increase the value for this setting. The SNMP Timeout should be at least a little more than double the time it takes a packet to travel the longest route between devices on your network.
c. Position the slider or type a value, in ms, to set the Search Timeout. Note: The Search Timeout is the amount of time Network Sonar Discovery waits to determine if a given IP address has a network device assigned to it. d. Position the slider or type a value to set the number of SNMP Retries. Note: This value is the number of times Network Sonar Discovery will retry a failed SNMP request, defined as any SNMP request that does not receive a response within the SNMP Timeout defined above. e. Position the slider or type a value to set the Hop Count. Note: If the Hop Count is greater than zero, Network Sonar Discovery searches for devices connected to any discovered device. Each connection to a discovered device counts as a hop. f. Position the slider or type a value to set the Discovery Timeout. Note: The Discovery Timeout is the amount of time, in minutes, Network Sonar Discovery is allowed to complete a network discovery. If a discovery takes longer than the Discovery Timeout, the discovery is terminated. 13. If you only want to use SNMP to discover devices on your network, check Use SNMP only. Note: By default, Network Sonar uses ICMP ping requests to locate devices. Most information about monitored network objects is obtained using SNMP queries. 14. If multiple Orion polling engines are available in your environment, select the Polling Engine you want to use for this discovery. 15. Click Next. 16. If you want the discovery you are currently defining to run on a regular schedule, select either Custom or Daily as the discovery Frequency, as shown in the following steps: Notes: Scheduled discovery profiles should not use IP address ranges that include nodes with dynamically assigned IP addresses (DHCP). Default Discovery Scheduling settings execute a single discovery of your network that starts immediately, once you click Discover. Results of scheduled discoveries are maintained on the Scheduled Discovery Results tab of Network Discovery. For more information about managing scheduled discovery results, see Managing Scheduled Discovery Results on page 98.
a. If you want to define a custom discovery schedule to perform the currently defined discovery repeatedly in the future, select Custom and then provide the period of time, in hours, between discoveries. b. If you want your scheduled discovery to run once daily, select Daily, and then provide the time at which you want your discovery to run every day, using the format HH:MM AM/PM. 17. If you do not want to run your network discovery at this time, select No, dont run now, and then click Save or Schedule, depending on whether you have configured the discovery to run once or on a schedule, respectively. 18. If you want your Network Sonar discovery to run now, click Discover to start your network discovery. Note: Because some devices may serve as both routers and switches, the total number of Nodes Discovered may be less than the sum of reported Routers Discovered plus reported Switches Discovered.
Using the Network Sonar Results Wizard

The Network Sonar Results Wizard directs you through the selection of network devices for monitoring, and it opens whenever discovery results are requested, either when the Network Sonar Wizard completes or when either Import All Results or Import New Results is clicked for a selected discovery. For more information, see Network Discovery Using the Network Sonar Wizard on page 90. The following steps detail the selection of discovered objects for monitoring in Orion. To select the results of a network discovery for monitoring in Orion: 1. On the Device Types to Import page, check the device types you want Orion to monitor, and then click Next. Note: If you are not sure you want to monitor a specific device type, check the device type in question. If, later, you do not want to monitor a selected device, simply delete the device using Web Node Management. For more information, see Managing Devices in the Web Console on page 145. 2. If you are discovering devices for an Orion installation, check the interface types you want Orion to monitor on the Interface Types to Import page, and then click Next. Note: If you are not sure you want to monitor a specific interface type, check the interface type in question. If, later, you do not want to monitor a selected interface, delete it using Web Node Management. For more information, see Managing Devices in the Web Console on page 145.
3. On the Volume Types to Import page, check the volume types you want Orion to monitor, and then click Next. Note: If you are not sure you want to monitor a specific volume type, check the volume type in question. If, later, you do not want to monitor any volume of the selected type, delete the volume using Web Node Management. For more information, see Managing Devices in the Web Console on page 145. 4. If you want to import nodes, even when they are already known to be polled by another polling engine, check the option in the Allow Duplicate Nodes section. For more information about working with multiple polling engines, see Managing Orion Polling Engines on page 173. 5. If you are discovering devices for an Orion installation, check valid states for imported interfaces on the Import Settings page, and then click Next. Note: By default, Orion imports interfaces that are discovered in an Operationally Up state. However, because interfaces may cycle off and on intermittently, the Import Settings page allows you to select interfaces found in Operationally Down or Shutdown states for import, as well. 6. If there are any devices on the Import Preview that you do not ever want to import, check the device to ignore, and then click Ignore. Selected nodes are added to the Discovery Ignore List. For more information, see Using the Discovery Ignore List on page 99. 7. Confirm that the network objects you want to monitor are checked on the Import Preview page, and then click Import. 8. If you are discovering devices for an Orion installation, after the import completes, click Finish. Note: Imported devices display in the All Nodes resource.
Importing a List of Nodes Using a Seed File

Orion provides a Specific Nodes option in the Network Discovery Wizard that may be used to import devices from a seed file. The following procedure details how the Specific Nodes option is used with a seed file to import devices into the Orion database. To import devices from a seed file: 1. Open your seed file. 2. If the Network Sonar Wizard is not already open, click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Configuration and Auto-Discovery > Network Discovery.
3. If you want to create a new discovery, click Add New Discovery, click Add New Discovery. 4. If you have already defined a network discovery, a number of options are available on the Network Sonar Discovery tab. Select one of the following: If you want to edit an existing discovery before using it, select the discovery you want to edit, and then click Edit. If you want to use an existing discovery to rediscover your network, select the discovery you want to use, click Discover Now, and then complete the Network Sonar Results Wizard after dicovery completes. For more information about network discovery results, see Using the Network Sonar Results Wizard on page 95. If you want to import some or all devices found in a defined discovery that you may not have already imported for monitoring, select a currently defined discovery, and then click Import All Results. For more information about network discovery results, see Using the Network Sonar Results Wizard on page 95. If you want to import any newly enabled devices matching a defined discovery profile, select a currently defined discovery, and then click Import New Results. For more information about network discovery results, see Using the Network Sonar Results Wizard on page 95. If you want to delete an existing discovery profile, select a currently defined discovery and then click Delete.
5. If the devices on your network do not require community strings other than the default strings public and private provided by Orion, click Next on the SNMP Credentials view. 6. If you need to supply new SNMP credentials to discover the devices in your seed file, click Add New Credential, provide the required information, and then click Add. For more information, see Network Discovery Using the Network Sonar Wizard on page 90. 7. Click Next on the SNMP Credentials view. 8. If you intend to import known VMware vCenter or ESX servers and you need to supply new VMware credentials to discover these servers in your seed file, complete the following steps on the Local vCenter or ESX Credentials for VMware view: a. Check Poll for VMware, and then click Add vCenter or ESX Credential. b. Provide the required information, and then click Add. Note: For more information, see Network Discovery Using the Network Sonar Wizard on page 90.
9. Click Next, and then click Specific Nodes in the Selection Method menu. 10. Copy and then paste the IP addresses or hostnames of the devices you want to discover from your seed file into the provided field. Note: Confirm that there are no more than one IPv4 address or hostname per line. 11. Click Validate to confirm that the provided IP addresses and hostnames are assigned to SNMP-enabled devices. 12. If you have provided all the IP addresses and hostnames you want to discover, click Next. 13. Complete the Network Discovery and Network Discovery Results Wizards. For more information, see Network Discovery Using the Network Sonar Wizard on page 90.
Managing Scheduled Discovery Results

The Scheduled Discovery Results tab of Network Discovery provides a list of all recently discovered, changed, or imported devices on your monitored network. Results are compared between discoveries, and results are listed on this tab. The following procedure provides guidelines for managing discovery results. To manage scheduled discovery results: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Configuration and Auto-Discovery > Network Discovery. 2. Click Scheduled Discovery Results. 3. Select the type of devices you want to view from the Status menu in the left pane. The following options are available: Select Found to view all devices discovered by a scheduled discovery. Select Changed to view all devices that have changed between recent scheduled discoveries. Changes include the addition of interfaces and device configuration changes. Select Imported to view all devices you have recently imported youre your Orion database. For more information about importing devices, see Using the Network Sonar Results Wizard on page 95. Select Ignored to view all devices you have added to your Discovery Ignore List. For more information about the Discovery Ignore List, see Using the Discovery Ignore List on page 99.
Select Found and Changed to view a combined list of all devices found or changed as described above. Select All except Ignored to view all discovered, changed or imported devices you have not already designated as Ignored, as detailed above.
4. If you want to apply a grouping criterion to organize your listed results, select an appropriate criterion from the Group by menu in the left pane. 5. If there are changed or discovered nodes in the results list that you want to update your Orion database to include, check all nodes to update or to add, and then click Import Nodes. 6. If there are devices you want Orion to ignore in future discoveries, regardless of discovered updates or changes, check all nodes to ignore, and then click Add to Ignore List. For more information about the Discovery Ignore List, see Using the Discovery Ignore List on page 99.
Using the Discovery Ignore List

Often, devices are found during a network discovery that you never intend to monitor with Orion. The Discovery Ignore List is a record of all such devices on your network. By placing a device on the Discovery Ignore List you can minimize the SNMP processing load associated with discovering devices that you never intend to monitor. To manage devices on the Discovery Ignore List: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Configuration and Auto-Discovery > Network Discovery. 2. If you want to view the current Discovery Ignore List, click Discovery Ignore List. 3. If you want to add devices to the Discovery Ignore List, complete the following procedure: a. Click Scheduled Discovery Results. b. Check devices you want to ignore, and then click Add to Ignore List. 4. If you want to remove devices from the Discovery Ignore List, complete the following procedure: a. Click Scheduled Discovery Results, and then b. Check the devices you want to remove from the list. c. Click Remove from Ignore List. d. Confirm that you want to stop ignoring selected items by clicking OK.
Chapter 6
Managing the Orion Web Console

The Orion Web Console is an integral part of the Orion family of products that can be configured for viewing from virtually any computer connected to the Internet. You can also customize the web console for multiple users and store individually customized views as user profiles. Administrator functions are accessed by clicking Settings in the top right of all Orion Web Console views.
Logging in for the First Time as an Administrator

When you launch the Orion Web Console, you are presented with a login view requiring both a User Name and a Password. To log in to the Orion Web Console: 1. Launch the Orion Web Console using either of the following methods: Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. Or launch a browser on your Orion server and enter http://ip_address or http://hostname, where ip_address is the IP address of your Orion host server, or where hostname is the domain name of your Orion server.
2. Enter Admin as your User Name, and then click Login. Notes: Until you set a password, you can log in as Admin with no Password. After your first login, you may want to change the Admin password. For more information, see Changing an Account Password on page 104.
Windows Authentication with Active Directory

The Orion Web Console can authenticate Active Directory users and groups. To enable Active Directory Windows authentication to the web console: 1. Install and configure Active Directory on your local network. Notes: For more information about installing Active Directory on Windows Server 2003, see the Microsoft Support article, How To Create an Active Directory Server in Windows Server 2003. For more information about Active Directory on Windows Server 2008, see the Microsoft TechNet article, Active Directory Services.
Managing the Orion Web Console 101
2. If you want to enable automatic login for web console accounts using Windows Authentication, configure the Orion Web Console as shown in the following steps: a. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Configuration and Auto-Discovery > Configuration Wizard. b. Check Website, and then click Next. c. After providing the appropriate IP Address, Port, and Website Root Directory, select Yes Enable automatic login using Windows Authentication. d. Click Next, and then complete the Configuration Wizard. 3. Log in to the web console using the appropriate domain and user, providing Domain/Username or Username@Domain as the web console User name.
Using the Web Console Notification Bar

Below the web console menu bar, the Orion notification bar provides informational messages related to the following Orion features: If you have configured the Orion Web Console to check for product updates, an announcement displays in the notification bar when an update, including any upgrade, service pack, or hotfix, to Orion or any other Orion modules you currently have installed becomes available. For more information about Orion Product Updates, see Product Updates on page 106. If you have configured the Orion Web Console to store blog posts, new and unread posts to the Orion Product Team Blog are announced in the notification bar. For more information about the Orion Product Team Blog, see Product Updates on page 106. If you have currently configured a scheduled discovery, results display in the notification bar when the discovery completes. For more information about Scheduled Discovery, see Discovering and Adding Network Devices on page 90. If you are currently using Orion to monitor any VMware ESX or ESXi Servers, the notification bar can display messages communicating the number of ESX nodes found during any discovery, and, if any discovered ESX nodes require credentials, the notification bar tells you. For more information about managing ESX Servers, see Monitoring VMware Devices on page Error! Bookmark not defined..
For more information about any displayed notification bar message, click More Details and a web console view relevant to the displayed message opens.
102 Managing the Orion Web Console
To delete a posted message, either click Dismiss Message next to the displayed message, or properly address the situation mentioned in the posted notification. To remove the notification bar from your web console, click Close (X) at the right end of the notification bar.
Navigating the Orion Web Console

The Orion Web Console offers two primary methods of navigation: top-level web console tabs and view-level breadcrumbs. The following sections describe how these navigation methods are used:
Using Web Console Tabs

In the case of a basic Orion installation, the Orion Web Console displays the following tabs: Home The Home tab provides a menu bar of links to views aiding you in general network management and monitoring. Information, like events and Top 10 lists, and technologies, like alerts, used to generate the views linked from the Home menu are generally available to all Orion modules. By default, the Orion Summary Home view displays when you click Home from any view in the web console. The Orion Web Console provides an additional module-specific tab for each installed Orion module. These tabs offer access to views and tools specific for that Orion module. For more information about additional Orion modules, see www.solarwinds.com. For more information about customizing menu bars, see Customizing Web Console Menu Bars on page 127.
Using Web Console Breadcrumbs

As you navigate the views of the Orion Web Console, your location is recorded as a series of links, or breadcrumbs, to the web console views you have already viewed. Each breadcrumb offers the following navigation options: Clicking a breadcrumb opens the corresponding view directly. Clicking > next to a breadcrumb opens a clickable list of all other views at the same navigation level in the web console. For example, if you are on a Node Details view, clicking > displays a list of other monitored nodes. Note: Only the first 50 monitored nodes, listed in alphanumeric order by IP address, are displayed. Dropdown breadcrumb lists are customizable, as shown in the following procedure.
To customize the items in a breadcrumb dropdown: 1. Click > at an appropriate level in a breadcrumb to open the dropdown. 2. Click Customize this list. 3. Select a criterion from the menu, and then click Submit. Note: All items in the customized breadcrumb list will be identical for the selcted criterion.
Administrative Functions of the Orion Web Console

The following sections describe the primary administrative functions performed by an Orion Web Console administrator. Changing an Account Password Orion Website Administration Viewing Secure Data on the Web Handling Counter Rollovers
Changing an Account Password

Orion Web Console administrators may change user account passwords at any time, as shown in the following procedure. To change an account password: 1. Log in to the web console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right corner of the web console. 3. Click Account Manager in the Accounts grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Select the user account with the password you want to change, and then click Change Password. 5. Complete the New Password and Confirm Password fields, and then click Change Password. 6. Click Continue when the password is successfully changed.
Orion Website Administration

If you are logged in to the web console as an administrator, clicking Settings in the top right corner of the web console.displays the Orion Website Administration page, presenting a variety of tools to control the appearance and delivery of information to Orion Web Console users. The following options are available on the Orion Website Administration page. Node & Group Management The Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page gives you access to the following web console views for managing nodes and groups: Clicking Manage Nodes displays the Node Management page, where an Orion Web Console administrator can immediately add, view, and manage all network objects currently managed or monitored by your Orion installation. For more information, see Managing Devices in the Web Console on page 145. Clicking Add a Node opens the Add Node Wizard directly. For more information about adding nodes individually, see Adding Devices for Monitoring in the Web Console on page 145. Clicking VMware Settings opens the VMware Settings view, where you can view both a list of currently monitored VMware ESX Servers and a library of the VMware credentials Orion uses to monitor your ESX Servers. For more information, see Managing VMware Credentials on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. Clicking Network Sonar Discovery opens the Network Sonar Discovery Wizard. Network Discovery enables you to quickly discover devices across your entire network for monitoring. For more information, see Network Discovery Using the Network Sonar Wizard on page 90. Clicking Manage Dependencies opens the Manage Dependencies view. Dependencies allow you to formalize dependent relationships between monitored objects based on network topology or priority to eliminate the potential for duplicated or redundant polling and alerting. For more information, see Managing Dependencies on page 159. Clicking Manage Groups opens the Manage Groups view. To a greater degree than previously available with custom properties, groups enable you to logically organize your monitored network objects. For more information, see Managing Groups on page 157.
Accounts The Accounts grouping of the Orion Website Administration page gives a web console administrator access to the following web console configuration pages:
The Manage Accounts link provides web console administrators access to set and change account passwords, set user rights and access, and configure the web console experience for all users. For more information about managing accounts, see Managing Web Accounts on page 165. Clicking Account List opens the Orion Website Accounts view, providing an immediate overview of web console user account settings. You may use this view to make changes to multiple accounts simultaneously and immediately by clicking to check or clear options. Clicking an Account user name opens the Account Manager for the selected account. For more information about managing accounts, see Managing Web Accounts on page 165.
Customize The Customize grouping of the Orion Website Administration page offers options to customize the navigation and appearance of your Orion Web Console on the following pages: The Customize Menu Bars page allows an Orion Web Console administrator to configure the menu bars seen by individual users. For more information, see Customizing Web Console Menu Bars on page 127. The Color Scheme page gives a web console administrator the ability to select a default color scheme for resource title bars. The color scheme selection takes effect immediately throughout the web console. For more information, see Changing the Web Console Color Scheme on page 129. The External Websites page enables an Orion Web Console administrator to designate any external website as an Orion Web Console view, appearing in the Views toolbar. For more information, see Creating and Editing External Website Views on page 127.
Manage Alerts The Manage Alerts grouping provides a link to the Manage Advanced Alerts view, where you can edit, enable, disable, and delete advanced alerts directly from the web console. For more information about manage advanced alerts in the web console, see Using Orion Advanced Alerts on page 183. Product Updates The Product Updates grouping provides links to web console views offering up-to-date information about using and upgrading Orion.
The Available Product Updates view allows you to configure regular checks for Orion updates that can include version upgrades and service packs. The Orion Product Team Blog offers regular posts from members of the Orion product team to help you take full advantage of features provided by Orion and its modules.
Views The Views grouping of the Orion Website Administration page gives an Orion Web Console administrator access to the following view configuration pages: The Manage Views page enables a web console administrator to add, edit, copy, or remove individual web console views. For more information about managing Orion Web Console views, see Customizing Views on page 111. Clicking Add New View opens the Add New View page, where you can define new web console views. The Views by Device Type page gives an Orion Web Console administrator the ability to designate default views for network devices. For more information, see Views by Device Type on page 115.
Settings The Settings grouping of the Orion Website Administration page gives an Orion Web Console administrator access to the following settings configuration pages: Web Console Settings allow an Orion Web Console administrator to customize the function and appearance of both the Orion Web Console and the charts that are displayed as resources in Orion Web Console views. For more information about configuring Orion Web Console and Chart Settings, see Orion Web Console and Chart Settings on page 131. Polling Settings define the configuration of polling intervals, timeouts, statistics calculations, and database retention settings for your Orion polling engine. For more information about configuring Orion Polling Settings, see Orion Polling Settings on page 173. The Orion Thresholds page opens the Orion General Thresholds page, where Orion threshold settings are configured. For more information, see Orion General Thresholds on page 109.
If you currently have any Orion modules installed, links to the respective module settings pages display in the Settings grouping. For more information about configuring settings for Orion modules, see the Administrator Guide for your Orion module.
Details The Details grouping of the Orion Website Administration page provides links to the following pages containing information about your Orion installation: Database Details This is an information-only page that displays details about the SQL Server database currently used by your Orion installation. In addition to current version information and configuration settings for both your Orion server and your database server, this page displays the total number of monitored objects in the Orion database. Polling Engines Orion supports the implementation of multiple distributed polling engines. Each engine can monitor and collect data from different parts of your network. This page shows the status and selected configuration information for each currently operational polling engine. Orion Core Details This is an information-only page that displays details about your installation of the core components and resources that all Orion products share, including information about your Orion server, monitored object counts, and the version numbers of the executables and DLLs required by any and all installed Orion products. License Details This is an information-only page that displays details about all Orion products that you currently have installed. about both your Orion license and your monitored network. This page also shows the version numbers of the Orion products you are running and the versions of associated DLLs. For more information about managing your license, see Maintaining Licenses with License Manager on page 24.
Viewing Secure Data on the Web

In the interest of security, sensitive network information, such as community strings, logins, and passwords, is not viewable in the web console. However, if you have secured your network, you may check Allow Secure Data On Web (advanced) in the Calculations & Thresholds area of the Orion Polling Settings page to allow the passage of community strings through the web console. Note: This setting does not affect the display of custom reports that you export to the web. For more information see Creating and Viewing Reports on page 219.
Handling Counter Rollovers

The Counter Rollover setting configures Orion to properly handle counter rollovers. Orion is capable of handling either 32-bit or 64-bit counters, but, by default, Orion assumes counters are 32-bit. 32-bit counters have a maximum 32 value of 2 , or 4,294,967,296, and 64-bit counters, if they are supported by your 64 network devices, have a maximum value of 2 , or 18,446,744,073,709,551,616. Note: The 32-bit counters option is designated as Method 1 in the Counter Rollover field on the Orion Polling Settings page. The following procedure designates the type of counter-hanlding used by Orion. To designate the type of counter-handling used by Orion: 1. Log in to the web console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Polling Settings in the Settings grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. If you are using 64-bit counters, select Method 2 in the Counter Rollover field in the Calculations & Thresholds area. Notes: If Method 2 is selected, Orion will intentionally skip a poll if a polled value is less than the previous polled value to permit counting to 64 2 . Orion fully supports the use of 64-bit counters; however, these 64-bit counters can exhibit erratic behavior in some implementations. If you notice peculiar results when using these counters, disable the use of 64bit counters for the problem device and contact the device manufacturer.
5. If you are using of 32-bit counters, select Method 1 in the Counter Rollover field in the Calculations & Thresholds area. Note: If Method 1 is selected, when a rollover is detected, the time between 32 polls is calculated as (2 Last Polled Value) + Current Polled Value.
Orion General Thresholds

Many of the resources available in the Orion Web Console are capable of displaying error and warning conditions for the devices on your network. Errors and warnings display in the Orion Web Console. Orion uses the values provided on the thresholds pages to determine when and how to display errors and warnings in the Orion Web Console. The following sections provide more information about threshold types and configuration:
Orion General Threshold Types Setting Orion General Thresholds
Orion General Threshold Types

The following device condition thresholds are available for configuration as Orion General Thresholds: CPU Load Monitored network devices experiencing CPU loads higher than the value set for the High Level display in High CPU Load reports and resources. Gauges for these devices also display as bold red. Monitored network devices experiencing a CPU load higher than the value set for the Warning Level, but lower than the value set for the High Level, display as red in High CPU Load reports and resources. Gauges for these devices also display as red. Disk Usage Monitored network devices experiencing a disk usage higher than the value set for the High Level display as bold red in Disk Usage reports and resources. Monitored network devices experiencing a disk usage higher than the value set for the Warning Level, but lower than the value set for the High Level, display as red in High Disk Usage reports and resources. Percent Memory Used Monitored network devices experiencing a percent memory usage higher than the value set for the Error Level display in High Percent Utilization reports and resources. Gauges for these devices also display as bold red. Monitored network devices experiencing a percent memory usage higher than the value set for the Warning Level, but lower than the value set for the Error Level, display in High Percent Utilization reports and resources. Gauges for these devices also display as red. Percent Packet Loss Monitored network devices experiencing a percent packet loss higher than the value set for the Error Level display in High Percent Loss reports and resources. Gauges for these devices also display as bold red. Monitored network devices experiencing a percent packet loss higher than the value set for the Warning Level, but lower than the value set for the Error Level, display in High Percent Loss reports and resources. Gauges for these devices also display as red. Orion calculates percent packet loss using ICMP ping requests made on the Default Poll Interval. Orion pings monitored devices and records the results of the ten most recent ping attempts. Percent packet loss is expressed as the
number of failed ping requests, X, divided by the number of ping requests, 10. For more information about the Default Poll Interval, see Orion Polling Settings on page 173. For example, if, at a given point in time, the last ten ping requests made of a selected device resulted in 2 failures and 8 successes, the percent packet loss for the selected device at the given time is reported as 2/10, or 20%. Response Time Monitored devices experiencing response times longer than the value set for the Error Level display in High Response Time reports and resources. Gauges for these devices also display as bold red. Devices experiencing response times longer than the value set for the Warning Level, but shorter than the value set for the Error Level, also display in High Response Time reports and resources. Gauges for these devices also display as red. Orion calculates response time using ICMP ping requests made on the Default Node Poll Interval. Orion pings monitored devices and records the results of the ten most recent ping attempts. Average Response Time is expressed as the average response time of these last 10 ping requests. If Orion does not receive a ping response within the Default Poll Interval, Orion will attempt to ping the nonresponsive device once every 10 seconds for the period designated as the Warning Interval. For more information, see Orion Polling Settings on page 173.
Setting Orion General Thresholds

The following procedure opens the Orion General Thresholds page for configuration. To set Orion thresholds: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Orion Thresholds in the Settings grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. Note: For more information about Orion General Thresholds, see Orion General Threshold Types on page 109. 4. Provide appropriate values for Error Level, High Level, or Warning Level for selected thresholds.
Customizing Views
Orion Web Console views are configurable presentations of network information that can include maps, charts, summary lists, reports, events, and links to other resources. Customized views can then be assigned to menu bars.
Creating New Views

You can customize the Orion Web Console for individual users by logging in as an administrator and creating new views as shown in the following procedure. To create a new view: 1. Click Settings in the top right of the web console, and then click Manage Views in the Views grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 2. Click Add. 3. Enter the Name of New View, and then select the Type of View. Note: The Type of View selection affects how the view is made accessible to users, and your choice may not be changed later. For more information, see Views by Device Type on page 115. 4. Click Submit. After you have created a new view, the Customize YourView page opens. For more information, see Editing Views on page 112.
Editing Views
The Orion Web Console allows administrators to configure views for individual users. The following steps are required to configure an existing view. To edit an existing view: 1. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 2. Click Manage Views in the Views grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 3. Select the view you want to customize from the list, and then click Edit. 4. If you want to change the column layout of your view, click Edit to the right of the column widths, and then configure the column layout of your view as follows: a. Select the number of columns under Layout. b. Provide the width, in pixels, of each column in the appropriate fields.. c. Click Submit.
5. If you want to add a resource, repeat the following steps for each resource: Notes: Resources already in your view will not be checked on this page, as it is a view of all web console resources. It is, therefore, possible to pick duplicates of resources you are already viewing. Several options on the Add Resources page are added to the list of resources for a page, but the actual configuration of a given map, link, or code is not added until the page is previewed. Some resources may require additional configuration. For more information, see Resource Configuration Examples on page 115.
a. Click + next to the column in which you want to add a resource. b. Click + next to a resource group on the Add Resources page to expand the resource group, displaying available resources. c. Check all resources you want to add. d. If you have completed the addition of resources to the selected view, click Submit. 6. If you want to delete a resource from a column, select the resource, and then click X next to the resource column to delete the selected resource. 7. If you want to copy a resource in a column, select the resource, and then click next to the resource column to delete the selected resource. 8. If you want to rearrange the order in which resources appear in your view, select resources, and then use the arrow keys to rearrange them. 9. If you have finished configuring your view, click Preview. Note: A preview of your custom web console displays in a new window. A message may display in the place of some resources if information for the resource has not been polled yet. For more information, see Resource Configuration Examples on page 115. 10. Close the preview window. 11. If you are satisfied with the configuration of your view, click Done. Notes: For more information about adding a customized view to menu bars as a custom item, see Customizing Web Console Menu Bars on page 127. For more information about assigning your customized view as the default view for a user, see Editing User Accounts on page 166.
Exporting Views to PDF

Many views in the Orion Web Console may be exported directly to portable document format (.pdf). Views that may be exported display Export to PDF in the top right corner of the exportable view. To export a view to PDF: 1. Open the web console view to export. 2. Click Export to PDF in the top right corner of the view. 3. If you are prompted to save the .pdf file, click Save. 4. Navigate to an appropriate location, provide an appropriate file name, and then click Save.
Configuring View Limitations

As a security feature, the web console gives administrators the ability to limit the types of devices displayed on any selected view. The following view limitations are defined by default:
Orion Web Console View Limitations Single Network Node Node Name Pattern Machine Type Pattern Hardware Manufacturer System Location System Contact Group of Volumes Single Machine Type Group Name Pattern Group of Nodes System Name Pattern Group of Machine Types Single Hardware Manufacturer System Contact Pattern IP Address Pattern Device Status Single Group System Location Pattern Single Interface (Orion) Interface Status (Orion) Interface Alias Pattern (Orion) Group of Interfaces (Orion) Interface Name Pattern (Orion) Interface Type (Orion) Group of Groups
The following procedure configures a view limitation. To enable a view limitation: 1. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 2. Click Manage Views in the Views grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 3. Select the view to which you want to add a limitation and then click Edit. 4. In the View Limitation area of the Customize View page, click Edit. 5. Select the type of view limitation you want to apply, and then click Continue.
6. Provide or check appropriate strings or options to define the device types to include or exclude from the selected view, and then click Submit. Note: The asterisk (*) is a valid wildcard. Pattern limitations restrict views to devices for which the corresponding fields include the provided string.
Copying Views
When you want to create multiple views based on the same device type, copying views allows you to create one view, and then use that view as a template to create other new views. The following steps copy an existing view. To copy a view: 1. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 2. Click Manage Views in the Views grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 3. Select the view you want to copy, and then click Copy. 4. If you want to edit a copied view, follow the procedure in the Editing Views section on page 112.
Deleting Views
The following steps delete an existing view. To delete an existing view: 1. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 2. Click Manage Views in the Views grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 3. Select the view you want to delete, and then click Delete.
Views by Device Type

There are vast differences among network objects and the statistics they report, but the Orion Web Console can make it easier to view network data by displaying object details by device type, giving you the ability to have a different view for each unique type of device you have on your network, including routers, firewalls, and servers. The following steps assign a view by any available device type. To assign a view by device type: 1. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 2. Click Views by Device Type in the Views grouping of the Orion Website Administration page.
3. Select available Web Views for the different types of devices that Orion is currently monitoring or managing on your network. 4. Click Submit.
Resource Configuration Examples

Several resources that may be selected from the Add Resources page require additional configuration. Included in this section are examples of these resources and the steps that are required for their proper configuration. Selecting a Network Map Network maps created with Orion Network Atlas can give a quick overview of your network, right from the main web console view. For more information about creating maps, see Creating Network Maps on page 217. Note: Clicking the resource title in the title bar menu displays the resource by itself in a browser window. The following procedure adds a network map to the Orion Web Console. To add a network map to the web console: 1. Create a new view or edit an existing view. Note: For more information, see Customizing Views on page 111. 2. Select the view to which you want to add the map, and then click Edit. 3. Click + next to the view column in which you want to display the new map. 4. Click + next to Network Maps, check Network Map, and then click Submit. 5. Click Preview on the Customize YourView page. 6. Click Edit in the Network Map resource title bar. 7. If you do not want to use the default title provided, enter a new Title for the title bar of the added map. 8. If you want a subtitle, enter a new Subtitle for the added map. Note: Titles and subtitles may be entered as either text or HTML. 9. Select from the list of available maps. 10. Select the Scale at which you want to display the map. Note: If you leave the Scale field blank, the map will display at full scale, based on the size of the column in which the map displays. 11. Click Submit.
Displaying a List of Objects on a Network Map When your web console view includes a network map, it can be helpful to maintain a list of network objects that appear on the map. The following procedure enables a resource listing network map objects. Note: Clicking the resource title displays the resource in a new browser window. To display a list of network map objects: 1. Create a new view or edit an existing view. Note: For more information, see Customizing Views on page 111. 2. Select the view to display the list of network map objects, and then click Edit. 3. Click + next to the view column in which you want to display the new list of network map objects. 4. Click + next to Network Maps, check List of Objects on Network Map, and then click Submit. 5. Click Preview on the Customize YourView page. 6. Click Edit in the title bar of the List of Objects on Network Map resource. 7. If you do not want to use the default title provided, enter a new Title for the header of the objects list. 8. If you want a subtitle, enter a new Subtitle for the added objects list. Note: Titles and subtitles may be entered as either text or HTML. 9. Select from the list of available maps for the objects that you want to populate your list, and then click Submit. Displaying a Custom List of Maps The web console allows you to populate a custom view with a list of available network maps. Each map in your custom list, when clicked, opens in a new window. The following procedure enables a custom network maps list resource. Note: Clicking the resource title displays the resource in its own browser window. To display a custom list of maps: 1. Create a new view or edit an existing view. Note: For more information, see Customizing Views on page 111. 2. Select the view to which you want to add the custom list of network maps, and then click Edit. 3. Click + next to the view column in which you want to display the custom list of network maps.
4. Click + next to Network Maps. 5. Check Custom List of Maps, and then click Submit. 6. Click Preview on the Customize YourView page, and then click Edit in the title bar of the Custom List of Maps resource. 7. If you do not want to use the default title provided, enter a new Title for the header of the maps list. 8. If you want a subtitle, enter a new Subtitle for the custom list of maps. Note: Titles and subtitles may be entered as either text or HTML. 9. Check the maps you want to include in your maps list. 10. Click Submit. Displaying an Event Summary - Custom Period of Time You may want your web console view to display an event summary for a specified period of time. The following procedure details the steps to include an event summary in your web console. Note: Clicking the resource title in the title bar menu displays the resource by itself in a browser window. To display an event summary: 1. Create a new view or edit an existing view. Note: For more information about creating a new view or editing an existing view, see Customizing Views on page 111. 2. Select the view to include the event summary, and then click Edit. 3. Click + next to the view column that will display the event summary. 4. Click + next to Events. 5. Check Event Summary Custom Time Period, and then click Submit. 6. Click Preview on the Customize YourView page. 7. Click Edit in the title bar of the Event Summary resource. 8. If you do not want to use the default title provided, enter a new Title for the header of the event summary. Note: Titles may be entered as either text or HTML. 9. Select the time period for displaying events from Display Events for the following Time Period. 10. Click Submit.
Specifying User-Defined Links The User-Defined Links option may be used to create quick access to external websites or customized views. URLs of your customized views can be copied from their preview pages and pasted in a User-Defined Links field. The following steps enable user-defined links from within your web console. Note: Clicking the resource title in the title bar menu displays the resource by itself in a browser window. To enable a user-defined links resource: 1. Create a new view or edit an existing view. Note: For more information, see Customizing Views on page 111. 2. Select the view to which you want to add the user-defined links resource. 3. Click Edit. 4. Click + next to the view column to display the user-defined links resource. 5. Click + next to Miscellaneous 6. Check User Defined Links. 7. Click Submit. 8. Click Preview on the Customize YourView page. 9. Click Edit in the title bar of the User Defined Links resource. 10. If you do not want to use the default title provided, enter a new Title for the links list. 11. If you want a subtitle, enter a new Subtitle for the links list. Note: Titles and subtitles may be entered as either text or HTML. 12. Enter the following information for each link you want to define: a. A link Name and the URL of your link. b. If you want your links to open in a new browser window, check Open in New Window. 13. Click Submit. Specifying Custom HTML or Text In situations where you have static information that you want to provide in the web console, use the Custom HTML or Text option. The Custom HTML or Text option may also be used to create quick access to your customized views. The following procedure will create a static content area within your web console for displaying text or HTML content.
Note: Clicking the resource title displays the resource in a new browser window. To specify custom HTML or text: 1. Create a new view or edit an existing view. Note: For more information, see Customizing Views on page 111. 2. Select the view to include the custom HTML or text. 3. Click Edit. 4. Click + next to the column to display the custom HTML or text. 5. Click + next to Miscellaneous, and then check Custom HTML or Text. 6. Click Submit. 7. Click Preview on the Customize YourView page. 8. Click Edit in the title bar of the Custom HTML or Text resource. 9. If you do not want to use the default title provided, enter a new Title for the specified content area. 10. If you want a subtitle, enter a new Subtitle for the specified content area. Note: Titles and subtitles may be entered as either text or HTML. 11. Enter content as either text or HTML into the Raw HTML field. 12. Click Submit. Specifying an Orion Report The web console is able to incorporate reports that you have created in Orion Report Writer into any view. The following procedure will take a report that you have created with Report Writer and include it within a web console view. Note: Clicking the resource title in the title bar menu displays the resource by itself in a browser window. To include an Orion report: 1. Create a new view or edit an existing view. Note: For more information, see Customizing Views on page 111. 2. Select the view to which you want to add the report. 3. Click Edit. 4. Click + next to the view column in which you want to display the report. 5. Click + next to Report Writer. 6. Check Report from Orion Report Writer.
7. Click Submit. 8. Click Preview on the Customize YourView page. 9. Click Edit in the title bar of the Report from Orion Report Writer resource. 10. If you do not want to use the default title provided, enter a new Title for the included report. 11. If you want a subtitle, enter a new Subtitle for the included report. Note: Titles and subtitles may be entered as either text or HTML. 12. Select a Report to include. 13. If you want to add a filter to the included report, enter an appropriate query in the Filter Nodes field. Note: Filter Nodes is an optional, advanced, web console feature that requires some knowledge of SQL queries. Click + next to Show Filter Examples to view a few example filters. 14. Click Submit. Displaying a Custom List of Reports The web console allows you to populate a custom view with a custom reports list. When clicked from the list, each report opens in a new window. The following procedure details the steps required to enable a custom list of network reports. Note: Clicking the resource title displays the resource in a new browser window. To display a custom list of reports: 1. Create a new view or edit an existing view. For more information, see Customizing Views on page 111. 2. Select the view to which you want to add the custom list of reports, and then click Edit. 3. Click + next to the column to display the custom list of reports. 4. Click + next to Report Writer. 5. Check Custom List of Reports, and then click Submit. 6. Click Preview on the Customize YourView page, and then click Edit in the title bar of the Report from Orion Report Writer resource. 7. If you do not want to use the default title provided, enter a new Title for the header of the reports list. 8. If you want a subtitle, enter a new Subtitle for the custom list of reports. Note: Titles and subtitles may be entered as either text or HTML.
9. Check the reports that you want to include in your custom list of reports. Note: To allow a user to view a report included in the custom list, you must set the report access for the account. For more information, see Configuring an Account Report Folder on page 170. 10. Click Submit. Filtering Nodes Your Orion Web Console can maintain a customizable node list for your network. Node lists may be configured for specific views using SQL query filters. The following steps set up node filtering for node lists included in web console views. Note: Clicking the resource title displays the resource in a new browser window. To enable filtering on a node list: 1. Create a new view or edit an existing view. Note: For more information, see Customizing Views on page 111. 2. Select the view to which you want to add the node list 3. Click Edit. 4. Click + next to the view column in which you want to display the node list. 5. Click + next to Node Lists. 6. Check All Nodes Table, and then click Submit. 7. Click Preview on the Customize YourView page, and then 8. Click Edit in the title bar of the All Nodes Table resource. 9. If you do not want to use the default title provided, enter a new Title for the node list. 10. If you want a subtitle, enter a new Subtitle for the node list. Note: Titles and subtitles may be entered as either text or HTML. 11. If you want to filter your node list by text or IP address range, provide the text or IP address range by which you want to filter your node list in the Filter Text field, as shown in the following examples: Type Home in the Filter Text field to list all nodes with Home in the node name or as a location. Type 192.168.1.* in the Filter Text field to list all nodes in the 192.168.1.0-255 IP address range.
12. Select the property that is appropriate to the filter text provided above, as shown in the following examples:
If you typed Home in the Filter Text area, select Node Name or Location to list nodes with Home in the node name or as a location. If you typed 192.168.1.* in the Filter Text area, select IP Address to list only nodes in the 192.168.1.0-255 IP address range.
13. If you want to apply a SQL filter to the node list, enter an appropriate query in the Filter Nodes (SQL) field. Notes: Filter Nodes (SQL) is an optional, advanced, web console feature that requires some knowledge of SQL queries. Click + next to Show Filter Examples to view a few example filters. By default, node list resources are designed to sort nodes alphabetically by node caption. This configuration can not be overwritten using a SQL filter, so order by clauses included in SQL filters are redundant and will result in Custom SQL filter formatting errors.
14. Click Submit. Grouping Nodes Your Orion Web Console can maintain a customizable node list for your network. Node lists may be configured for specific views with node grouping. The following steps set up node grouping for node lists included in web console views. Note: Clicking the resource title in the title bar menu displays the resource by itself in a browser window. To enable grouping on a node list: 1. Create a new view or edit an existing view. Note: For more information, see Customizing Views on page 111. 2. Select the view to which you want to add the node list, and then click Edit. 3. Click + next to the view column in which you want to display the node list. 4. Click + next to Node Lists. 5. Check All Nodes Tree, All Nodes Tree (AJAX), or All Nodes Tree (Non-AJAX), and then click Submit. 6. Click Preview on the Customize YourView page. 7. Click Edit in the title bar of the All Nodes Tree (AJAX) resource. 8. If you do not want to use the default title provided, enter a new Title for the node list.
9. If you want a subtitle, enter a new Subtitle for the node list. Note: Titles and subtitles may be entered as either text or HTML. 10. Select up to three criteria, in specified levels, for Grouping Nodes within your web console view. 11. If you want to apply a SQL filter to the node list, enter an appropriate query in the Filter Nodes field. Notes: Filter Nodes (SQL) is an optional, advanced, web console feature that requires some knowledge of SQL queries. Click + next to Show Filter Examples to view a few example filters. By default, node list resources are designed to sort nodes alphabetically by node caption. This configuration cannot be overwritten using a SQL filter, so order by clauses included in SQL filters are redundant and will result in Custom SQL filter formatting errors.
12. Click Submit. Adding a Service Level Agreement Line to Charts (Orion) The Orion Web Console can display a service level agreement (SLA) line on any Min/Max/Average bps chart. When you add a customer property named SLA and populate the field with your device SLA values, the Orion Web Console will display the appropriate line on your charts. Notes: The SLA line may not appear immediately. It may take several minutes for the change to be detected by the Orion web engine.
To add a Service Level Agreement line to Min/Max/Average bps charts: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Grouping and Access Control > Custom Property Editor. 2. Click Add Custom Property, and then confirm that Add Predefined Properties is selected. 3. Check SLA in the list of predefined properties, and then click OK. 4. Click Properties > Edit Interfaces Properties. 5. Enter the SLA value (in bps) in the SLA column for each interface you want to label with SLA values. For example, type 1544000 for a T1 interface (1.544 Mbps) or 225000 for a serial connection running at 225 Kbps. 6. Close the Custom Property Editor.
7. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 8. Browse to the Interface Details view of one of the interfaces you edited. The SLA line displays on any chart showing Min/Max/Average bps.
Using the Orion Web Console Message Center

The Message Center provides a single, customizable view in the web console where, in a single table, you can review all events, alerts, traps and Syslog messages on your network. To view and configure the Message Center: 1. Click Home > Message Center. 2. If you only want to see messages for specific devices, select appropriate device properties in the Filter Devices area. 3. In the Filter Messages area, select the Time period for the messages you want to review, and then provide the number of messages you want to show. 4. If you want to show all messages, Including messages that have been acknowledged, check Show acknowledged in the Filter Messages area. 5. If you only want to see certain types of messages, filter messages as shown in the following steps: a. If you want to view alerts, confirm that Show triggered alerts is checked, and then select the type of alerts to display. b. If you want to view event messages, confirm that Show event messages is checked, and then select the type of events to display. c. If you want to view Syslog messages, confirm that Show syslog messages is checked, and then select the Severity and Facility of the Syslog messages you want to display. Note: For more information about Syslog severities and facilities, see Syslog Message Priorities on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. d. If you want to view received traps, confirm that Show received traps is checked, and then select the Trap type and Community String of the traps you want to display. 6. Click Refresh to update the list of displayed messages.
Creating a Custom Summary View

The Orion Custom Summary View enables you to create a fully customized object-based view composed solely of resources you have selected. The following procedure creates a custom summary view in the web console.
To create or edit a custom summary view in the web console: 1. Click Home > Custom Summary. 2. Click Edit in any Custom Object Resource. 3. Provide a Title and Subtitle for the selected Custom Object Resource. 4. Click Select Orion Object. 5. On the Select a network object window, use the Show only and Group by selection fields, as appropriate, to filter the displayed list of monitored objects. 6. Select the Orion object on which you want to base the selected Custom Object resource, and then click Select Orion object. 7. Select the type of information you want the custom resource to display about the selected object, and then customize the resource, as indicated in the following steps: a. If you have selected an alerts resource, indicate whether or not you want to display acknowledged alerts by checking or clearing Show Acknowledged Alerts, as appropriate. b. If you have selected a resource to which SQL filters may be applied, edit available SQL filters as appropriate. For more information, see Using Node Filters on page 133. c. If you have selected a resource with an Auto-Hide option, select Yes or No to enable or to disable the Auto-Hide feature, respectively. If enabled, the resource is automatically hidden if and when related data is not present in the Orion database. d. If you have selected a sortable list resource, in the Sort By field select the property by which you want the list sorted. e. If you have selected a gauge-style resource, select a gauge Style and provide a Gauge Size. f. If you have selected a chart-style resource, select an appropriate Time Period and Sample Interval, and then indicate whether or not you want to show a Trend Line.
g. If you have selected a Universal Device Poller resource, select the Universal Device Poller and Chart Format, and then configure all other options as required for similar resource types. 8. Click Submit. Note: For more information about customizing available resource types, click Help in the header of any resource on the Custom Summary view, and then click the corresponding resource type.
Creating and Editing External Website Views

With the external website view feature, any Orion administrator can select any external website and designate it as an Orion Web Console view, as shown in the following procedure. To create or edit an external website view in the web console: 1. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 2. Click External Websites in the Customize grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 3. If you want to delete an existing external website, click Delete next to the website you want to delete, and then click OK to confirm the deletion. 4. If you want to add a new external website, click Add. 5. If you want to edit an existing external website, click Edit next to the name of the website you want to edit. 6. Provide a Menu Title for the external website to display in the Views toolbar. 7. If you want to include a heading within the view, provide an optional Page Title to display within the view. 8. Provide the URL of the external website, in http://domain_name format. 9. Select the Menu Bar to which you want to add the new external website link. Note: For more information about customizing menu bars, see Customizing Web Console Menu Bars on page 127. 10. Click OK. 11. Click Preview to view the external website as the web console will display it.
Customizing the Orion Web Console

The following sections provide details for customizing your Orion Web Console: Customizing Web Console Menu Bars Changing the Web Console Color Scheme Changing the Web Console Site Logo
Customizing Web Console Menu Bars

The menu bars displayed at the top of every page may be configured to display various menu items. You can also define menu items and add them to custom menu bars. For more information about customizing menu bars for individual accounts, see Editing User Accounts on page 166.
The following procedure customizes a web console menu bar. To customize web console menu bars: 1. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 2. Click Customize Menu Bars in the Customize grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 3. If you want to modify an existing menu, click Edit beneath the menu bar you want to modify, and then click and drag items between the Available items list on the left and the Selected items list on the right until the Selected items list includes all the items you want to include in your edited menu. Note: Hover over any view title to read a description. Selected items display from left to right in the edited menu bar as they are listed from top to bottom. 4. If you want to create a new menu bar, complete the following steps: a. Click New Menu Bar, and then provide a Name for the New Menu Bar. b. Click and drag the buttons you want to include in your new menu bar from the Available items list on the left to their correct relative locations in the Selected items list on the right. Note: Hover over any view title to read a view description. Selected items display from left to right in the new menu bar as they are listed from top to bottom. 5. If you want to add menu items, complete the following steps: a. Click Edit under the menu bar to which you are adding the new item. b. Click and drag the items you want to include in your new menu from the Available items list on the left to their correct relative locations in the Selected items list on the right. Notes: Hover over any view title to read a view description. Selected items display from left to right in the new menu bar as they are listed from top to bottom. If you check Reports from the Select Menu Items page, you must also enable reports for the accounts that use the menu bar. For more information, see Configuring an Account Report Folder on page 170.
6. If you want to add a custom menu item, complete the following steps: a. Click Edit under the menu bar to which you are adding the custom item. b. Click Add.
c. Provide the Name, URL, and Description of your custom menu item. d. If you want the menu option to open in a new window, check Open in a New Window. e. Click OK. 7. If you want to delete a menu item, click and drag the item to delete from the Selected items list on the right to the Available items list on the left. Warning: Do not delete the Admin option from the Admin menu bar. 8. If you want to change the location of an item in your menu, click and drag items to move them up and down in the Selected items list. 9. If you have finished editing your menu bar, click Submit.
Changing the Web Console Color Scheme

The overall color scheme of the Orion Web Console may be changed to any of several color schemes that are viewable by all users, as shown in the following procedure. To change the web console color scheme: 1. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 2. Click Color Scheme in the Customize grouping. 3. Select the desired color scheme, and then click Submit.
Changing the Web Console Site Logo

The Orion Web Console can be configured to display your logo instead of the default SolarWinds banner across the top of every web console page. The following steps change the default SolarWinds web console banner. To change the web console banner: 1. Create an appropriately sized graphic to replace the SolarWinds logo. Notes: The SolarWinds banner file is 271x48 pixels at 200 pixels/inch. The SolarWinds.com End User License Agreement prohibits the modification, elimination, or replacement of either the SolarWinds.com logo and link on the menu bar or the SolarWinds copyright line at the bottom of the page.
2. Place your graphic in the images directory. Note: By default, it is in C:\Inetpub\SolarWinds\NetPerfMon\.

3. Log in to the web console as an administrator. 4. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 5. Click Web Console Settings in the Settings grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 6. Type the new logo image name as a replacement for SolarWinds.Logo.jpg in the Site Logo URL field.
Configuring the Available Product Updates View

The Orion Web Console can automatically check for the availability of any updates to your currently installed Orion products. By default, the web console regularly checks for product updates automatically, as indicated by the dates and times reported as Last Check and Next Check, but you can click Check Now at any time to see an up-to-the-minute update. If updates are available, a note is posted in the web console notification bar and updates are listed in this view, where you can then select and download them as needed. Note: For more information about downloading listed product updates, see Updating your Orion Installation on page 130. To configure product updates: 1. Log in to the web console as an administrator, and then click Settings in the top right corner of the web console. 2. Click Available Product Updates in the Product Updates grouping. 3. If you want to disable the automatic check for product updates, clear Check for product updates, and then click Save Settings. 4. If you want to ensure that updates are listed for all currently installed Orion products, including Orion NPM, Orion APM, and all Orion modules, check Show all updates. 5. Click Save Settings.
Updating your Orion Installation

If your Product Updates view is configured to list Orion updates, you can download them directly from the Product Updates view. To update your Orion installation: 1. Log in to the web console as an administrator, and then click Settings in the top right corner of the web console. 2. Click Available Product Updates in the Product Updates grouping. 3. Click Check Now to refresh the updates list.
4. If there are any updates you want to ignore, check the updates to ignore, and then click Ignore Selected. 5. Check the updates you want to apply, and then click Download Selected. 6. Save and then execute downloaded installers. For more information, see either the readme.txt file packaged with the downloaded update or review related documentation available at www.solarwinds.com.
Orion Web Console and Chart Settings

The Orion Website Settings page allows an Orion Web Console administrator to set a number of options that apply to the web console user environment. The following settings are configured on this page: Web Console Settings Chart Settings Discovery Settings
The following procedure configures web console settings. To configure Orion Website and Chart Settings: 1. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 2. Click Web Console Settings in the Settings grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 3. When you finish configuring web console and chart settings, click Submit.
Web Console Settings

The following options are configured on the Orion Web Console Settings page: Session Timeout is the amount of time (in minutes) the Orion Web Console waits through user inactivity before the user is logged out. Windows Account Login allows you to select whether or not you want to enable automatic login with Windows Active Directory credentials. By enabling this feature, in the future, the current user will be automatically logged-in. Page Refresh specifies the amount of time that passes before a web console page, or view, reloads automatically.
Site Logo URL is the local path to the banner graphic that appears at the top of every web console page. For more information about changing the banner to display your logo, see Changing the Web Console Site Logo on page 129. Site Login Text is optional text displayed on the Orion Web Console login page. The text entered here is seen by all web console users when they log in. HTML tags are allowed. Help Server is the URL of the server where online help for Orion products is stored. The default location is http://www.solarwinds.com. If you are in an Internet-restricted network environment but require access to online help, download the entire online help, copy it to a web server, and then change the Help Server URL to that of the web server. You can download the online help from http://www.solarwinds.com/support/Orion/docs/OrionLocalHelp.zip. Status Rollup Mode establishes the way the availability status of a collection of nodes on the node tree or on a map is displayed in the web console. For more information about the types of information communicated using status icons, see Status Icons and Identifiers on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. For more information about Status Rollup Modes, including examples, see Status Rollup Mode on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. There are two options for the case when there are nodes of differing statuses in a selected group: Mixed Status shows Warning, the default status, ensures the status of a node group displays the worst warning-type state in the group. If none of the group members have a warning-typed state but the group contains both up and down nodes, a Mixed Availability warning state is displayed for the whole group. For example, Critical + Down = Critical, Critical + Warning = Critical, and Up + Down = Mixed Availability. Show Worst Status ensures the worst state in a node group is displayed for the whole group. For example, Up + Down = Down and Unreachable + Shutdown = Shutdown.
Chart Settings
The following chart settings may be configured in the Chart Settings section of the Web Console Settings page:
Chart Aspect Ratio is the height/width ratio for web console charts. This ratio should be set between 0.25 and 3.0 to avoid erratic display problems, though the performance of individual systems may differ. Thumbnail Aspect Ratio is the height/width ratio for chart thumbnails. 95th Percentile Calculations is a setting that adds annotation lines to charts at the entered percentile. This value is normally set to 95. For more information about 95th percentile calculations, see 95th Percentile Calculations on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. Font Size sets the default relative size, Small, Medium, or Large, of the text that is displayed within charts in the Orion Web Console. This setting is independent of your browser settings. The font settings in your browser will affect resource headers and some resource contents.
Discovery Settings The Discovery Settings section provides the Notify about new removable volumes option. This option allows you to indicate whether or not you want to be notified when removable volumes are added to your network and discovered during network discovery. For more information about network discovery in Orion, see Discovering and Adding Network Devices on page 90.
Using Node Filters

When you are managing or monitoring large numbers of network devices, node list resources can easily become very large and difficult to navigate. Filters are optional SQL queries that are used to limit node list displays for easier resource navigation. SQL queries can be made on any predefined or custom properties. For more information about defining custom properties, see Creating Custom Properties on page 238. To apply a node filter: 1. Click Edit in any node list resource. 2. Provide an appropriate SQL query in the Filter Nodes (SQL) field, and then click Submit. The following are a few example filters with associated SQL queries. Note: By default, node list resources are designed to sort nodes alphabetically by node caption. This configuration can not be overwritten using a SQL filter, so order by clauses included in SQL filters are redundant and will result in Custom SQL filter formatting errors.
Filter the results to only show nodes that are not Up:
Status<>1
The following are valid status levels: o o o o

0 = Unknown (current up/down status of the node is unknown) 1 = Up (The node is responding to PINGs) 2 = Down (The node is not responding) 3 = Warning (The node may be responding, but the connection from the server to the Node is dropping packets)
Only show Cisco devices: Vendor = 'Cisco' Only show devices in Atlanta. (using a custom property named City):
City = 'Atlanta'
Only show devices beginning with "AX3-": Caption Like 'AX3-*' Only show Nortel devices that are Down:
Vendor Like 'Nortel*' AND Status=2
Only show devices ending in '-TX': Vendor Like '*-TX'
Custom Charts in the Orion Web Console

The Orion Web Console provides charts for all monitored objects that you can customize for your own use, as detailed in the following sections.
Customizing Charts in the Orion Web Console

Clicking any chart opens the Custom Chart view in a new window, displaying the selected chart with additional chart customization options. For more information about the Custom Chart view, see Custom Chart View on page 137. You can also configure any custom chart resource in the Orion Web Console directly from the resource title bar either by selecting from the dropdown menu of options or by clicking Edit to display the Edit Chart Title view, as described in the following sections. Custom Chart Resource Title Bar Options The title bar menu of the custom chart resource provides the following options for viewing chart data:
View chart data over the Last 7 Days or over the Last 30 Days Select Edit Chart to view and modify chart settings. Note: This is the same as clicking Edit in the title bar. View Chart Data as an HTML format document View Chart Data in Excel to see chart data in an Excel-compatible format
Edit Chart Title View Click Edit in the title bar of a custom chart resource to display the Edit Chart Title view. This view provides the following options to configure your chart resource: Select a Chart allows you to change the chart type displayed in the current resource. Chart options are determined in accordance with the type of view displaying the resource you are currently editing. For more information about available node charts, see Custom Node Charts on page 136. For more information about available volume charts, see Custom Volume Charts on page 137. The Time Period for the selected chart may be any of the following: Last Hour Yesterday Last 30 Days Last 2 Hours Last 7 Days Last 3 Months Last 24 Hours This Month This Year Today Last Month Last 12 Months
The Sample Interval for the selected chart may be any of the following: Every Minute Every 30 Minutes Every 12 Hours Notes: Each sample interval is represented on a chart by a single point or bar. Data within a selected sample interval is summarized automatically. Due to limits of memory allocation, some combinations of time periods and sample intervals require too many system resources to display, due to the large number of polled data points. As a result, charts may not display if the time period is too long or if the sample interval is too small. Every 5 Minutes Every Hour One a Day Every 10 Minutes Every 2 Hours Every 7 Days Every 15 Minutes Every 6 Hours
The Trend Line option allows you to enable the trend line feature of Orion charts. By enabling trend lines on Orion charts, you can see potential future results as they are extrapolated from collected historical data. Note: Due to the broad array of factors that can affect the performance of devices on your network, trend lines provided on Orion charts are intended as approximate predictions of future data only.
For more information about customizing web console views to display custom th charts, see Customizing Views on page 111. Some charts also provide a 95 th Percentile marker for your reference. For more information about calculating 95 th percentile values, see 95 Percentile Calculations on page Error! Bookmark not defined..
Custom Node Charts

The following node-related charts, grouped by type, are available as resources within the Orion Web Console. To add any of these charts to a web console view dealing with monitored nodes, add the Custom Node Chart resource to the Node Details view. For more information about adding resources to Orion Web Console views, see Customizing Views on page 111. For more information about customizing any of the following charts, see Orion Web Console and Chart Settings on page 131. Availability The following charts are available to display node availability information over custom time periods for nodes monitored by Orion. Availability Availability Autoscale Availability and Response Time
CPU Load The following charts display CPU loading information over specified periods of time for nodes monitored by Orion. Average CPU Load Min/Max/Average CPU Load
Memory Usage The following charts present memory usage information over custom time periods for nodes monitored by Orion.
Average Memory Usage Memory/Buffer Failures Min/Max/Average Memory Usage Percent Memory Used
Packet Loss and Response Time The following charts are available to display historical statistics about packet loss and response time for nodes monitored by Orion. Availability and Response Time Average Response Time Average Response Time and Packet Loss Min/Max/Average Response Time Min/Max/Average Response Time and Packet Loss Percent Loss Bar Chart Percent Loss Line Chart
Custom Volume Charts

The following volume-related charts, grouped by type, are available as resources within the Orion Web Console. To add any of these charts to a web console view dealing with monitored volumes, add the Custom Volume Chart resource to the Volume Details view. For more information about adding resources to Orion Web Console views, see Customizing Views on page 111. For more information about customizing the following charts, see Orion Web Console and Chart Settings on page 131. Allocation Failures Shows the number of disk allocation failures that have occurred on the selected volume. Min/Max/Average Disk Usage Shows both the total disk space available and the average amount of disk space used on the selected volume. Bars are also included to show minimum and maximum levels of disk usage. Percent Disk Usage Shows the total available disk space and the average amount of disk space used, as a percentage of the total available, on the selected volume.
Volume Size Shows the total disk space available on the selected volume.
Custom Chart View

Charts in the Orion Web Console are easily customizable. Clicking a chart opens the Custom Chart view in a new window. The following sections describe options that are available on the Custom Chart page to modify the presentation of a selected chart. Note: Click Refresh at any time to review changes you have made. Printing Options To print your customized chart, click Printable Version and a printable version of your customized chart displays in the browser. Chart Titles Chart Titles are displayed at the top center of a generated chart. The Chart Titles area allows you to modify the Title and Subtitles of your generated chart. Note: Orion may provide default chart titles and subtitles. If you edit any of the Chart Titles fields on the Custom Chart page, you can restore the default titles and subtitles by clearing the respective fields, and then clicking Submit. Time Period Predefined and custom time periods are available for generated charts. You may designate the time period for a chart by either of the following methods: Select a predefined period from the Select a Time Period: menu. Provide custom Beginning and Ending Dates/Times in the appropriate fields in the Time Period area.
Sample Interval The sample interval dictates the precision of a given chart. A single point or bar is plotted for each sample interval. If a sample interval spans multiple polls, data is automatically summarized and plotted as a single point or bar on the chart. Note: Due to limits of memory allocation and the large number of polled data points, some combinations of time periods and sample intervals may require too many system resources to display. As a result, charts may not display if the time period is too long or if the sample interval is too small.
Chart Size Chart Size options configure the width and height, in pixels, of the chart. You can maintain the same width/height aspect ratio, or scale the chart in size, by entering a width in the Width field and then entering 0 for the Height. Font Size Font sizes for generated charts are variable. The Font Size option allows you to select a Small, Medium, or Large size font for your chart labels and text. Note: Font Size selections are maintained in the printable version of your chart. Data Export Options The Display Data from Chart area provides the following options to export chart data as either Excel-compatible Raw Data or as HTML-formatted Chart Data: To view chart data in an Excel-compatible format, click Raw Data, and then follow the prompts, if provided, to open or save the resulting raw data file. To view HTML-formatted chart data in a new browser, click Chart Data.
Integrating SolarWinds Engineers Toolset

When you are browsing the Orion Web Console from a computer that already has a SolarWinds Toolset installed, Orion allows you to launch Toolset tools directly from your web browser. Right-clicking any monitored object listed in an Orion Web Console running the Toolset Integration displays a menu of available Toolset tools and functions. The following sections detail the configuration of the available Toolset integration. Note: For more information about the SolarWinds Engineers Toolset tools, see www.solarwinds.com.
Configuring a Toolset Integration

The following procedure configures SolarWinds Toolset for integration within the Orion Web Console. Note: The first time the Toolset tools are accessed, a security warning may be displayed. Click Yes to allow the toolset integration. To configure SolarWinds Toolset integration settings: 1. Right-click any monitored object displayed within the Orion Web Console. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click SNMP Community String.
Note: The first time you launch a tool requiring an SNMP community string from the right-click menu, the SNMP Community String window displays. 4. If you want to delete any or all saved community strings, select the strings that you want to delete, and then click Remove, or click Remove All. 5. Click Menu Options, and then configure the right-click menu as follows: a. If you want either to add menu items to the right-click menu or to remove menu items from the right-click menu, move menu items between the list of Available Menu Options on the left and Selected Menu Options on the right by selecting items in either column and clicking the right and left arrows, as appropriate. b. If you want to change the order of menu items, select items and then click the up and down arrows next to the Selected Menu Options list. c. If you want to add a separator between items, move the -------------menu option from the Available list to the Selected list, and then move it to your preferred location within the Selected Menu Options list. 6. Click Automatic Menu Items. 7. Check either or both, if available, of the following options: Automatically add sub-menu items to the MIB Browser (Query MIB) menu option from the MIB Browers Bookmarks. Automatically add sub-menu items to the Real Time Interface Monitor menu option from the Real-Time Interface Monitor saved report types.
Note: These options expand the list of available menu items by incorporating menu links to MIB browser bookmarks and Real-Time Interface Monitor saved reports, respectively.
Adding Programs to a Toolset Integration Menu

The following procedure provides the steps required to add any external scripts or applications to the SolarWinds Toolset integration menu. To add a program to the SolarWinds Toolset Integration menu: 1. If you want to add an external script to the Toolset Integration menu, save the script in an appropriate location on the install volume of your Orion server (e.g. <InstallVolume>:\\Scripts\). 2. If you want to add an external application to the Toolset Integration menu, install the application in an appropriate location on the install volume of your Orion server (e.g. <InstallVolume>:\\Application\).
3. Open SWToolset.MenuOptions, the Toolset Integration menu configuration file, in a text editor. Note: By default, SWToolset.MenuOptions is located in the following folder: <InstallVolume>:\\Program Files\SolarWinds\Common\. 4. Save a copy of SWToolset.MenuOptions as SWToolset_Old.MenuOptions. 5. Add the following line between the <MenuOptions></MenuOptions> tags of the SWToolset.MenuOptions file:
<MenuOption Visible="TRUE" Title="ApplicationName" BeginGroup="FALSE" HasSubMenu="FALSE" ExecString="<InstallVolume>:\\Application\ExecutableFile" Icon="" Extra="" Parent="" Required="4"/>
Note: The string supplied for Title is the name for the added script or application that will display in the menu. The string supplied for the ExecString is the path to the script or application executable file. 6. Save the new SWToolset.MenuOptions to automatically update the Toolset Integration menu.
Accessing Nodes Using HTTP, SSH, and Telnet

The Orion Web Console supports the use of HTTP, SSH, and Telnet protocols for remote device access if associated applications like PuTTy and FiSSH on your Orion server are properly registered. For more information, see the MSDN article, Registering an Application to a URL Protocol. Launch remote access applications from any Details view as follows: To browse directly to the viewed device using a web browser, click To open a secure shell (SSH) to a monitored device, click To open a Telnet session with a monitored device, click . . .
Using Integrated Remote Desktop

Sometimes it is necessary to console into a remote server to troubleshoot an issue. This can be accomplished within the Orion Web Console as follows. Note: Press Ctrl+Alt+Break to enter/exit full screen mode. To launch Integrated Remote Desktop: 1. Open the Node Details view for the server you want to view remotely. Note: The easiest way to open the Node Details view is to click the remote server you want to view in any All Nodes resource.
2. Click
, located at the of the Node Details view.
Note: Depending on the security settings of your browser, you may be asked to install an ActiveX control for remote desktop viewing. Follow all prompts to install this required control. 3. Verify the Server IP address or hostname. 4. Select an appropriate Screen Size. 5. Click Connect.
Managing Orion Web Console Configurations

Orion Web Console configurations store all account, menu bar, and view settings The Orion Web Configuration Backup/Restore utility allows you to complete each of the following related tasks: Back up your Orion Web Console configuration. For more information, see Creating a Web Console Configuration Backup on page 142. Restore a web console configuration backup. For more information, see Restoring a Web Console Configuration Backup on page 142. Clear your current Orion Web Console configuration. For more information, see Clearing a Web Console Configuration on page 143.
Creating a Web Console Configuration Backup

The following procedure uses the Orion Web Configuration Backup/Restore utility to create a backup of your Orion Web Console configuration. Note: The Orion Web Configuration Backup/Restore utility does not create a backup of the Orion database. As a result, configuration backups do not retain any of the network device data or statistics for any monitored network objects. For more information about creating a backup of your Orion database, see Managing the Orion Database on page 247. To create an Orion Web Console configuration backup: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Web Configuration Backup. 3. Click Create Backup. 4. Confirm that the Orion folder is open or browse to it, located, by default within <Volume:>\Program Files\Solarwinds\. 5. Provide an appropriate file name and location, and then click Save.
6. Click OK when the web console configuration backup is completed.
Restoring a Web Console Configuration Backup

The following procedure uses the Orion Web Configuration Backup/Restore utility to restore a saved backup of your Orion Web Console configuration. Warning: Do not restore web console configurations from any version of Orion prior to the version currently installed. To restore an Orion Web Console configuration backup: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Web Configuration Backup. 3. In the Restore Web Site Configuration area, select the configuration backup file you want to restore. 4. If you want the restored Orion Web Console configuration to overwrite your current web console configuration, select Overwrite, and then click Restore Backup. 5. If you want the restored Orion Web Console configuration to merge with your current web console configuration, select Merge, and then click Restore Backup. 6. Click Yes to confirm the restoration of the selected configuration backup.
Clearing a Web Console Configuration

The following procedure clears an existing Orion Web Console configuration. Warning: Clearing a web console configuration deletes all existing user accounts, account and view settings, and menu bar customizations. SolarWinds recommends you create a backup of your current Orion Web Console configuration before you clear it to confirm that no issues arise as a result of the deletion of your web console customizations. To clear your Orion Web Console configuration: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Web Configuration Backup. 3. Click File > Clear Web Configuration. 4. Click Yes to confirm the deletion of your current web console configuration. 5. Click OK after the web console configuration is cleared.
Chapter 7
Managing Devices in the Web Console

Managing all the monitored devices on your network is greatly simplified with the Node Management feature of the Orion Web Console. Using this tool, you can easily add and remove devices and quickly view and edit device properties. Any user that has been granted node management rights can directly access the Node Management tool either from any All Nodes resource or through the Orion Website Administration page. For more information about granting node management rights, see Editing User Accounts on page 166. The following sections describe the various functions that allow you to view and manage all your network devices from the Orion Web Console. Note: The Node Management feature is accessible by clicking Manage Nodes either in the header of any All Nodes resource or in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. The All Nodes resource is included on the Orion Summary Home view by default, but you can include it on any other web console view as well. Confirm that the All Nodes resource is available on an appropriate Web Console view before continuing. For more information about adding resources to Orion Web Console views, see Editing Views on page 112.
Adding Devices for Monitoring in the Web Console

The following procedure details the steps required to add a device for monitoring in the Orion Web Console. Note: This procedure does not specifically address the addition of objects that are specifically monitored solely by individual Orion products, as in the case of monitoring interfaces with Orion NPM and monitoring applications with Orion APM. To add a device for monitoring in the Orion Web Console: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Nodes in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Click Add Node on the Node Management toolbar. 5. Provide the hostname or IP Address of the node you want to add in the Hostname or IP Address field.
Managing Devices in the Web Console 145
6. If the IP address of the node you are adding is dynamically assigned, check Dynamic IP Address. 7. If you only want to use ICMP to monitor node status, response time, or packet loss for the added node, check ICMP (Ping only). 8. If you want to add an External node to monitor a hosted application with Orion Application Performance Monitor, check External. Note: The External status is reserved for nodes hosting applications that are to be monitored with Orion Application Performance Monitor. Orion will not collect or monitor any data about a node itself, if it is marked as External,. 9. If you are adding a Cisco UCS Manager, check UCS manager credentials, and then complete the following steps to provide required UCS credentials in the UCS credentials area. a. Provide the Port on which the UCS manager listens for SNMP queries. b. Provide an appropriate User name and a Password to gain access to your UCS device. c. Click Test to confirm the UCS credentials you have provided. 10. If you are adding a VMware device, check Poll for VMware to ensure that Orion NPM acquires any data the Vmware device provides to SNMP polling requests, and then complete the following steps to provide required vCenter or ESX Server credentials. For more information, see Monitoring VMware Devices on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. a. Select an appropriate vCenter or ESX credential. Notes: If you are creating a new credential, select <New Credential>. If you are editing an existing credential, select the credential you want to edit. SolarWinds recommends against using non-alphanumeric characters in VMware credential names.
b. If you are creating a new credential, provide a Credential name. c. Provide an appropriate User name and a Password, and then provide the password again in the Confirm password field. d. Click Test to confirm the VMware credentials you have provided. 11. If you want to use SNMP to monitor the added node, confirm that ICMP (Ping only) is cleared, and then complete the following steps: a. Select the SNMP Version for the added node. Notes:
146 Managing Devices in the Web Console
Orion uses SNMPv2c by default. If the device you are adding supports or requires the enhanced security features of SNMPv3, select SNMPv3. If SNMPv2c is enabled on a device you want Orion to monitor, by default, Orion will attempt to use SNMPv2c to poll for performance information. If you only want Orion to poll using SNMPv1, you must disable SNMPv2c on the device to be polled.
b. If you have installed multiple polling engines, select the Polling Engine you want to use to collect statistics from the added node. Note: This option may not be available if you are only using one polling engine to collect information from your network. c. If the SNMP port on the added node is not the Orion default of 161, provide the actual port number in the SNMP Port field. d. If the added node supports 64-bit counters and you want to use them, check Allow 64-bit counters. Note: Orion fully supports the use of 64-bit counters; however, these high capacity counters can exhibit erratic behavior depending on manufacturer implementation. If you notice peculiar results when using these counters, use the Node Details view to disable the use of 64-bit counters for the device and contact the hardware manufacturer. 12. If you want Orion to use SNMPv2c to monitor the added node, provide valid community strings for the added node. Note: The Read/Write Community String is optional, but Orion does require the public Community String, at minimum, for node monitoring. If you want to use read/write SNMPv3 credentials, complete the following steps in the Read / Write SNMPv3 Credentials area. 13. If you want Orion to use SNMPv3 to monitor the added node, provide the following SNMP Credentials, Authentication, and Privacy/Encryption settings: SNMPv3 Username, Context, Authentication Method, and Password. Note: If this password is a key, check Password is a key. SNMPv3 Privacy/Encryption Method and Password. Note: If this password is a key, check Password is a key. 14. If you want to save the provided credentials as a credential set, provide a Name, and then click Save. 15. If you want to delete a currently saved credential set, select the set to delete, and then click Save.
16. If you are using SNMP to communicate with your added node, click Validate SNMP after entering all credentials to confirm your SNMP settings. 17. Click Next. 18. Check the objects for the added node that you want Orion to monitor or manage. The following options are available in the selection toolbar: Clicking All selects all listed devices and charts for monitoring. Clicking None clears any checked interfaces, volumes, or interface charts that have been selected for monitoring. Clicking All Volumes selects all listed volumes for monitoring.
19. After you have selected objects for monitoring, click Next. 20. If Orion NPM is installed and you want to apply pollers to the added node, click + to expand poller groups, as necessary, check the appropriate pollers, and then click Next. Note: For more information about using predefined pollers or about defining your own universal device pollers, see Monitoring MIBs with Universal Device Pollers in the SolarWinds Orion Network Performance Monitor Administrator Guide. 21. If you want to edit the SNMP settings you provided earlier, change the appropriate values in the SNMP area of the Change Properties page, and then click Validate SNMP to confirm your new settings. 22. If you want to edit the default polling settings for your added node, change the Node Status Polling or Collect Statistics Every values in the Polling area of the Change Properties page, as appropriate. Note: The Node Status Polling value refers to the number of seconds, between the node status checks Orion performs on the added node. The Collect Statistics Every value refers to the period of time between the updates Orion makes to displayed statistics for the added node. 23. If you have defined any custom properties for monitored nodes, provide appropriate values for the added node in the Custom Properties area of the Change Properties page. Note: The Custom Properties area is empty if you have not defined any custom properties for monitored network objects. 24. Click OK, Add Node when you have completed properties configuration. 25. If you have successfully added the node, click OK on the dialog.
Deleting Devices from Monitoring

The following procedure deletes devices from monitoring in the web console.
Warning: Deleting nodes from monitoring in the web console automatically terminates monitoring of all applications, interfaces, and volumes on the deleted nodes. Note: You can select multiple devices to delete at the same time. Additionally, using the search tool above the node list, you can select multiple interfaces on different nodes for simultaneous deletion. To delete devices from monitoring in the Orion Web Console: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console, and then click Manage Nodes in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 3. If you want to delete a node and all its applications, interfaces, and volumes from monitoring, complete the following steps. a. Locate the node to delete using either of the following methods: Use the search tool above the node list to search your Orion database for the node you want to delete. Select an appropriate Group by: criterion, and then click the appropriate group including the node to delete.
b. Check the node to delete in the list, and then click Delete on the toolbar. 4. If you want to delete a monitored application, interface, or volume, use the following steps. a. Locate the element to delete using either of the following methods: Use the search tool above the node list to search your Orion database either for the parent node of the object to delete or for the object itself. Select a Group by: criteria, and then click the appropriate group including the parent node of the object to delete.
b. If you have a list of node results, click + to expand the parent node of the object you want to delete. c. Check the object to delete, and then click Delete on the toolbar. 5. Click OK to confirm deletion.
Viewing Node Data in Tooltips

Node tooltips in Orion provide immediate status overviews of monitored nodes. To view a quick overview of any monitored node in the web console, hover over the device name. The information in the following tables displays immediately. Notes: If Orion NPM is installed, interface data is also available in tooltips,. For more information, see Viewing Interface Data in Orion NPM Tooltips in the SolarWinds Orion Network Performance Monitor Administrator Guide.
Node Data Node Status IP Address Machine Type Average Response Time Packet Loss CPU Load Memory Used Current status of the node. (up, down, warning, unplugged, or unmanaged) The IP address currently assigned to the selected node The vendor icon and vendor description of the selected node The measured average response time of the selected node as of the last node poll The percent of all transmitted packets that are lost by the selected node as of the last node poll The percent of available processing capacity on the selected node that is currently used as of the last node poll The percent of available memory on the selected node that is currently used as of the last node poll
Editing Object Properties

The following procedure provides the steps required to edit monitored object properties using the Node Management utility of the Orion Web Console. To edit object properties in the Orion Web Console: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console, and then click Manage Nodes in the Node & Group Management grouping. 3. Locate the object to edit using either of the following methods: Use the search tool above the node list to search your Orion database for either the object you want to edit or the parent node of the volume you want to edit. Select an appropriate Group by criteria, and then click the appropriate group including either the node to edit or the parent of the object to edit.
4. If you want to edit the properties of a monitored node, check the node you want to edit, and then click Edit Properties.
5. If you want to edit the properties of a monitored object, click + next to the parent node of the object you want to edit, check the object you want to edit, and then click Edit Properties. 6. If you are editing the SNMP properties of a node, click Test after providing new settings to confirm they are valid for the edited node. 7. If the selected node is a VMware ESX Server and you want to poll it for data using the VMware API, Confirm that Poll for VMware is checked. 8. If you want to poll for ESX data using an existing ESX credential, select the appropriate credential from the VMware credentials dropdown menu. 9. If you want to poll for ESX data using a new ESX credential, complete the following steps: a. Select <New Credential> in the Choose Credential dropdown menu, and then provide a new credential name in the Credential Name field. Note: SolarWinds recommends against using non-alphanumeric characters in VMware credential names. b. Add the credential User name and Password, as necessary. c. Confirm the password, and then click Validate VMware to confirm the credentials you have provided are valid for the edited node. 10. Edit additional device properties as needed, and then click Submit.
Promoting a Node from ICMP to SNMP Monitoring

After adding a node to the Orion database as an ICMP only node, you may need to promote the node to SNMP to start collecting additional statistics. the Node Management utility of the Orion Web Console can easily promote your node to SNMP without any loss of historical data. To promote an ICMP only node to SNMP: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. and then click Manage Nodes in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 3. Locate the device to promote using either of the following methods: Use the search tool above the node list to search your Orion database for the node you want to promote. Select an appropriate Group by criteria, and then click the appropriate group including the node to promote.
4. Click Edit Properties, and then clear ICMP (Ping only). 5. In the SNMP area, select the SNMP Version for the promoted node. Note: Orion uses SNMPv2c by default. If the promoted device supports or requires the enhanced security features of SNMPv3, select SNMPv3. 6. If you have installed multiple polling engines, select the Polling Engine you want to use to collect statistics from the added node. Note: This option may not be available if you are only using one polling engine to collect information from your network. 7. If the SNMP port on the added node is not the Orion default of 161, provide the actual port number in the SNMP Port field. 8. If the added node supports 64 bit counters and you want to use them, check Allow 64 bit counters. Note: Orion fully supports the use of 64-bit counters; however, these high capacity counters can exhibit erratic behavior depending how they are used. If you notice peculiar results when using these counters, use the Edit Properties view to disable the use of 64-bit counters on the device in question, and then contact the hardware manufacturer. 9. If you want to use SNMPv2c to monitor the promoted node, provide valid community strings for the added node. Note: The Read/Write Community String is optional, but Orion does require the public Community String, at minimum, for node monitoring. 10. If you want to use SNMPv3 to monitor the promoted node, provide the following SNMPv3 credential settings: SNMPv3 Username and Context SNMPv3 Authentication Method and Password/Key SNMPv3 Privacy/Encryption Method and Password/Key
Note: Read/Write SNMPv3 Credentials are optional, but the public Community String is required, at a minimum, for node monitoring. 11. If you want to edit an existing SNMPv3 credential set, select the name of your set from the Saved Credential Sets list, and then edit the stored settings.. 12. If you want save the provided SNMPv3 credentials as a credential set, provide a Name for your new credential set, and then click Save. 13. Click Validate SNMP after entering all required credentials to confirm your SNMP settings.
14. If you want to change the default polling settings for your promoted node, edit the Node Status Polling or Collect Statistics Every values in the Polling area, as appropriate. Note: The Node Status Polling value refers to the period of time, in seconds, between the node status checks Orion performs on the promoted node. The Collect Statistics Every value refers to the period of time between updates Orion makes to displayed statistics for the promoted node. 15. If you have defined any custom properties for monitored nodes, provide appropriate values for the promoted node in the Custom Properties. 16. Click Submit when you have completed properties configuration for your promoted node. 17. If you have successfully added the node, click OK on the dialog.
Viewing Node Resources

The List Resources feature of the Orion Web Console Node Management utility allows you to immediately see all monitored interfaces, volumes, and interface charts on a selected node, as shown in the following procedure. To view a list of all resources present on a node: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Nodes in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Locate the node to view using either of the following methods: Use the search tool above the node list to search your Orion database for the node you want to view. Select an appropriate Group by criteria, and then click the appropriate group including the node to view.
5. Check the node you want to view from the list, and then click List Resources on the Node Management toolbar.
Setting Device Management States

Monitored devices are regularly polled for operational status. Collected statistics are displayed in the Orion Web Console. Using the Node Management feature of the Orion Web Console, the management status of monitored nodes, is easily set or changed, allowing you to either temporarily suspend data collection or resume polling and statistics collection, as necessary. The following procedure sets or changes management states for monitored nodes in the Orion Web Console.
Note: Setting a node to an unmanaged state automatically suspends the management of all interfaces and volumes on the selected node. To set or change the management state of a node: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Nodes in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Locate the node to manage using either of the following methods: Use the search tool above the node list to search your Orion database for the device you want to manage. Select an appropriate Group by criteria, and then click the appropriate group including the node to manage.
5. Check the node to change, and then click Unmanage or Remanage, as appropriate, for the selected node. 6. If you have selected Unmanage, provide start and end times and dates for your management suspension, and then click OK.
Unscheduled Device Polling and Rediscovery

Orion polls devices for statistics and status regularly, according to the polling settings available for configuration on the Polling Settings view in the Orion Web Console. For more information, see Orion Polling Settings on page 173. Sometimes, however, it may be necessary to conduct an unscheduled poll or rediscovery of a monitored device. The Node Management utility gives you this ability, as shown in the following procedure. To perform an unscheduled poll or rediscovery: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Nodes in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Locate and check the node or interface you want to poll or locate and check the node to rediscover, using either of the following methods: Use the search tool above the node list to search your Orion database. Select an appropriate Group by criteria, and then click the appropriate group including either the node or interface you want to poll or the node you want to rediscover.
5. If you want to poll the selected node or interface, click More Actions > Poll Now. 6. If you want to rediscover the selected node, click More Actions > Rediscover.
Monitoring Windows Server Memory

When Orion polls a Windows server for CPU load and memory utilization, it pulls the amount of physical memory to define the 100% level, and then it totals the amount of memory in use by each allocation to compute what percentage of the physical memory is in use. This can result in memory utilization readings over 100%, as many applications pre-allocate memory and swap before it is actually needed. To work around this, you can also add physical memory as a volume for these servers within Orion. When monitored as a volume, the values will be more in line with your expectations.
Scheduling a Node Maintenance Mode Time Period

When you need to perform maintenance on a node or its components, such as upgrading firmware, installing new software, or updating security, you may want to discontinue polling while the device is down for maintenance. Disabling polling, or setting a node status as Unmanaged, while performing node maintenance, maintains the accuracy of your data and prevents unnecessary alert messages. For more information about disabling node polling to perform node maintenance, see Setting Device Management States on page 153.
Chapter 8
Managing Groups and Dependencies

Dependencies and groups enable you to more effectively manage your network. Groups give you the ability to logically organize monitored objects, regardless of device type or location, and dependencies allow you to more faithfully represent what can actually be known about your network, eliminating false positive alert triggers and providing more accurate insight into the status of your monitored network objects.
Managing Groups
Groups contain Orion objects that report a status such as nodes, volumes, applications, interfaces, and even other groups. You create, delete, and modify groups from the Manage Groups page. Note: Nesting a group within another does not create a strict parent/child relationship. You can include any group as a member in any number of other groups. To access the Manage Groups page: 1. Log on to the Orion Web Console. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Groups in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page.
Creating Groups
Creating a group is a straightforward process of selecting the Orion objects you want the group to contain. At creation time, you can also decide how you want SolarWinds Orion to roll up the status of the group members. It is also possible to specify group members on the basis of shared properties by adding them with a dynamic query. Orion objects added through dynamic queries are automatically added or removed from the group. To create a new group: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console.
Managing Groups and Dependencies 157
3. Click Manage Groups in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Click Add New Group. 5. Enter a name for the group in the Name field. 6. Expand Advanced. 7. If you want the group to roll up the worst status of the group members, select Show Worst Status. 8. If you want the group to roll up the best status of the group members, select Show Best Status. 9. If you want the group to display a warning status if the group members have a mixture of different statuses, select Mixed Status shows warning. 10. Click Next. 11. If you want to individually select group members, follow these steps: a. In the Show Only list, select the type of Orion object you want to add as a group member. b. Check the checkbox of the Orion object and then click Add to Group. 12. If you want to dynamically select group members based on shared properties, follow these steps: a. Click Add dynamic query. b. Type a name for the query in the Dynamic query object name field. c. Select an Orion object type in the Orion Object is list. d. Click Add Condition to specify further selection properties. e. Click Preview to verify that the dynamic query is selecting your intended objects. f. Click Save. 13. Continue adding individual Orion objects or dynamic queries until you have finished building your group. 14. Click Create Group.
Editing Existing Groups

You can edit the properties of an existing group or add and remove objects. These are separate editing tasks. To edit properties of an existing group:
158 Managing Groups and Dependencies
1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Groups in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Check the group you want to edit, and then click Edit Properties. To add and remove the objects of an existing group: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Groups in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Check the group you want to edit, and then click Add & Remove Objects.
Deleting Groups
Deleting an existing dependency is a straightforward process, as shown in the following procedure. To delete a group: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Groups in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Check the group you want to delete, and then click Delete.
Managing Dependencies
Dependencies in Orion allow you to accurately account for topological constraints on your network. These constraints may be either the result of the design of a specific device, as in the case of interfaces on a switch or router, or the result of the physical architecture of your network itself. Orion offers an Unreachable status to account for the case when a device may appear to be down when its status is actually indeterminate, due to another device being down or unresponsive. For example, in the case of a typical switch monitored by Orion NPM, when the switch itself goes down or becomes unresponsive, all interfaces on the switch will also be unresponsive, even though they may functioning perfectly well. By default, in Orion NPM these child interfaces display as Unreachable because their parent node is reporting as down.
Likewise, Orion also makes it possible to define dependencies among distinct devices, as in the case of a subnet of devices in one area of your network that are dependent on a single WAN link to maintain connectivity with the rest of your network. In this case, if you have defined a group consisting of the devices in this dependent subnet, you can then define a dependency where the dependent subnet is a child group to the parent router that is serving as the WAN link to the rest of your network. For more information about using groups, see Managing Groups on page 157. The power of dependencies becomes evident when considering alerts. If you have an alert configured to trigger when a monitored object is down, you only want that alert to trigger if a monitored objects is positively down. In other words, you do not want an down object alert to trigger for an object that is not actually down. Without dependencies, all monitored objects on a monitored node that is unresponsive to ICMP queries will also report as down. With dependencies in use, these child objects will instead display as Unreachable, saving you the hassle of sorting through numerous false alerts resulting from the failure of a single node to respond promptly to a status query.
Creating a New Dependency

Creating a new dependency is a straightforward process of selecting the parent and children objects, as shown in the following procedure. To create a new dependency: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Dependencies in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Click Add new dependency. 5. On the Select Parent page of the Add New Dependency wizard, complete the following steps: a. Use the Show only: and Group by: selection fields to customize the list of displayed objects and groups. Note: The properties listed in the Group by selection field are dynamic. b. Select the parent object or group in the main pane, and then click Next. Note: If you want to define a dependency so that the reported states of child objects are dependent on the status of multiple parent objects, create a group including all parent objects, and then select it on this view. For more information, see Creating Groups on page 157.
6. On the Choose Child page of the Add New Dependency wizard, complete the following steps: a. Edit the Dependency name, as appropriate. b. Use the Show only: and Group by: selection fields to customize the list of displayed objects and groups. Note: Properties listed in the Group by: selection field are dynamically dependent on the selection in the Show only: field. c. Select the child object or group in the main pane, and then click Next. Note: If you want to define a dependency so that the reported states of multiple child objects are dependent on the status one or more parent objects, create a group including all child objects, and then select it on this view. For more information, see Creating Groups on page 157. 7. On the Review Dependency view, review the current settings for the configured dependency. Notes: If any advanced alerts are configured on parent or child objects, they will be listed on this view. Click + to expand alert details. In the event that a parent object is down, all alerts configured on any child objects in a dependency on the down parent object are automatically suppressed.
8. Click Submit to accept the dependency definition.
Editing an Existing Dependency

Editing an existing dependency is a straightforward process, as shown in the following procedure. To edit an existing dependency: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Dependencies in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Check the dependency you want to edit, and then click Edit.
5. On the Select Parent page of the Edit Dependency wizard, complete the following steps: a. Use the Show only: and Group by: selection fields to customize the list of displayed objects and groups. Note: Properties listed in the Group by: selection field are dynamically dependent on the selection in the Show only: field. b. Select the parent object or group in the main pane, and then click Next. Note: If you want to define a dependency so that the reported states of child objects are dependent on the status of multiple parent objects, create a group including all parent objects, and then select it on this view. For more information, see Creating Groups on page 157. 6. On the Choose Child page of the Edit Dependency wizard, complete the following steps: a. Edit the Dependency name, as appropriate. b. Use the Show only: and Group by: selection fields to customize the list of displayed objects and groups. Note: Properties listed in the Group by: selection field are dynamically dependent on the selection in the Show only: field. c. Select the child object or group in the main pane, and then click Next. Note: If you want to define a dependency so that the reported states of multiple child objects are dependent on the status one or more parent objects, create a group including all child objects, and then select it on this view. For more information, see Creating Groups on page 157. 7. On the Review Dependency view, review the current settings for the configured dependency. Notes: If any advanced alerts are configured on parent or child objects, they will be listed on this view. Click + to expand alert details. In the event that a parent object is down, all alerts configured on any child objects in a dependency on the down parent object are automatically suppressed.
8. Click Submit to accept the dependency definition.
Deleting an Existing Dependency

Deleting an existing dependency is a straightforward process, as shown in the following procedure.
To delete an existing dependency: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Dependencies in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Check the dependency you want to delete, and then click Delete. 5. Click Yes to confirm deletion of the selected dependency.
Viewing Alerts on Child Objects

In the event that a parent object is down, all advanced alerts configured on any child objects in a dependency on the down parent object are automatically suppressed. The following procedure displays all advanced alerts currently configured on any child objects in a selected dependency. To view alerts on child objects in a selected dependency: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Manage Dependencies in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Check the dependency that includes the child object on which the alerts you want to view are configured, and then click Alerts on Child.
Chapter 9
Managing Web Accounts

Orion Web Console user accounts, permissions, and views are established and maintained with the Orion Account Manager. When Advanced Customization is enabled on the Orion Website Settings page, you can use Account Manager to customize menu bars and views for different users. For more information about Orion Website Settings and Advanced Customization, see Orion Web Console and Chart Settings on page 131. Notes: This guide assumes that Advanced Customization has been enabled. If it has not been enabled, the range of options available on the pages referenced in the following sections is much more limited. For more information, see Orion Website Administration on page 104. To prevent issues with web console accounts, your SQL Server should not be configured with the no count connection option enabled. The no count option is set in the Default connection options area of the Server Properties > Connections window of SQL Server Management Studio
Creating New Accounts

New Orion Web Console user accounts may be created by any web console administrator. The following procedure creates a new web console user account. To create a new user account: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console, and then click Account Manager in the Accounts grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 3. Click Add. 4. Type a new User Name and Password. 5. Confirm the password, and then click Submit. When the new account is created, the Edit User Account view displays, showing all configurable account options. For more information about editing account settings, see Editing User Accounts on page 166. Note: For more information about using Windows Pass-through security and DirectLink accounts for automatic login to the Orion Web Console, see Configuring Automatic Login on page Error! Bookmark not defined..
Managing Web Accounts 165
Editing User Accounts

The Edit User Account page provides options for configuring web console user accounts. On the Edit User Account page, administrators can disable an account, set an account expiration date, grant administrator and node management rights, set user view limitations, define a default menu bar, and set several other defaults defining how a user account views and uses the Orion Web Console. The following sections and procedures detail the configuration of user accounts. Note: To reset a password, click Change Password at the bottom of the page.
User Account Access Settings

The following procedure is a guide to setting user account access. To edit a user account: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Account Manager in the Accounts grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Select the account that you want to edit, and then click Edit. 5. Set Account Enabled to Yes or No, as appropriate. Note: Accounts are enabled by default, and disabling an account does not delete it. Account definitions and details are stored in the Orion database in the event that the account is enabled at a later time. 6. If you want the account to expire on a certain date, click Browse () next to the Account Expires field, and then select the account expiration date using the calendar tool. Note: By default, accounts are set to Never expire. Dates may be entered in any format, and they will conform to the local settings on your computer. 7. If you want to allow the user to remain logged-in indefinitely, select Yes for the Disable Session Timeout option. Note: By default, for added security, new user accounts are configured to timeout automatically. 8. If you want to grant administrator rights to the selected account, set Allow Administrator Rights to Yes. Notes: Granting administrator rights does not also assign the Admin menu bar to a user. If the user requires access to Admin options, they must be
166 Managing Web Accounts
assigned the Admin view. For more information, see Setting Default Account Menu Bars and Views on page 169. Administrator rights are not granted by default, but they are required to create, delete, and edit accounts. User accounts without administrator rights cannot access Admin page information.
9. If you want to allow the user to manage nodes directly from the Orion Web Console, set Allow Node Management Rights to Yes. Note: By default, node management rights are not granted. For more information about node management in the Orion Web Console, see Managing Devices in the Web Console on page 145. 10. If you want to allow the user to customize views, set Allow Account to Customize Views to Yes. Note: By default, customized view creation is not allowed. Changes made to a view are seen by all other users that have been assigned the same view. 11. Designate whether or not to Allow Account to Clear Events and Acknowledge Alerts. 12. Select whether or not to Allow Browser Integration. Note: Browser integration can provide additional functionality, including access to right-click menu options, depending on client browser capabilities. 13. If you want to enable audible alerts through the client browser, select a sound from the Alert Sound list. Note: By default, sounds are stored in the Sounds directory, located at C:\Inetpub\SolarWinds\NetPerfMon\Sounds. Sounds in .wav format that
are added to this directory become available as soon as the Edit User Account page refreshes. 14. Provide the maximum Number of items in the breadcrumb list.
Note: If this value is set to 0, all available items are shown in breadcrumb dropdown lists.
Setting Account Limitations

Account limitations may be used to restrict user access to designated network areas or to withhold certain types of information from designated users. The following procedure sets user account limitations. To set user account limitations: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console.
3. Click Account Manager in the Accounts grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Select the account that you want to limit, and then click Edit. 5. Click Add Limitation in the Account Limitations section. 6. Select the type of limitation to apply from the list, and then click Continue. Notes: Account limitations defined using the Account Limitation Builder display as options on the Select Limitation page. Account limitations can be defined and set using almost any custom properties. For more information, see Creating Account Limitations on page 245. Because Orion NetFlow Traffic Analyzer initially caches account limitations, it may take up to a minute for account limitations related to Orion NetFlow Traffic Analyzer to take effect in Orion NetFlow Traffic Analyzer.
7. Define the limitation as directed on the Configure Limitation page that follows. For more information about defining pattern-type limitations, see Defining Pattern Limitations on page 168.
Defining Pattern Limitations

Pattern limitations may be defined using OR, AND, EXCEPT, and NOT operators with _ and * as wildcard characters. The following examples show how to use available operators and wildcard characters: Note: Patterns are not case sensitive.
foo matches only objects named "foo". foo_ matches all objects with names consisting of the string "foo" followed by only one additional character, like foot or food, but not seafood or football. foo* matches all objects with names starting with the string "foo", like football or food, but not seafood. *foo* matches all objects with names containing the string "foo", like seafood or Bigfoot. *foo* OR *soc* matches all objects containing either the string "foo" or the string "soc", including football, socks, soccer, and food. *foo* AND *ball* matches all objects containing both the string "foo" and the string "ball", including football but excluding food.
*foo* NOT *ball* matches all objects containing the string "foo" that do not also contain the string "ball", including food but excluding football. *foo* EXCEPT *ball* matches all objects containing the string "foo" that do not also contain the string "ball", including food but excluding football.
You may also group operators using parentheses, as in the following example.
(*foo* EXCEPT *b*) AND (*all* OR *sea*) matches seafood and footfall, but not football or Bigfoot.
Setting Default Account Menu Bars and Views

The Default Menu Bar and Views section provides several options for configuring the default menu bar and views for your user account. The following procedure is a guide to setting these options. To set default menu bar and view options: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Account Manager in the Accounts grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Select the account that you want to configure, and then click Edit. 5. Scroll down to Default Menu Bar and Views. 6. Select a Home Tab Menu Bar from the available list. Note: This is the default menu bar displayed when you click Home in the Orion Web Console. If you are editing a user account that must have administrator privileges, set the Home Tab Menu Bar to Admin. 7. Select a Network Tab Menu Bar from the available list. Note: This is the default menu bar displayed when you click Network in the Orion Web Console. If you are editing a user account that must have administrator privileges, select Network_Admin. 8. Select a Home Page View. Note: If no Home Page View is specified, the default is designated to be the same as the page that is specified in the Default Summary View field below. 9. If the Home Page View you have selected refers to a specific network device, select a Default Network Device by clicking Edit and selecting from the list of available devices on the next page. Note: If the Home Page View you have selected does not require a specific network device, Orion will select a device to display, automatically.
10. Select a Default Summary View for the account. Note: This is typically the same as the Home Page View. 11. If you want all reports to be available for the account, select \Reports from the Report folder list in the Default Menu Bars and Views area. Note: If you are creating a new user, you must designate the Report Folder the new account is to use to access Orion reports. By default, no report folder is configured for new users.The Reports directory is located in the Orion installation directory: C:\Program Files\SolarWinds\Orion\. 12. If you want to designate default Node and Volume Details Views for this account, expand Accounts Orion General Settings, and then select both an appropriate Node Detail View and an appropriate Volume Details View. 13. If you want to designate a default Interface Details View for this account, expand Accounts Network Performance Monitor Settings, and then select an appropriate Interface Details View. 14. Click Submit.
Configuring an Account Report Folder

Reports may be assigned to an account by creating sub-directories within the Reports directory. Desired reports are included within the sub-directory, and the sub-directories are then made available for assignment to an account. This provides a level of security when reports are included in a view or added as custom menu items. For more information, see Creating and Editing External Website Views on page 127. To configure an account report folder: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Account Manager in the Accounts grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Select the account you want to configure, and then click Edit. 5. If you want all reports to be available for the account, select \Reports from the Report folder list in the Default Menu Bars and Views area. Note: If you are creating a new user, you must designate the Report Folder the new account is to use to access Orion reports. By default, no report folder is configured for new users.The Reports directory is located in the Orion installation directory: C:\Program Files\SolarWinds\Orion\. 6. Click Submit.
Configuring Audible Web Alerts

When browsing the Orion Web Console, audible alerts can be sounded whenever new alerts are generated. When enabled, you will receive an audible alert the first time, after login, that an alert is displayed on the page. This alert may come from either an alert resource or the Alerts view. You will not receive audible alerts if the Alerts view or the alert resource you are viewing is empty. Following the initial alert sound, you will receive an audible alert every time an alert is encountered that was triggered later than the latest alert that has already been viewed. For example, a user logs in and sees a group of alerts with trigger times ranging from 9:01AM to 9:25AM, and the user receives an audible alert. If the user browses to a new page or allows the current page to auto-refresh, a new alert sounds if and only if an alert triggered later than 9:25AM is then displayed. To enable audible web alerts: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Account Manager in the Accounts grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 4. Select the account you want to configure. 5. Click Edit. 6. Select the sound file you want to play when new alerts arrive from the Alert Sound list. Note: By default, sounds are stored in the Sounds directory, located at C:\Inetpub\SolarWinds\NetPerfMon\Sounds. Sounds in .wav format that are added to this directory become available as soon as the Edit User Account page refreshes. 7. Click Submit.
Chapter 10
Managing Orion Polling Engines

To ensure that your polling engines are optimized to run at peak performance, you will need to occasionally tune them. If you use more than one polling engine, you will need to balance the load so that each engine can perform optimally.
Viewing Polling Engine Status in the Web Console

The Orion Web Console provides the Polling Engines view, giving you immediate insight into the performance of all polling engines in your Orion installation. To display the Polling Engine view: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Polling Engines in the Details group. For more information about configuring the settings on this view in addition to configuring all other available polling engine variables, see Configuring Polling Engine Settings on page 173.
Configuring Polling Engine Settings

Settings for your Orion polling engine are configured on the Orion Polling Settings view within the Orion Web Console. To open the Orion Polling Settings view: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 2. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 3. Click Polling Settings in the Settings group. The following section provides descriptions of the settings configurable on the Orion Polling Settings view.
Orion Polling Settings

The following poller settings are configurable on the Orion Polling Settings view. Note: Depending on the Orion products and modules you have installed, additional Polling Settings may be available. For more information about any additional polling settings, see the Administrator Guide for your Orion product.
Monitoring Network Events 173
Polling Intervals
The following settings configure default polling intervals. To apply poller settings, click Re-Apply Polling Intervals to all Nodes, Interface, and Volumes. Default Node Poll Interval Devices are regularly polled to determine status and response time on this designated interval. By default, this interval is 120 seconds. Default Volume Poll Interval Volumes are regularly polled to determine status and response time on this designated interval. By default, this interval is 120 seconds. Default Rediscovery Interval Your entire network is polled on this interval to detect any re-indexed interfaces. Monitored network devices are also checked for IOS upgrades permitting EnergyWise support. By default, this interval is 30 minutes. Lock custom values This option is enabled by default. Enabling this option automatically saves any polling customizations made on the Orion Polling Settings view.
Polling Statistics Intervals

The following settings configure default polling intervals for device statistics. To apply poller settings, click Re-Apply Polling Statistic Intervals to all Nodes, Interface, and Volumes. Default Node Statistics Poll Interval Device performance statistics are regularly polled on this interval. By default, this interval is 10 minutes. Default Volume Statistics Poll Interval Volume performance statistics are regularly polled on this interval. By default, this interval is 15 minutes.
Database Settings
The following options configure Orion database maintenance and retention settings. Note: Changes to database maintenance and retention settings do not take effect until the SolarWinds Network Performance Monitor service is restarted. Archive Time
174 Monitoring Network Events
The Archive Time is the time of day when Orion database maintenance occurs. For more information, see Database Maintenance on page 257. Detailed Statistics Retention All statistics collected on any basis shorter than 1 hour are summarized into hourly statistics after the period of time designated as the Detailed Statistics Retention period. By default, this period is 7 days. Hourly Statistics Retention All statistics collected on any basis shorter than 1 day but longer than 1 hour are summarized into daily statistics after the period of time designated as the Hourly Statistics Retention period. By default, this period is 30 days. Daily Statistics Retention All statistics in the Orion database that are collected on a daily basis are kept for this designated period of time. By default, this period is 365 days. Events Retention All network events data is deleted from the Orion database after the period of time designated by the Events Retention has passed after the event ending time. By default, this period is 30 days. Syslog Messages Retention All received Syslog messages are kept for the period of time designated. By default, this period is 7 days. Trap Messages Retention All received trap messages are kept for the period of time designated. By default, this period is 30 days. Max Alert Execution Time If it takes longer than the value specified here for an alert to execute, Orion will disable the alert. Alert execution time includes the amount of time required to trigger any configured alert actions. Discovery Retention All configured discovery profiles are kept for the period of time designated. By default, this period is 60 days. For more information about discovery profiles, see Discovering and Adding Network Devices on page 90.
Network
The following settings configure ICMP and SNMP requests.
ICMP Timeout All ICMP (ping) requests made by the Orion poller time out if a response is not received within the period designated. By default, this period is 2500ms. ICMP Data This string is included within all ICMP packets sent by Orion. SNMP Timeout All SNMP requests made by the Orion poller time out if a response is not received within the period designated. By default, this period is 2500ms. SNMP Retries If a response to an SNMP poll request made by the Orion poller is not received within the configured SNMP Timeout, the Orion poller will conduct as many retries as designated by this value. By default, this value is 2. ESX API Timeout All VMware ESX API requests made by the Orion poller time out if a response is not received within the period designated. By default, this period is 30000ms. For more information about VMware ESX polling, see Monitoring VMware Devices on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. UCS API Timeout All UCS API requests made by the Orion poller time out if a response is not received within the period designated. By default, this period is 240 seconds. Perform reverse DNS lookup If you want Orion to perform reverse DNS lookups on monitored DHCP nodes, confirm that this option is checked. By default, reverse DNS lookup for DHCP nodes is enabled.
Calculations & Thresholds

The following settings designate methods for calculating availability and transmission rate baselines, select the Orion node warning level and counter type, and indicate security preferences for community strings and other potentially sensitive information in the web console. Availability Calculation (advanced) This setting designates the type of calculation Orion performs to determine device availability. For more information, see Calculating Node Availability on page 177. Baseline Calculation (advanced)
Upon startup, Orion can calculate a baseline for the transmission rates of the various elements of your network. This baseline is used as a starting point for any comparison statistics. For more information, see Calculating a Baseline on page 178. Allow Secure Data on Web (advanced) In the interest of security, sensitive information about your network is not viewable in the Orion Web Console. However, if your network is properly secured, you may check this option to allow the viewing of community strings and other potentially sensitive information within the web console. Note: This setting does not affect the display of custom reports that you export to the web. For more information see Creating and Viewing Reports on page 219. Node Warning Level Devices that do not respond to polling within this designated period of time display as Down in the web console. By default, this value is 120 seconds. Counter Rollover This option sets the type of counter Orion is to use. For more information, see Handling Counter Rollovers on page 108.
Calculating Node Availability

The Availability Calculation setting on the Orion Polling Settings view provides a choice between the following two methods for determining device availability. Node Status: The default method is based upon the historical up or down status of the selected node. The selected node is polled for status on the Default Node Poll Interval defined on the Orion Polling Settings view. For more information, see Orion Polling Settings on page 173. If the selected node responds to a ping within the default interval, the node is considered up, and a value of 100 is recorded in the Response Time table of the Orion database. If the node does not respond to a ping within the default interval, the node is considered down and a value of 0 is recorded in the Response Time table of the Orion database. To calculate node availability over a selected time period, the sum of all Response Time table records for the selected node over the selected time period is divided by the selected time period, providing an average availability over the selected time period.
Percent Packet Loss: The second method is a more complicated calculation that effectively bases the availability of a selected node on its packet loss percentage. As in the Node Status method, the selected node is polled for status. If it responds within the Default Node Poll Interval defined on the Orion Polling Settings view, a value of 100 is averaged with the previous 10 availability records. For more information, see Orion Polling Settings on page 173. The result of the Percent Packet Loss calculation is a sliding-window average. To calculate node availability over a selected time period, the sum of all results in the Response Time table for the selected node over the selected time period is divided by the selected time period, providing an average availability over time. Note: The Percent Packet Loss method introduces a historical dependency into each availability node record. In general, it is best to leave calculations based on Node Status unless you specifically need node availability based on packet loss.
Calculating a Baseline
On a new install or after a shutdown, when the SolarWinds Network Performance Monitor service starts, there is no current network data in your Orion database. In this situation, by default, Orion calculates a baseline for the transmission rates of the various elements of your network. To calculate this baseline, all network resources are polled immediately upon startup, and then, as soon as the initial poll is complete, the network is polled again. The resulting two sets of data are used to calculate a nearly instant baseline view of your network performance. If you do not need statistics immediately, or if you do not want Orion to calculate a baseline at startup, disable baseline calculation at startup by setting the Baseline Calculation option on the Orion Polling Settings view to False. For more information, see Configuring Polling Engine Settings on page 173. Note: Baseline calculation requires significant data gathering and processing. Until baseline calculation is completed, both Orion server performance and the CPU performance of some of network routers may be adversely affected.
Setting the Node Warning Interval

A device may drop packets or fail to respond to a poll for many reasons. Should the device fail to respond, the device status is changed from Up to Warning. On the Node Warning Interval tab, you specify how long it will remain in the Warning status before it is marked as Down. During the interval specified, the service performs "fast polling" to continually check the node status. Notes:
To reduce the amount of packet loss reported by Orion, configure the polling engine to retry ICMP pings a specific number of times before reporting packet loss. To do this, add the string value: Response Time Retry Count to the Windows Registry in the Settings folder of: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/SolarWinds.Net/SWNetPerfMon/. Set the value data to the number of retries you prefer. You may see events or receive alerts for down nodes that are not actually down. This can be caused by intermittent packet loss on the network. Set the Node Warning Interval to a higher value to avoid these false notifications.
Using the Polling Engine Load Balancer

The Polling Engine Load Balancer is a useful tool for reassigning nodes to a new polling engine, deleting an unused polling engine, and performing load balancing between multiple polling engines. The tool is available within the Monitor Polling Engines application, which is an advanced feature of Orion. Reassigning nodes to new polling engines may be required in the following situations: Moving or renaming your Orion server Merging two or more Orion servers
If these or any other conditions present the need for reassignment, complete the following procedure to reassign nodes to a new polling engine. To reassign nodes to a different polling engine: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Orion Service Manager. 2. Click Shutdown Everything. Note: Confirm that you stop the SolarWinds Network Performance Monitor Service on all polling engines. 3. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Monitor Polling Engines. 4. Click Servers > Poller Load Balancing. 5. Select the nodes you want to reassign. Note: Use Shift + click to highlight multiple consecutive rows, and use Ctrl + click to highlight multiple non-consecutive rows. 6. Click Polling Engines > Move Selected Nodes to *, substituting the target polling engine for *. The node is reassigned, and it reflects the name of the polling engine in the polling engine column.
7. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Orion Service Manager to restart Orion services.
Chapter 11
Monitoring Network Events in the Web Console

Orion automatically logs all events that occur to any monitored devices on your network. These events are then displayed in the Orion Web Console, so you can view and acknowledge them as your network management policies require.
Viewing Event Details in the Web Console

Orion logs network events and lists them in the readily customizable Events view of the Web Console. Events are shown in order of occurrence, and they may be viewed by device, date and time, and event or device type. Note: The Network Event Log is maintained as part of the Nightly Database Maintenance plan defined within the Database Settings area of the Orion Polling Setting page in the Orion Web Console. Records are kept for the number of days specified Events Retention field (the default is 30 days). For more information, see Orion Polling Settings on page 173. To view event details in the Web Console: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Log in to the Orion Web Console, and then click Events in the Views toolbar. 3. If you want to filter your events view by object, select the Network Object or Type of Device to which you want to limit your view in the Filter Devices area. 4. If you want to limit your events view to show only events of a specific type, select the appropriate Event Type in the Filter Events area. 5. If you only want to see events from a specific period of time, complete either of the following options: Select a predefined period from the Time Period menu. Select Custom from the Time Period menu, and then click the appropriate fields to provide Begin and End dates and times.
6. In the Show X Events field, provide the maximum number of events you want to view. 7. If you want to show all events, including events that have already been cleared, check Show Cleared Events. 8. Click Refresh to complete your events view configuration.
Acknowledging Events in the Web Console

Acknowledging network events is straightforward in the Web Console, as shown in the following procedure. To acknowledge events in the Web Console: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Log in to the Orion Web Console, and then click Events in the Views toolbar. 3. Provide appropriate filter criteria for the displayed events. For more information, see Viewing Event Details in the Web Console on page 181. 4. Click Refresh to ensure that all selected view criteria take effect. 5. Check individual events to acknowledge or click Select All. 6. Click Clear Selected Events.
Chapter 12
Using Orion Advanced Alerts

Alerts are generated for network events, and they may be triggered by the simple occurrence of an event or by the crossing of a threshold value for a monitored Interface, Volume, or Node. Alerts can be set to notify different people on different days, different times of the day, different people for different events, or any combination of times, events, and people. Alerts may be configured to notify the people who need to know about the emergent event by several mediums, including: Sending an e-mail or page Playing a sound on the Orion Network Performance Monitor server Logging the alert details to a file Logging the alert details to the Windows Event Log Sending a Syslog message Executing an external program Executing a Visual Basic script E-mailing a web page Changing the value of a interface or node property Playing a text to speech output Sending a Windows Net Message Dialing a paging or SMS service Sending an SNMP trap Posting a URL to a web server
Creating and Configuring Advanced Alerts

Orion allows you to configure advanced alerts with the following features: Sustained state trigger and reset conditions Multiple condition matching Automatic alert escalation Separate actions for triggers and resets
Creating and Configuring Advanced Alerts 183
Advanced alerts are configured using the Advanced Alert Manager, as shown in the following section. Note: If you want to configure advanced alert features, such as timed alert checking, delayed alert triggering, timed alert resets, or alert suppression, check Show Advanced Features at the lower left of any Advanced Alert windows. For the purposes of this document, Show Advanced Features is always enabled.
Creating a New Advanced Alert

The following procedure creates a new advanced alert. To create a new advanced alert: 1. Click Start > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Configure Alerts. 3. Click New. The Edit Alert window displays, providing an array of configurable alerting options, including trigger and reset conditions, suppressions, and date and time limitations. The following sections provide more information about configuring alert options.
Naming, Describing, and Enabling an Advanced Alert

Use the following steps, after clicking New, Copy, or Edit from the Manage Alerts Window, to name and describe an advanced alert. To name and describe an advanced alert: 1. Click Start > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Configure Alerts. 3. Click New or select an alert from the list, and then click Copy or Edit, as appropriate. 4. Click General, and type the name of your alert in the Name of Alert field. 5. Type a description of your alert in the description field, and then check Enable this Alert. 6. Type the Alert Evaluation Frequency and select Seconds, Minutes, or Hours from the list to set the checking interval for your alert.
184 Creating and Configuring Advanced Alerts
Setting a Trigger Condition for an Advanced Alert

You can set the specific conditions for triggering an advanced alert with the following procedure. To set the trigger conditions for an advanced alert: 1. Click Start > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Configure Alerts, and then click New or select an alert. 3. Click Copy or Edit, as appropriate, and then click Trigger Condition. 4. Select the Type of Property to Monitor from the list. 5. If you select Custom SQL Alert, complete the following steps: a. Select the object on which you want to alert in the Set up your Trigger Query field. b. Provide your custom SQL in the field below the object selection query. c. If you want to delay the trigger of this alert, provide the value and unit of your desired alert trigger delay. d. If you want to confirm your provided SQL, click Validate SQL. 6. If you select a type of monitored object, complete the following steps: a. Generate trigger conditions in the text field by selecting appropriate descriptors from the linked context menus and by clicking Browse () on the left of the text field. b. Click the linked text to select the number of conditions that you want to apply (all, any, none, not all). For more information about linked text conditions, see Understanding Condition Groups on page 191. c. Click Browse () to view the following condition options: Note: The has changed condition is only valid for the Last Boot, IOS Version, and IOS Image Family device characteristics. To generate a condition based on a comparison of device states, click Add a Simple Condition. To generate a condition based on a comparison of device fields and values, click Add a Complex Condition. To define more conditions, click Add a Condition Group. To remove a selected condition, click Delete Current Condition. To change the order of your conditions, click Move Down or Move Up, as appropriate.
d. If you need an additional condition, click Add, and then select the type of condition you want to add. e. If you need to delete a condition, select the condition from the condition list, and then click Delete. Notes: Conditions may be exported for use with other alerts by clicking Export Conditions and saving as appropriate. Click Import Conditions to import existing conditions from other alerts. Imported trigger conditions automatically overwrite any existing trigger conditions.
f.
If you want to specify a time duration for the condition to be valid, type the interval and select Seconds, Minutes, or Hours from the list. Note: You may need to delay alert trigger actions until a condition has been sustained for a certain amount of time. For example, an alert based on CPU load would not trigger unless the CPU Load of a node has been over 80% for more than 10 minutes. To set up a sustained-state trigger condition, at the bottom of the Trigger Condition tab, provide an appropriate amount of time the alert engine should wait before any actions are performed. By default, the alert triggers immediately, if the trigger condition exists. The maximum alert action delay is eight hours after the trigger condition is met.
g. If you are finished configuring your advanced alert, click OK.
Setting a Reset Condition for an Advanced Alert

Set specific conditions for resetting an advanced alert using the following steps. To set the conditions for resetting an advanced alert: 1. Click Start > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Configure Alerts, and then click New or select an alert from the list and click Copy or Edit. 3. Click Reset Condition. 4. If you want a simple alert reset when trigger conditions no longer exist, select Reset when trigger conditions are no longer true. 5. If you want a conditional alert reset, select Reset this alert when the following conditions are met. Notes: Generate reset conditions in the text field by selecting appropriate descriptors from the linked context menus and by clicking Browse ().
6. If you want to copy the condition used on the Trigger Condition tab, click Copy From Trigger. 7. Click the linked text to select the number of conditions to apply. For more information, see Understanding Condition Groups on page 191. 8. Click Browse () to view the following condition options: To generate a condition based on a comparison of device states, click Add a Simple Condition. To generate a condition based on a comparison of device fields and values, click Add a Complex Condition. To further define condition application, click Add a Condition Group. To remove a selected condition, click Delete Current Condition. To change the order of your conditions, click Move Down or Move Up.
9. If you need an additional condition, click Add, and then select the type of condition you want to add. 10. If you need to delete a condition, select the condition from the condition list, and then click Delete. Notes: Conditions may be exported for use with other alerts by clicking Export Conditions and saving as appropriate. Conditions from other alerts may be imported to the current alert by clicking Import Conditions. Warning: Imported trigger conditions automatically overwrite any existing trigger conditions. Because there are many situations where the reset conditions are the opposite of, or are very similar to, the trigger conditions, SolarWinds has provided a function that copies the trigger conditions to the reset conditions. Click Copy From Trigger to add the trigger condition.
11. If you want to specify a time duration for the condition to be valid, type the time interval and select Seconds, Minutes, or Hours from the list. Note: It is often appropriate to delay alert reset actions until a condition has been sustained for a certain amount of time. For example, an alert based on node status would not reset until the node has been up for more than five minutes. To establish a sustained-state reset condition, provide an appropriate interval at the bottom of the Reset Condition tab for the amount of time that the alert engine should wait before any actions are performed. The default setting is to reset the alert immediately, once the reset condition
exists. The maximum interval between when the trigger condition first exists and when the corresponding alert action is performed is eight hours. 12. If you are finished configuring your advanced alert, click OK.
Setting a Suppression for an Advanced Alert

You can set the specific conditions for suppressing an advanced alert using the following procedure. Note: Alert Suppression is only available if you have checked Show Advanced Features in the lower left of the Edit Advanced Alert window. To set conditions for advanced alert suppression: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Configure Alerts. 3. Click New or select an alert from the list. 4. Click Copy or Edit, as appropriate. 5. Click Alert Suppression. Note: Generate suppression conditions in the text field by selecting appropriate descriptors from the linked context menus and by clicking Browse () on the left of the text field. 6. If you want to copy the condition used on the Trigger Condition tab, click Copy From Trigger. 7. Click the linked text to select the number of conditions that you want to apply (all, any, none, not all). For more information about linked text conditions, see Understanding Condition Groups on page 191. 8. Click Browse () to view the following condition options: To generate a condition based on a comparison of device states, click Add a Simple Condition. To generate a condition based on a comparison of device fields and values, click Add a Complex Condition. To further define the application of your conditions, click Add a Condition Group. To remove a selected condition, click Delete Current Condition. To change the order of your conditions, click Move Down or Move Up.
9. If you need an additional condition, click Add and then select the type of condition you want to add.
10. If you need to delete a condition, select the condition from the condition list, and then click Delete. Note: Conditions may be exported for use with other alerts by clicking Export Conditions and saving as appropriate. Conditions from other alerts may be imported to the current alert by clicking Import Conditions. Warning: Imported conditions automatically overwrite existing conditions. 11. If you are finished configuring your advanced alert, click OK.
Setting the Monitoring Period for an Advanced Alert

You can select the specific time periods and days that your advanced alert will monitor your network objects with the following procedure. To set the monitoring time period and days for an advanced alert: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Configure Alerts. 3. Click New or select an alert from the list. 4. Click Copy or Edit. 5. Click Time of Day. 6. Enter the time period over which you want to monitor your network. Note: Alerts only trigger if the trigger condition is met within this time period. 7. Select the days on which you want to monitor your network. Note: Alerts will only trigger if your trigger condition is met on the days selected. 8. If you are finished configuring your advanced alert, click OK.
Setting a Trigger Action for an Advanced Alert

Select actions that will occur when your advanced alert is triggered with the following procedure. To set a trigger action for an advanced alert: 1. Click Start > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Configure Alerts. 3. Click New or select an alert from the list.
4. Click Copy or Edit, as appropriate. 5. Click Trigger Actions. 6. If you are adding a new advanced alert action, click Add New Action, and then select the actions you want to occur when the alert triggers. 7. If you are editing an existing advanced alert action, select the existing alert action, and then click Edit Selected Action. 8. Follow the instructions to configure each action. Note: Depending on the type of action selected, different options will be displayed to configure the alert action. For more information about individual alert actions, see Available Advanced Alert Actions on page 196. 9. If you need to delete an action, select the action and then click Delete Selected Action. 10. If you are finished configuring your advanced alert, click OK.
Setting a Reset Action for an Advanced Alert

Select actions that will occur when your advanced alert is reset with the following procedure. To set a reset action for an advanced alert: 1. Click Start > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Configure Alerts. 3. Click New Alert, Copy Alert, or Edit Alert, as appropriate. 4. Click Reset Actions. 5. If you are adding a new advanced alert action, click Add New Action, and then select the actions you want to occur when the alert triggers. 6. If you are editing an existing advanced alert action, select the existing alert action, and then click Edit Selected Action. 7. Follow the instructions to configure each action. Note: Depending on the type of action selected, different options display configuring the alert action. For more information about individual alert actions, see Available Advanced Alert Actions on page 196. 8. If you need to delete a selected action, click Delete Selected Action. 9. If you are finished configuring your advanced alert, click OK.
Alert Escalation
When editing any trigger or reset action, use the Alert Escalation tab, if it is available, to define additional alert action options. Depending on the alert action being configured, any or all fo the following options may be available on the Alert Escalation tab: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay the execution of the alert action, check Delay the execution of this Action and then provide an appropriate interval that the alert engine should wait after the alert condition is met before the alert action is executed.
For more information, see Escalated Advanced Alerts on page 211.
Understanding Condition Groups

A condition group is a set of user-defined rules governing alert triggers and resets. By default, the condition group Trigger Alert when all of the following apply is added when new alert triggers or reset conditions are created. Four different logical descriptors are used to create conditions: all, any, none, and not all, and clicking the word all and enables you to select different values. The following sections describe these logical descriptors. All Condition Group
Trigger Alert when all of the following apply means that every condition in the group must be true before the alert is triggered.
In the following example, there are three conditions within the condition group: Node Status is equal to Up Percent Loss is greater than or equal to 75 CPU Load is greater than or equal to 85
This alert will not trigger unless the Node is Up, packet loss is greater than or equal to 75%, and CPU load is greater than or equal to 85%. When setting the condition group to all, picture every condition as being separated by an and statement. So, in this example, the alert trigger would read:
Alert when: (Node Status = Up) and (Percent Loss >= 75) and (CPU Load >= 85) Creating and Configuring Advanced Alerts 191
Any Condition Group Changing the condition group to Trigger Alert when any of the following apply changes the logic to or statements. In this example, changing the condition group to any would change the alert trigger to:
Alert when: (Node Status = Up) or (Percent Loss >= 75) or (CPU Load >= 85)
In this situation, if any of the three conditions become true, the alert will trigger. None Condition Group Changing the condition group to Trigger Alert when none of the following apply means that all conditions in the group must be false before the alert is triggered. In this example the alert trigger would read:
Alert when: (Node Status = Down) and (Percent Loss <= 75) and (CPU Load <= 85)
Each condition is separated by an and statement just like the all condition group; however, the conditions have been inverted (Node Status = Down instead of Node Status = Up). Not All Condition Group Changing the condition group to Trigger Alert when not all of the following apply means that any condition in the group must be false before the alert is triggered. So, in this example the alert trigger would read:
Alert when: (Node Status = Down) or (Percent Loss <= 75) or (CPU Load <= 85)
Each condition is separated by an or statement just like the any condition group; however, the conditions have been inverted (Node Status = Down instead of Node Status = Up).
Using the Advanced Alert Manager

The Advanced Alert Manager is an interface used to view network events and alerts. You can also use Advanced Alert Manager to create and manage advanced alerts. The following procedures introduce the main features of the Advanced Alert Manager showing how to configure and view advanced alerts.
Current Events Window The Current Events window of the Advanced Alert Manager shows the most recent network events with their descriptions and other information from the events log. To use the Current Events window to view network events: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Current Events. 3. Select one of the following Group By criteria for grouping events: Event Type, Object Type, Network Node, Acknowledged, or No Grouping. 4. If you want to change the viewable category columns in the Current Events window, click Include, and then complete the following procedure: a. Click the Event View Columns tab, and then select column IDs from the All Columns field. b. Click the right arrow to move your column IDs into the Selected Columns field. c. If there are any column IDs in the Selected Columns field that you do not want to view, select them, and then click the left arrow to move your selected column IDs to the All Columns field. d. Click the up or down arrows to change the order of your selected columns accordingly. e. Position the slider to set the Event View refresh rate. f. Type the number of events that you want to be able to review in the Display a maximum of XXXX events in the Event View field.
g. If you are finished configuring your Current Events View, click OK. 5. Click Refresh to update the Current Events window with the latest events and column IDs. 6. If you want to acknowledge a network event, click X next to the event. Active Alerts Window The Active Alerts window of the Advanced Alert Manager shows network alerts with their descriptions and other information from the alerts log. To use the Active Alerts window to view active network alerts:
1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click View > Active Alerts. 3. Select one of the Group By criteria for grouping alerts: Alert Name, Object Type, Object Name, Alert State, Acknowledged, Acknowledged By, or No Grouping. 4. Click Include, and then check the types of alerts that you want to view: Acknowledged, Trigger Pending, Triggered, or Reset Pending. 5. If you want to change the viewable category columns in the Current Events window, click Include > Select Alert Columns, and then complete the following procedure: a. Select column IDs from the All Columns field. b. Click the right arrow to move your column IDs into the Selected Columns field. c. If there are any column IDs in the Selected Columns field that you do not want to view, select them, and then click the left arrow to move your selected column IDs to the All Columns field. d. Click the up or down arrows to change the order of your selected columns accordingly. e. Position the slider to set the Alert View refresh rate. f. If you are finished configuring your Active Alerts View, click OK. 6. Click Refresh to update the Active Alerts window with the latest alerts and column IDs. 7. Click Configure Alerts to change the settings for individual alerts. For more information, see Monitoring Network Events on page 181. 8. If you want to acknowledge an active alert, check the alert in the Acknowledged column. Note: As soon as the alert is acknowledged, the user information and date/time is recorded in the database. Alert Viewer Settings Alert views in the Orion Advanced Alert Manager are configured in the Alert Viewer Settings window, as presented in the following procedure. To configure alert views in the Advanced Alert Manager: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager.
2. Click File > Settings. Note: The Configure Alerts tab of the Alert Viewer Settings window displays all available network alerts, and from this window you can create, copy, edit, and delete alerts. For more information, see Creating and Configuring Advanced Alerts on page 83. 3. Click Alert View Columns. 4. Select the information titles that you want to see about your alerts from the All Columns list. 5. Click the right arrow to transfer them to the Selected Columns list. Note: The Selected Columns list provides a list of all the information that the Alert Viewer will show for each active alert. 6. If you want to remove titles from the Selected Columns list, select titles that you want to remove from the active view in the Selected Columns list, and then click the left arrow. 7. If you want to rearrange the order in which the different pieces of alert information are presented in the Alert Viewer, select titles from the Selected Columns list and use the up and down arrows to arrange the titles accordingly. 8. Position the slider at the bottom of the tab to set the Alert View refresh rate. 9. Click Event View Columns. 10. Select the information titles that you want to see about events from the All Columns list. 11. Click the right arrow to transfer them to the Selected Columns list. Note: The Selected Columns list provides a list of all the information that the Alert Viewer will show for each recorded event. 12. If you want to remove titles from the Selected Columns list, select titles that you want to remove from the active view in the Selected Columns list, and then click the left arrow. 13. If you want to rearrange the order in which the different pieces of event information are presented in the Alert Viewer, select titles from the Selected Columns list and use the up and down arrows to arrange the titles accordingly. 14. Position the slider at the bottom of the tab to set the Event View refresh rate. 15. Enter the number of events that you want to see in the Event View.
Adding Alert Actions

Orion Network Performance Monitor provides a variety of actions to signal an alert condition on your network. These alert actions are available for both basic and advanced alerts, and the following procedure assigns actions to the alert conditions that you have defined for your network. To add an alert action: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Network Performance monitor > System Manager. 2. Click Alerts > Active Alerts, and then click either Configure Basic Alerts or Configure Advanced Alerts, as appropriate. 3. Check the alert to which you want to add the action, and then click Edit Alert. 4. Click Actions, and then select the action you want to edit. 5. Click Add Alert Action, and then click the action to add to your chosen alert. For more information about individual alert actions, see Available Advanced Alert Actions on page 196.
Available Advanced Alert Actions

The following sections detail the configuration of available alert actions: Sending an E-mail / Page Playing a Sound Logging an Advanced Alert to a File Logging an Advanced Alert to the Windows Event Log Sending a Syslog Message Executing an External Program Executing a Visual Basic Script Emailing a Web Page Using Text to Speech Output Sending a Windows Net Message Sending an SNMP Trap Using GET or POST URL Functions
Sending an E-mail / Page

The following procedure configures an e-mail/page action for an advanced alert. Note: Emails and pages are sent in plain text. To configure an email/page action for an advanced alert: 1. Click E-mail/Pager Addresses, and then 2. Complete the To, CC, BCC, Name, and Reply Address fields. Note: You must provide at least one email address in the To field, and multiple addresses must be separated with commas. Some pager systems require a valid reply address to complete the page. 3. Click Message. 4. Type the Subject and Message of your alert trigger email/page. Note: Messaging is disabled if both Subject and Message fields are empty. 5. If you want to insert a variable into the Subject or Message field, click the location of the new variable, and then complete the following procedure: a. Click Insert Variable. b. Select a Variable Category. c. Select the variable you want to add. d. If you want to change the parser, check Change Parser, and then select the parser you want to use. e. If you want to define the SQL variable to copy to the clipboard, check Define SQL Variable, and then click Insert Variable From Above List. f. Click Build Selected Variable. Note: For more information on the use of variables, see Orion Variables and Examples on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. For more information about messages that use variables, see Example Messages Using Variables on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. 6. Click SMTP Server. 7. Type the Hostname or IP Address of your SMTP Server and the designated SMTP Port Number. Note: The SMTP server hostname or IP address field is required. You cannot send an email/page alert without identifying the SMTP server. 8. If your SMTP server requires authentication, check This SMTP Server requires Authentication.
9. Click Time of Day. 10. Enter the time period over which you want to activate your alert action. 11. Select the days on which you want to activate your alert action. 12. If you want to enable alert escalation, click the Alert Escalation tab, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval the alert engine should wait after the alert condition is met before the alert action is executed.
13. If you are finished configuring your email/page alert action, click OK.
Playing a Sound
Orion can be configured to play a sound upon alert trigger or reset. The following procedure configures a sound to play for an advanced alert. To configure a play sound action for an advanced alert: 1. Click Play Sound. 2. Specify a sound file for the alert trigger by doing either of the following in the Sound file to play field: Type the complete directory path and file name. Click Browse () to navigate your file system and select the target file.
3. Click the musical note button to the right of either text field to test the sound file you have specified. 4. Click Time of Day. 5. Enter the time period over which you want to activate your alert action, and then select the days on which you want to activate your alert action.
6. If you want to enable alert escalation, click Alert Escalation, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval the alert engine should wait after the alert condition is met before the alert action is executed.
7. If you are finished configuring your play a sound alert action, click OK.
Logging an Advanced Alert to a File

Orion can be configured to log alerts to a designated file. The following procedure logs an advanced alert to a designated file To configure an alert log file for an advanced alert: 1. Click Event Log, and then specify an alert log file by doing either of the following in the Alert Log Filename field: Note: If the file specified does not exist, it will be created with the first alert occurrence. Type the complete path and name of the target file. Click Browse () to navigate your file system and select the target file.
2. Type the message you want to log to your alert log file in the Message field. 3. If you want to insert a variable into the Message field, complete the following procedure: a. Click Insert Variable, and then select a Variable Category. b. Select the variable you want to add. c. If you want to change the parser, check Change Parser, and then select the parser you want to use. d. If you want to define the SQL variable to copy to the clipboard, check Define SQL Variable, and then click Insert Variable From Above List. e. Click Build Selected Variable. Note: For more information on the use of variables, see Orion Variables and Examples on page Error! Bookmark not defined..
4. Click Time of Day. 5. Enter the time period over which you want to activate your alert action. 6. Select the days on which you want to activate your alert action. 7. If you want to enable alert escalation, click the Alert Escalation tab, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval the alert engine should wait after the alert condition is met before the alert action is executed.
8. If you are finished configuring your alert log file, click OK.
Logging an Advanced Alert to the Windows Event Log

You may specify that an alert be logged to the Windows Event Log either on the Orion server or on a remote server. The following procedure logs an advanced alert to the Windows Event Log on a designated server. To configure advanced alert logging to the Windows Event Log: 1. Click Event Log. 2. If you want your alert to write to the Windows Event Log on your Orion server, select Use Event Log Message on Network Performance Monitor Server. 3. If you want your alert to write to the Windows Event Log on a remote server, select Use Event Log Message on a Remote Server, and then provide the Remote Server Name or IP Address. 4. Type the message you want to log to the Windows Event Log in the Message to send to Windows Event Log field. 5. If you want to insert a variable into the Message field, complete the following procedure: a. Click Insert Variable. b. Select a Variable Category. c. Select the variable you want to add. d. If you want to change the parser, check Change Parser, and then select the parser you want to use.
e. If you want to define the SQL variable to copy to the clipboard, check Define SQL Variable, and then click Insert Variable From Above List. f. Click Build Selected Variable. Note: For more information on the use of variables, see Orion Variables and Examples on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. 6. Click Time of Day. 7. Enter the time period and select the days over which you want to activate your alert action. 8. If you want to enable alert escalation, click Alert Escalation, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval the alert engine should wait after the alert condition is met before the alert action is executed.
9. If you are finished configuring your alert log file, click OK.
Sending a Syslog Message

Orion can log received alerts to the Syslog of a designated machine. The following procedure configures an advanced alert to send a message to a designated Syslog server. To configure an advanced alert to send a Syslog message: 1. Click Syslog Message. 2. Type the Hostname or IP Address of the Syslog Server to which you want to send Syslog messages. 3. Select the Severity of your alert Syslog message. Note: For more information, see Syslog Severities on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. 4. Select Facility of your alert Syslog message. Note: For more information, see Syslog Facilities on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. 5. Type the Syslog Message you want to send.
6. If you want to insert a variable into the Message field, complete the following procedure: a. Click Insert Variable. b. Select a Variable Category. c. Select the variable you want to add. d. If you want to change the parser, check Change Parser, and then select the parser you want to use. e. If you want to define the SQL variable to copy to the clipboard, check Define SQL Variable, and then click Insert Variable From Above List. f. Click Build Selected Variable. Note: For more information on the use of variables, see Orion Variables and Examples on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. 7. Click Time of Day. 8. Enter the time period over which you want to activate your alert action. 9. Select the days on which you want to activate your alert action. 10. If you want to enable alert escalation, click Alert Escalation, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval the alert engine should wait after the alert condition is met before the alert action is executed.
11. If you are finished with the configuration of your send Syslog message action, click OK.
Executing an External Program

There are several circumstances where you may want to execute a program when a specific network event occurs. Use the Edit Execute Program Action window to specify the executable that should be started when the specified alert is triggered or reset, as shown in the following procedure. To configure an advanced alert to execute an external program:
1. Click Execute Program. 2. Specify a program to execute, either by typing the complete path and name of the target file into the Program to execute field or by clicking Browse (), to browse your folder structure and select the target file. 3. Click Time of Day, and then enter the time period when you want to execute the external program. 4. Select the days on which you want to execute the external program. 5. Click Alert Escalation, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly, while the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered, and then provide an action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide the interval the alert engine should wait.
6. If you are finished configuring your external program execution action, click OK.
Executing a Visual Basic Script

In some situations you may want to execute a Visual Basic (VB) script when a network event occurs. The Edit Execute VB Script Action window is used to specify the name and complete path of the file that shall be executed when the specified alert is triggered or reset. To configure alerts to execute a Visual Basic (VB) script: 1. Click VB Script. 2. Select an available VB Script Interpreter. 3. Specify a VB script to execute either by typing the complete path and name of the VB script into the VB Script to execute field or by clicking Browse () to browse your folder structure and select the script. 4. Click Time of Day, and then enter the time period and select the days on which you want to execute the selected VB script. 5. Click Alert Escalation, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert:
To disable the script when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the script repeatedly as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay script execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval the alert engine should wait after the alert condition is met before the script executes.
6. If you are finished configuring your VB script execution action, click OK.
Emailing a Web Page

The Edit E-mail Web Page Action window includes several tabs for configuration. The following procedure configures an e-mail URL action for an advanced alert. Note: Emails are sent in plain text. To configure an email web page action for an advanced alert: 1. Click E-mail a Web Page, and then then click OK. 2. Complete the To, CC, BCC, Name, and Reply Address fields. Note: You must provide at least one address in the To field. When entering multiple addresses, you may only separate addresses with a comma. Some pager systems require a valid reply address to complete the page. 3. Click SMTP Server. 4. Type the Hostname or IP Address of your SMTP Server and the designated SMTP Port Number. Note: The SMTP server hostname or IP address field is required. You cannot email a web page without identifying the SMTP server. 5. Click URL, and then type the Subject of your alert email. Note: Messaging is disabled if both Subject and URL fields are empty. 6. If you want to insert a variable into the Subject field, click the location of the new variable, and then complete the following procedure: a. Click Insert Variable, select a Variable Category, and then select the variable to add. b. If you want to change the parser, check Change Parser, and then select the parser you want to use.
c. If you want to define the SQL variable to copy to the clipboard, check Define SQL Variable, and then click Insert Variable From Above List. d. Click Build Selected Variable. Note: For more information on the use of variables, see Orion Variables and Examples on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. For more information about messages that use variables, see Example Messages Using Variables on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. 7. Provide the URL of your alert email. Note: Messaging is disabled if both Subject and URL fields are empty. 8. If the web server of the URL you want to email requires user access authentication, provide both the Web Server UserID and the Web Server Password in the Optional Web Server Authentication area. 9. Click Time of Day, and then enter the time period and select the days when you want to activate your alert action. 10. If you want to enable alert escalation, click Alert Escalation, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly, as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval for the alert engine to wait after the alert condition is met before executing the alert action.
11. If you are finished configuring your URL email alert action, click OK.
Using Text to Speech Output

You may specify a phrase that will be spoken upon alert trigger and a separate phrase for the alert reset. Orion uses Microsoft Speech Synthesis Engine version 5.0, as included with Windows 2003 and XP Professional. If you have Orion maintenance, you may also install and use other text-to-speech engines by visiting the SolarWinds website. The following procedure configures text-tospeech output for an advanced alert trigger or reset. To configure a text-to-speech output action for an advanced alert:
1. Click Text to Speech output, and then then click OK. 2. On the General tab, Select a Speech Engine, and then use the sliders to set the required Speed, Pitch and Volume. 3. On the Phrase tab, type the text you want to output as speech in the Phrase to speak field. Note: Click Speak to hear the text, as provided, with the options configured as set on the General tab. 4. On the Time of Day tab enter the time period and select the days on which you want to activate your alert action. 5. If you want to enable alert escalation, open the Alert Escalation tab, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly, as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval for the alert engine to wait after the alert condition is met before executing the alert action.
6. If you are finished configuring your text-to-speech alert action, click OK.
Sending a Windows Net Message

Alerts can be configured to display a pop-up Windows Net Message either on a specific computer or on all computers in a selected domain or workgroup. The following steps configure Windows Net messaging for triggered or reset alerts. Note: Windows Server 2008 does not support Windows Net Messaging, so the Send a Windows Net message alert action is not available to Orion installations on Windows Server 2008. To configure Orion to send a Windows Net message upon alert: 1. Click Send a Windows Net Message, and then then click OK. 2. On the Net Message tab, enter the Computer Name or IP Address of the machine where you want to send a Windows Net message upon an alert trigger or reset. 3. If you want to send the message to all computers in the domain or workgroup of your target computer, check Send to all Computers in the Domain or Workgroup.
4. Enter the Windows Net message you want to send in the Message to send field. Note: You may use variables in this message. For more information on the use of variables, see Orion Variables and Examples on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. 5. On the Time of Day tab enter the time period and select the days on which you want to activate your alert action. 6. If you want to enable alert escalation, open the Alert Escalation tab, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly, as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval for the alert engine to wait after the alert condition is met before executing the alert action.
7. If you are finished configuring your text-to-speech alert action, click OK.
Sending an SNMP Trap

The following steps configure an alert to send an SNMP trap on trigger or reset. To configure Orion to send an SNMP trap upon alert: 1. Click Send an SNMP Trap, and then then click OK. 2. On the SNMP Trap tab, in the SNMP Trap Destinations field, enter the IP addresses of the servers to which you want to send your generated SNMP traps. Note: Use commas to separate multiple destination IP addresses. 3. Select the type of trap to send on alert trigger from the Trap Template list. Note: Some trap templates may use an alert message. You may change any provided text, if you want, but it is important that you understand the use of variables beforehand. For more information about using variables, see Orion Variables and Examples on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. 4. Enter the SNMP Community String for your network in the designated field. 5. On the Time of Day tab enter the time period and select the days on which you want to activate your alert action.
6. If you want to enable alert escalation, open the Alert Escalation tab, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly, as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval for the alert engine to wait after the alert condition is met before executing the alert action.
7. If you are finished configuring your SNMP trap alert action, click OK.
Using GET or POST URL Functions

Orion can be configured to communicate alerts using HTTP GET or POST functions. As an example, a URL may be used as an interface into a trouble ticket system, and, by correctly formatting the GET function, new trouble tickets may be created automatically. The following procedure configures Orion to use GET or POST HTTP functions to communicate alert information. To configure Orion to use GET or POST URL functions with alerts: 1. Click Get or Post a URL to a Web Server, and then then click OK. 2. Select either Use HTTP GET or Use HTTP POST to set the function that you want to use to communicate alert information. 3. If you selected Use HTTP GET, enter the URL you want to GET. 4. If you selected Use HTTP POST, enter the URL you want to POST, and then enter the Body to POST. 5. On the Time of Day tab enter the time period and select the days on which you want to activate your alert action. 6. If you want to enable alert escalation, open the Alert Escalation tab, and then check any of the following options, as appropriate for your alert: To disable the action when the alert has been acknowledged, check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. To execute the action repeatedly, as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. To delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval for the alert engine to wait after the alert condition is met before executing the alert action.
7. If you are finished with the configuration of Orion to use HTTP GET or POST URL functions, click OK.
Testing Alert Actions

The Advanced Alert Manager provides an alert action test feature so you can confirm the desired function for actions you have configured to fire when Orion detects an alert condition on your network. Complete he following procedure to test an alert action. To test an alert action: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click Configure Alerts. 3. Click the alert for which the action you want to test is configured. 4. Click Test. 5. If the alert is configured to fire on a node condition, select Alert on Network Node, and then select the node against which you want to test the action. 6. If the alert is configured to fire on an interface condition, complete the following steps: Note: Testing alert actions against interfaces is only available if Orion Network Performance Monitor is installed and monitoring interfaces on your network. For more information, see the SolarWinds Orion Network Performance Monitor Administrator Guide. a. Select Alert on Network Node, and then select the parent node of the interface against which you want to test the action. b. Select Select Interface on ParentNode, and then select the interface against which you want to test the action. 7. If the alert is configured to fire on a volume condition, complete the following steps: a. Select Alert on Network Node, and then select the parent node of the volume against which you want to test the action. b. Select Select Volume on ParentNode, and then select the volume against which you want to test the action. 8. If you are testing an alert trigger action, click Test Alert Trigger. 9. If you are testing an alert reset action, click Test Alert Reset. 10. When the test completes, as indicated by the test log, click Done.
Confirm that the expected action occurred as a result of the selected alert trigger or reset.
Viewing Alerts in the Orion Web Console

The Triggered Alerts for All Network Devices page provides a table view of your alerts log. You can customize the list view by using the following procedure to select your preferred alert grouping criteria. To view alerts in the Web Console: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Alerts in the Views toolbar. 3. If you want to filter your alerts table view by device, select the device to which you want to limit your alerts view in the Network Object field. 4. If you want to filter your alerts table by type of device, select the device type to which you want to limit your alerts view in the Type of Device field. 5. If you want to limit your alerts table to show a specific type of alert, select the alert type in the Alert Name field. 6. In the Show Alerts field, provide the number of alerts you want to view. 7. If you want to show all alerts, even if they have already been cleared or acknowledged, check Show Acknowledged Alerts. 8. Click Refresh to complete your Alerts view configuration.
Acknowledging Advanced Alerts in the Web Console

Orion allows you to acknowledge advanced alerts in the Orion Web Console, allowing you to eliminate time lost either when multiple users attempt to resolve the same issue or when a user tries to address an issue that has already been resolved. To acknowledge advanced alerts using the Orion Web Console: 1. Log in to the Orion Web Console using an account that has been granted alert acknowledgement privileges. Note: For more information about access privileges for Orion Web Console users, see User Account Access Settings on page 166. 2. Click Alerts on the Views toolbar. 3. If you want to limit the list of alerts to only those dealing with a single device, select the specific device from the Network Object list. Note: This option is only available if alerts fire on multiple network devices.
4. If you want to limit the list of alerts to only those dealing with a single type of device, select the device type from the Type of Device list. Note: This option is only available if Orion is monitoring multiple types of network devices. 5. If you want to limit the list of alerts to only those of a single type, select the specific alert type from the Alert Name list. Note: This option is only available when multiple types of Orion alerts have been triggered. 6. Confirm the number of alerts displayed in the Show Alerts field. 7. If you want acknowledged alerts to remain in the Alerts view, even after they have been acknowledged, check Show Acknowledged Alerts. 8. Click Refresh to update the alerts list with your new settings. 9. Check Acknowledged next to the alerts you want to acknowledge. 10. Click Acknowledge Alerts.
Escalated Advanced Alerts

By creating an escalated alert, Orion enables you to customize a series of alerts to trigger successive actions as an alert condition persists. The following sections provide both a scenario where an escalated alert may be useful and the steps required to create one using the Orion Advanced Alert Manager.
Escalated Alert Example

WidgetCo is a business with a small IT staff, consisting of two technicians and an IT manager. To ensure that issues are addressed appropriately, the IT manager has created multiple escalated alerts for a range of potential network events, including device failures and excessive disk space or bandwidth usage. Typically, the escalated alerts configured by the WidgetCo IT manager proceed as follows: 1. Immediately, as soon as Orion recognizes an alert condition, Orion generates both an email and a page that are sent to one of the two technicians. An entry is also recorded in the Orion events log. 2. If the alert is not acknowledged in the Orion Web Console within 20 minutes, a second alert is fired, generating another email and another page, both sent to both technicians. An entry is also recorded in the Orion events log. 3. If the second alert is not acknowledged within 20 minutes, Orion fires a third alert that sends both an email and a page to both technicians and to the IT manager. An entry is also recorded in the Orion events log.
Escalated alerts ensure that everyone on the WidgetCo IT staff is notified of any significant network alert conditions within 45 minutes without burdening the IT manager with excessive alert notifications. The following section provides a procedure to create a similar escalated alert scheme.
Creating a Series of Escalated Alerts

The following procedure creates a series of escalated alerts similar to the scheme described in the preceding example. Note: Repeat these steps to create a separate alert for each notification level. The example provided in the previous section uses a three-level escalated alert, The following procedure should be completed three times, once for each alert, to replicate the escalated alert of the previous section. To create an escalated alert: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Advanced Alert Manager. 2. Click Configure Alerts. 3. Click New, and then click General. 4. Type Level X , where X is the level corresponding to the currently configured alert, as the name of your escalated alert in the Name of Alert field. Note: The example provided in the previous section uses a three-level escalated alert. 5. Type a description of your first level escalated alert in the description field, and then check Enable this Alert. 6. Type the Alert Evaluation Frequency and select Seconds, Minutes, or Hours from the list to set the checking interval for your alert. 7. Click Trigger Condition. Note: For more information about configuring trigger conditions, see Setting a Trigger Condition for an Advanced Alert on page 185. 8. Select Node as the Type of Property to Monitor. 9. Confirm that the linked text in the alert definition field displays all. Note: Click the linked text to select the number of conditions that you want to apply (all, any, none, not all). For more information about linked text conditions, see Understanding Condition Groups on page 191. 10. Click Browse (), and then click Add a Simple Condition. 11. Click the first asterisk (*), and then select Network Nodes > Node Details > Node Name.
12. Confirm that is equal to is the linked condition text in the trigger definition. Note: Click the linked text to select the condition you want to apply (equal, greater, less, ). For more information about linked text conditions, see Understanding Condition Groups on page 191. 13. Click the second asterisk (*), and then select your production web server from the list of monitored nodes. 14. Click Add, and then click Simple Condition. 15. Click the first asterisk (*) in the second condition, and then select Network Nodes > Node Status > Node Status. 16. Confirm that is equal to is the linked condition text in the second trigger definition. Note: Click the linked text condition to select the condition you want to apply (equal, greater, less, ). For more information about linked text conditions, see Understanding Condition Groups on page 191. 17. Click the second asterisk (*) in the second condition, and then select Down. 18. If you want to apply any reset conditions to your escalated alert, click Reset Condition, and then provide appropriate conditions. For more information, see Setting a Reset Condition for an Advanced Alert on page 85. 19. If you want to apply any alert suppressions to your escalated alert, click Alert Suppression, and then provide appropriate suppression conditions. For more information, see Setting a Suppression for an Advanced Alert on page 85. 20. If you want to restrict when your escalated alert is valid, click Time of Day, designate the Valid Time of Day for your escalated alert, and then select the Days of the Week on which your escalated alert is valid. For more information, see Setting the Monitoring Period for an Advanced Alert on page 189. Note: By default, your escalated alert is always valid. 21. Click Trigger Actions, and then click Add New Action. 22. Select Send an E-mail / Page, and then click OK. 23. Click E-mail/Pager Addresses, and then complete the To, CC, BCC, Name, and Reply Address fields for your Level 1 contact. Note: You must provide at least one email address in the To field. When entering multiple addresses in a field, y separate addresses with a comma.
24. Click Message, and then type the Subject and Message of your escalated alert email. Notes: Messaging is disabled if both Subject and Message fields are empty. For more information about variables in email subjects and messages, see Sending an E-mail / Page on page 197.
25. Click SMTP Server, and then provide the Hostname or IP Address of your SMTP Server and the designated SMTP Port Number. Note: The SMTP server hostname or IP address field is required. You cannot send an email/page alert without identifying the SMTP server. 26. If your SMTP server requires authentication, check This SMTP Server requires Authentication. 27. If you want to restrict when your escalated alert is valid, check Execute this Action only between specific hours, and then configure the appropriate settings. Note: By default, your escalated alert is always valid. For more information, see Setting the Monitoring Period for an Advanced Alert on page 189. 28. Click Alert Escalation. 29. Check Do not execute this Action if the Alert has been Acknowledged. 30. If you want to execute the action repeatedly as long as the trigger condition exists, check Execute this Action repeatedly while the Alert is Triggered, and then provide an appropriate action execution interval. 31. If you want to delay alert action execution, check Delay the execution of this Action, and then provide an appropriate interval the alert engine should wait after the alert condition is met before the alert action is executed. Note: Typically, if you are configuring the first level alert, you should leave this option unchecked. If you are configuring the second level alert, check this option and provide the desired delay between the first and second notifications. If you are configuring the third level alert, check this option and provide the desired delay between the first and third notifications. 32. Click OK. 33. If you want your escalated alert to perform any actions upon reset, click the Reset Action tab, and then configure appropriate actions. For more information, see Setting a Reset Action for an Advanced Alert on page 190. 34. If you are finished configuring your escalated alert, click OK.
Viewing Alerts from Mobile Devices

Orion is capable of detecting when you are accessing the Orion Web Console from a mobile device. This mobile alerts view allows you to view and acknowledge existing active alerts. To view and acknowledge alerts from a mobile device: 1. Using a browser on your mobile device, log in to your Orion Web Console as a user with alert management rights. 2. Click Alerts in the Views toolbar. Note: If you want to view the mobile alerts view from a desktop or server browser, add ?IsMobileView=true to the URL of the Alerts view in your Orion Web Console. 3. Check alerts you want to acknowledge, and then click Acknowledge. Clickable links in alert messages provide more information about triggered alerts.
Chapter 13
Creating Network Maps

Orion Network Atlas is a powerful tool for creating custom maps and network diagrams. The maps created in Orion Network Atlas enable users to view a graphical depiction of their network in the Orion Web Console. You can also use the maps to create network documentation, which can then be printed and exported as needed. Map objects may include monitored Orion nodes, interfaces, and volumes; Orion APM applications and components; nested maps; and network links. The numerous presentation options for your network maps include the following: A large set of predefined background colors, textures, and images is available for you to use in your maps. You can also provide your own custom background graphics. Real-time weather or natural disaster maps may be projected directly onto your network maps using linked web graphics as a background. The shape, size, color, and style of map links may be customized to illustrate the status or the relative bandwidth of associated objects. Map objects may be presented in a unique set of graphical styles to portray network status Maps may be nested to selectively reveal increasing levels of map detail, and the status of nested map child objects may be bubbled up to the parent map
Orion Network Atlas is also fully compatible with all network maps created with Orion Map Maker used with earlier versions of Orion products. For more information, see the SolarWinds Orion Network Atlas Administrator Guide at http://www.solarwinds.com/support/orionModules/modulesDoc.aspx.
Creating Network Maps 217
218 Creating Network Maps
Chapter 14
Creating and Viewing Reports

Over time, your Orion database accumulates a great deal of information. SolarWinds has developed Report Writer to provide a quick and easy way for you to extract data from your database and present it in a useful form. Several standard reports that you can modify are included in the Report Writer distribution, and you can create new reports as necessary. Report Writer includes powerful tools to help you format your information and easily preview your reports before you display them. When you have finished editing your reports, you can print them with the click of a button, and most reports are also enabled for viewing through the Web Console, by default. For more information about adding reports to Orion Web Console views, see Customizing Views on page 111. Note: Report Writer capabilities are enhanced when used in conjunction with the Custom Property Editor. Once added, properties are available for report sort and filter functionality. For more information, see Creating Custom Properties on page 238.
Predefined Orion Reports

The following sections describe the reports that are immediately available with your Orion installation. These reports may be modified, as necessary, to suit your network performance reporting requirements. Note: If the report you require is not listed in any of the following sections, you can use Orion Report Writer to create your own custom report. For more information about creating your own custom reports, see Using Report Writer on page 226.
Availability
The following network availability reports are provided by default with Orion. Availability Last Month Displays the IP address and average availability of all monitored nodes over the last month. Availability This Year Displays the IP address and average availability of all monitored nodes over the last year.
Creating Custom Properties 219
Availability Yesterday Displays the IP address and average availability of all monitored nodes over the previous day. Availability of Entire Network Last Month Displays the availability of all monitored nodes on the entire network over the last month. Top 25 Percent Down Last Month Displays the top 25 nodes, by percent downtime, over the last month.
Current Node Status

The following node status reports are provided by default with Orion. Average Response Time Displays both average and peak response times for all monitored nodes. Current CPU Load Displays current CPU load percentage for all monitored nodes with CPUs. Current Response Time Displays the IP address and current, average, and peak response times for all monitored nodes. Current Status of each Node Displays the IP address and a verbal statement of the current operational status of all monitored nodes. Down Nodes Displays all monitored nodes that are currently down. Last Boot Time for each Node Displays the machine type and the date and time of last boot for all nodes.
Current Volume Status

Orion provides an Available Space on each Volume report by default. This report displays the volume size, available space on the volume, and a percentage measure of the available space on the volume for all monitored volumes. Volumes are listed beneath their respective parent nodes.
220 Creating Custom Properties
Daily Node Availability

The following node availability reports are provided by default with Orion. Availability - Last Month Displays the IP address and average daily availability of all monitored nodes over the current month. Availability - This Month Displays the IP address and average daily availability of all monitored nodes over the current month. Availability - This Year Displays the IP address and average daily availability of all monitored nodes over the last 12 months.
Events
The following network events reports are provided by default with Orion. All Down Events Displays a list of all events in the database involving nodes that have stopped responding to polling over the last 12 months. For each down event, this report displays the down event date and time, the node name and IP address, and a verbal statement of the down event. Down Events - Windows Devices Displays a list of all events in the database involving Windows devices that have stopped responding to polling over the last month. For each down event, this report displays the down event date and time, the node name, and a verbal statement of the down event. Last 250 Events Displays the last 250 events involving any monitored device. For each event, this report displays the event date and time, the node involved, and a message describing the event. Nodes that went down - Last 24 Hours Displays a list of all nodes that have stopped responding over the last 24 hours. For every event of a node going down, this report displays the event date and time, an icon representing the current node status, the node name, and a verbal statement of the down event. Triggered Alerts - Last 30 Days
Displays a list of all triggered alerts over the past 30 days. For each triggered alert event, this report displays the date and time of the alert trigger, the node that triggered the alert, and a message describing the triggered alert event. Triggered and Reset Alerts - Last 30 Days Displays a list of all triggered and reset alerts over the past 30 days. For each triggered or reset alert event, this report displays the date and time of the alert event, the node that triggered or reset the alert, and a message describing the alert event.
Historical CPU and Memory Reports

Orion provides a CPU Load - Last Month report by default. This report displays the vendor icon and average and peak CPU load percentages for all monitored nodes with CPUs over the previous calendar month.
Historical Response Time Reports

The following response time reports are provided by default with Orion. Response Time - Last Month Displays average and peak response times for all monitored nodes over the previous calendar month. Response Time - Top 10 Last Month Displays the average and peak response times for the top ten monitored nodes over the previous calendar month.
Historical VMware ESX Server Reports

Orion provides the following VMware ESX Server performance reports by default with Orion. Network Traffic by VM for Last 7 Days For each monitored VMware ESX Server, this report displays the average daily network traffic on the ESX Server per hosted VM for the last 7 days. Network Traffic by VM for Last Month For each monitored VMware ESX Server, this report displays the average daily network traffic on the ESX Server per hosted VM for the last month. Percent of CPU by VM for Last 7 Days For each monitored VMware ESX Server, this report displays the average daily CPU load on the ESX Server due to each hosted VM for the last 7 days.
Percent of CPU by VM for Last Month For each monitored VMware ESX Server, this report displays the average daily CPU load on the ESX Server due to each hosted VM for the last month. Percent of Memory by VM for Last 7 Days For each monitored VMware ESX Server, this report displays the average daily memory load on the ESX Server due to each hosted VM for the last 7 days. Percent of Memory by VM for Last Month For each monitored VMware ESX Server, this report displays the average daily memory load on the ESX Server due to each hosted VM for the last month. Percent of Time Running vs. Stopped For each monitored VMware ESX Server, this report displays both the percentage of time that each hosted VM has been running and the percentage of time that each hosted VM has been stopped.
Groups: Current Groups and Groups Members Status

The following group and group members status reports are provided by default with Orion. Current Status of each Group Current Status of each Group Current Status of each Group Member Current Status of each Group Member Groups and Group Members Groups and Group Members
Groups: Daily Group Availability

The following group availability reports are provided by default with Orion. Group Availability Last Month Group Availability Last Month Group Availability This Month Group Availability This Month Group Availability This Year
Group Availability This Year
Groups: Group Availability (with members)

The following group availability reports that include member availability are provided by default with Orion. Group Availability (with members) Last Month Group Availability (with members) Last Month Group Availability (with members) This Month Group Availability (with members) This Month Group Availability (with members) This Year Group Availability (with members) This Year
Groups: Historical Groups Status

The following historical group status reports are provided by default with Orion. Historical Status of each Group Last 7 Days Historical Status of each Group Last 7 Days Historical Status of each Group Last Month Historical Status of each Group Last Month Historical Status of each Group This Month Historical Status of each Group This Month
Historical Volume Usage Reports

Orion provides an Average Disk Space Used - Last 12 Months report by default. For all monitored volumes, this report displays the volume type and size, percentage of the volume space that is currently available, amount of the available space that is currently used, and the amount of volume space that is currently available. Volumes are listed beneath their respective parent nodes.
Inventory
The following network inventory reports are provided by default with Orion. All Disk Volumes For all monitored volumes, this report displays the volume type and size, available space on the volume, amount of the available space that is
currently used, and the peak amount of the available space that has been used on the volume, with the month in which peak usage occurred, over the last 12 months. Volumes are listed beneath their respective parent nodes. Device Types Displays a list of monitored machine types and the number of each type that are currently monitored. IOS Versions of Cisco Devices For all monitored Cisco devices, this report displays the device name, machine type, and Cisco IOS Version and Image.
Viewing Reports
All reports, custom or predefined, are available for viewing in both the Orion Web Console and in Report Writer, as shown in the following procedures: Viewing Reports in the Orion Web Console Viewing Reports in the Orion Report Writer
Note: By default, no report folder is configured for newly created users. If a new user is not seeing reports, you may need to select a Report Folder for the new user. For more information, see Configuring an Account Report Folder on page 170.
Viewing Reports in the Orion Web Console

The following procedure opens reports for viewing in the Orion Web Console. To view reports in the Orion Web Console: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Log in to the Orion Web Console, and then click Home > Reports. 3. Select a report group name to expand the report group. 4. Click the title of the report you want to view, and it displays directly in the web console browser. It is also possible to include a report within a web console view as a Report from Orion Report Writer resource. For more information about adding the Report from Orion Report Writer resource, see Editing Views on page 112.
Viewing Reports in the Orion Report Writer

The following procedure opens reports for viewing in the Orion Report Writer.
To view reports with Orion Report Writer: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Report Writer. 2. If report groups are not already expanded in the left pane, click + next to a report group name to expand the group, and then click the title of the report you want to view. 3. Click Preview.
Using Report Writer

Before using Report Writer, you must have collected at least a few minutes worth of data in a database populated with devices you want to monitor. A variety of reports are included with Report Writer, and icons that precede report names distinguish available report types. The following procedure starts Report Writer. To start Report Writer: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Report Writer. 2. Click File > Settings. 3. In the General tab of the Report Writer Settings window, select either of the following as a default viewing mode: Preview displays the report as it will appear in printed form. For more information, see Preview Mode on page 226. Report Designer is the report creation and editing interface. For more information, see Design Mode on page 227.
Note: You can toggle between Preview and Report Designer modes at any time by clicking Preview or Design, respectively, on the toolbar. 4. If you want to separate the data for individual network objects with horizontal lines, click Report Style, and then check Display horizontal lines between each row. 5. Click OK to exit Report Writer Settings.
Preview Mode
Preview mode shows a report as it will print. When you open a report in Preview mode, or switch to Preview mode from Design mode, Orion runs the query to generate the report, and then Report Writer displays the results. The Preview window toolbar provides the following actions and information:
Current page number and total number of pages in the report. Page navigation buttons: First Page, Page Up, Page Down, and Last Page Zoom views Note: Double-click a preview to zoom in and double-right-click to zoom out. Print report
Design Mode
Use Design mode to create new reports and modify or rename existing reports. The options available for both creating and modifying reports are the same. Design mode options are also dynamic, based upon the type of report, included report data, and report presentation. Available options differ according to the type of report that you are designing, but all reports require that you select the data to include and decide how that data will be sorted, ordered, filtered, and presented.
Creating and Modifying Reports

Use the following procedure to modify or create reports in Report Writer. To open a report with Report Writer: 1. If you want to modify an existing report, click an existing report from the inventory in the left pane of the main Report Writer window. 2. If you want to create a new report, click File > New Report, select the type of report that you would like to create, and then click OK. Each report offers different configuration options, so, depending on the report, some formatting tabs described in the following sections may not be available. Notes: The SQL query used to generate a report may be viewed in an additional tab. Click Report > Show SQL to add a read-only SQL tab to the Design window. A preview of your report is also available at any time. Click Preview to enter Preview Mode, and then click Design to return to Design Mode.
General Options Tab

The General tab opens by default and shows titling and display options. To configure General options:
1. Specify the Report Group, Report Title, Subtitle, and Description. Note: If you use an existing report group name, the new report is added to that existing group in the left pane of the main window. 2. Select the display Orientation of your report. 3. If you are configuring an historical report and you do not want to group data by days, clear Group historical data by days. Note: By default, data in some availability and historical reports is grouped by days when displayed in the Orion Web Console. Data grouping by days is not viewable in Report Viewer. 4. If you do not want to make this report available on your Orion Web Console, clear Make this Report available from the Orion website. Note: By default, most reports are made available for display in the Orion Web Console. For more information about adding reports to Orion Web Console views, see Customizing Views on page 111.
Select Fields Options Tab

The Select Fields tab allows you to select the data fields in a report. To select and configure fields: 1. Click Select Fields. 2. If you are creating a new report or adding fields to an existing report, click the ellipsis, select Add a new field, and then dynamically define each new report field as follows: a. Click the asterisk after Field:. b. Select the type of information to include in the current report field. c. If you want to sort the data in the current field, click the sort asterisk and select a sort order. d. If you want to perform an operation on the data in the current field, click the function asterisk and select an operation. 3. If you are modifying an existing report, click the Field, sort, or function that you want to change and select a new value as follows. a. Click the asterisk after Field:. b. Select the type of information to include in the current report field. c. If you want to sort the data in the current field, click the sort asterisk and select a sort order.
d. If you want to perform an operation on the data in the current field, click the function asterisk and select an operation. 4. If you want to test your selections as you assemble your report, click Execute SQL Query to view the current query results. 5. If you want to delete a field or rearrange the order of the fields that are listed in your report, select a field, click Browse (), and then select the appropriate action. Note: Unchecked fields are not displayed in your report, but their sort and function configurations are retained. 6. If you want to preview your report, click Preview.
Filter Results Options Tab

The Filter Results tab allows you to generate filter conditions for field data by selecting appropriate descriptors from the linked context menus. Results filters are configured as follows. To configure results filters: 1. Click Browse (), and then select from the following options: Select Add a new elementary condition to generate a condition that is based on a direct comparison of network object data fields. Select Add a new advanced elementary condition to generate a condition based on a comparison of device data fields and values. Select Add a new complex condition to define a condition that filters other defined conditions. Select Delete current condition to remove a selected condition. Select Move current condition forward or Move current condition backward to change the order of your conditions accordingly.
Note: The lists of available linked descriptors are dynamically generated in consideration of all other variables within the same condition. For more information about condition groups and their application, see Understanding Condition Groups on page 191. 2. Check or clear individual filter conditions to enable or disable their application, respectively, to your report.
Top XX Records Options Tab

The Top XX tab allows you to limit the number of records that are shown in your report to either a top number or a top percentage of all results. Top XX options are configured as shown in the following procedure. To configure Top XX records: 1. If you want to show all records in your report, select Show All Records. 2. If you want to specify a truncated list of eligible items for your report, complete the following steps: a. select either Show only the Top number Records or Show the Top percentage % of Records b. Provide appropriate number or percentage values.
Time Frame Options Tab

The Time Frame options tab allows you to limit the scope of your report to a specific period of time. To configure Time Frame options, select a Named, Relative, or Specific Time Frame for your report, and then select or provide required values. Notes: If you receive a SQL Timeout error message, you may edit the timeout setting in the SWNetPerfMon.db file. By default, this file is located in the C:\Program Files\SolarWinds\Orion directory Since the Relative Time Frame is continuously variable, reports run with it may show different results, even if they are run close together in time.
Summarization Options Tab

The Summarization tab allows you to generate summaries of your results over specific periods of time. Summarization options are configured as follows. To configure results summarization: 1. If you do not want to summarize your results, confirm that Do not Summarize the Results is selected. 2. If you want to summarize your results, complete the following steps: a. Select Summarize the Results by Hour, Date, Month, etc, and then select the summarization period. b. Specify the location of the summary field for your report.
c. Select a location for the Summary Date/Time field.
Report Grouping Options Tab

The Report Grouping tab allows you to group results by field descriptor within your report. Add, edit and delete report groups to organize the data in your report. Establish and edit report groups as follows. To add and edit report groups: 1. If you want to add a new report group, select a field from the list to define your group, and then click Add Report Group to add your selected field to the Report Groups list. Note: Use up and down arrows to change the grouping order accordingly. 2. If you want to edit an existing report group, select the field from the Report Groups list, and then click Edit Report Group. 3. The following options may be changed as needed: The Group Header is the text that designates groups on your report. The Web URL is the dynamic location of your published report with respect to your Orion Web Console. Font size, face, color, and background may all be modified by clicking associated ellipses. Alignment may be left, center, or right. Check Transparent Background for better results when publishing your report to the Web. If you want to change the grouping order, use the up and down arrows to change the grouping order accordingly.
Field Formatting Options Tab

The Field Formatting tab allows you to customize the format of the various results fields in your report. To format results fields, select the field you want to format, and then edit labels and select options as appropriate. Notes: The formatting options available for each field may be different according to the nature of the data contained in that field. Check Hidden Field to hide any field in your report. To view your changes at any time, click Preview.
Customizing the Report Header and Footer Image

The image that is displayed at the top and bottom of each report can be changed. To add your company logo as the report header and footer, save your logo as Header.jpg in the SolarWinds\Common\WebResources folder, typically located in C:\Program Files\, and then click Refresh. Note: The image must be in JPEG format with a height of 150 pixels or less.
Exporting Reports
Orion Report Writer gives you the ability to present your created reports in any of the following industry-standard formats: Comma-delimited (*.csv, *.cdf) Text (*.txt) HTML (*.htm, *.html) MIME HTML, with embedded images (*.mhtml) Excel spreadsheet (*.xls) Adobe PDF (*.pdf) Image (*.gif)
The following procedure presents the steps required to export an open report from Orion Report Writer into any of the previously listed formats. To export a report from Report Writer: 1. Select a report to export by clicking any of the following: Select a report from the file tree in the left pane File > Open to open an existing report File > New Report to create a new report. For more information about creating reports, see Creating and Viewing Reports on page 219.
2. Select File > Export and then click the format in which you want to export your report: 3. Check the fields in your open report that you want to export into the selected format, and then click OK. 4. Select a location to save your file. 5. Provide a File name, and then click Save.
Example Report
The following procedure generates an example report of network device availability information over the previous week. The final report is sorted so that the worst errors are viewed first. Down nodes that are still down are at the top with all devices listed in order of increasing availability. Note: At any point during the creation of a report (or perhaps at many points), you may save what you have done by clicking File > Save. The first time you save you must give your report a filename or accept the default, which will be the report title that you assign in the following procedure. To generates an example report of network device availability information: 1. Click File > New Report. 2. The example calls for a report on availability over the past week, so select Historical Availability Details, and then click OK. 3. Type My Reports in the Report Group field. 4. Enter Last Weeks Availability as the Report Title. 5. Select Portrait for the paper orientation. 6. Click Select Fields. 7. Click the ellipsis, and then select Add a new field. 8. Click the Field asterisk, and then select Network Nodes > Node Details > Node Name. 9. Click the ellipsis, and then select Add a new field. 10. Click the Field asterisk, and then select Network Nodes > Node Status > Status. 11. Click the ellipsis, and then select Add a new field. 12. Click the Field asterisk, and then select Network Nodes > Node Status > Status Icon. Note: While this field makes a distinct visual difference for a report viewed in color, it will make little or no difference if printed in black and white. 13. Click Execute SQL Query to view the report data in the preview window. 14. If you want to see the status icon before the status description, click Status Icon to move Browse () to the Status Icon line, and select Move Current Field Backward.
15. Click Execute SQL Query. Note: The report should show information about both current and historical status. Current status entries must be relabeled to avoid confusion. 16. Click Field Formatting. 17. Select Status from the field list. 18. Change the Column Header entry to Current Status. 19. Select Status_Icon from the field list. 20. Change the Column Header entry to Current Status. 21. Click Execute SQL Query. Note: Column widths are adjustable. To change a column width, place your cursor on the column divider and drag it to a different position. 22. Click Select Fields. 23. Click the sort asterisk on the Status field line, and then select descending. 24. Click Execute SQL Query to confirm your choice. 25. Click the ellipsis, and then select Add a new field. 26. Click the Field asterisk, and then select Historical Response Time and Availability > Availability. 27. Click the sort asterisk on the new line, and then select ascending. 28. Click Execute SQL Query to view the report. 29. Click Time Frame. 30. Select Relative Time Frame, type 7 in the text field, and then select Days from the list. 31. If you want to break down the report day-by-day, click Summarization and specify your choices. 32. If you want to filter your report, click Filter Results and specify filter rules. 33. Click File > Save to save your work.
Using Orion Report Scheduler

Orion provides the Orion Report Scheduler to configure reports for automatic generation and distribution.
Creating a Scheduled Report Job

The following procedure creates a scheduled report job for regularly printed or emailed Orion reports.
To schedule a report: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Reports. 3. Click + as required to locate the report you want to schedule. 4. Click the name of the report you want to schedule. 5. Copy the URL of the report you want to schedule. 6. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Orion Report Scheduler. 7. Click Edit > Add New Job. 8. Provide an appropriate job name for this scheduled report, and then click Continue. 9. Paste the URL of the report you want to schedule into the link field. 10. If you need to provide Windows login credentials to view the report you are scheduling, click the NT Account login tab, and then provide the user account details needed to log in. 11. If you want to create a printable report that excludes the Orion Web Console banner and menu bar, on the Orion Web Login tab, check Retrieve a Printable Version of this Page. 12. If the report you are scheduling requires an Orion user account, on the Orion Web Login tab, check Send Orion Username / Password in URL, and then provide the required user credentials to view the Orion report. 13. Click Continue. 14. Configure the scheduling for your report job, and then click Continue. 15. If you want to email the report, complete the following procedure: a. Confirm that either Email the Web Page (as HTML) or Email the Web Page (as PDF) are selected, and then click Continue. b. Provide required email addresses and a subject in the appropriate fields on the Email To tab. c. Provide a name and reply address on the Email From tab. d. On the SMTP Server tab, type the hostname or IP address and confirm the port number of the server used to send email from the Orion server. e. Click Continue. 16. If you want to print the report, complete the following steps:
a. Select Print the Web Page, and then click Continue. b. Select the Printer, Orientation, and number of Copies you want to print. c. Click Continue. 17. Enter the user name and password for the Windows account that will email the report. 18. Click Continue. 19. Add any additional comments or notes about this job, and then click Finish.
Using Orion Report Scheduler with HTTPS

If you are using HTTPS to view reports in the Orion Web Console, your HTTPS server may require the Orion Report Scheduler to provide a trusted certificate before the requested report may be printed or sent. To use Orion Report Scheduler with HTTPS, either provide valid certificates to all users accounts requesting reports from the HTTPS server using Orion Report Scheduler or disable certificate checking in each of the browsers used by your Orion Report Scheduler users, as shown in the following procedure. To disable certificate checking: 1. If you are configuring Internet Explorer, complete the following steps: a. Open Internet Explorer on the user computer. b. Click Tools > Internet Options, and then click the Advanced tab. c. In the Security section, confirm that the following options are cleared: Check for publishers certificate revocation Check for server certificate revocation (requires restart) Warn about invalid site certificates
d. Click OK. 2. If you are configuring Mozilla Firefox, complete the following steps: a. Open Mozilla Firefox on the user computer. b. Click Tools > Options. c. Click Advanced, and then click the Encryption tab. d. In the Protocols area, clear both Use SSL 3.0 and Use TLS 1.0.
e. In the Certificates area, select Select one automatically, and then click Validation. f. Clear the option Use the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) to confirm the current validity of certificates, and then click OK.
Reports and Account Limitations

Reports created with Orion Report Writer respect Orion Web Console account limitations. For security, by default, reports are not available to users with limited accounts unless an Orion administrator specifically provides access. The following procedure creates a reports folder for an account-limited user and configures the account-limited user to access Orion reports from it. Note: For more information about creating user accounts, see Creating New Accounts on page 165. For more information about applying account limitations to user accounts, see Setting Account Limitations on page 167. To allow account-limited users access to reports: 1. Open the Orion Reports folder. Note: All reports created or predefined in Orion Report Writer are, by default, stored, in C:\Program Files\Solarwinds\Orion\Reports. 2. Create a new folder using the name of the account-limited user. 3. Copy the reports you want the account-limited user to see from the Orion Reports folder into the new, account-limited user folder. 4. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 5. Log in to the Orion Web Console as an administrator. 6. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. 7. Click Account Manager in the Accounts grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 8. Select the account-limited user, and then click Edit. 9. In the Default Menu Bar and Views section, select the Report Folder you created in the Orion Reports folder for the account-limited user. 10. Click Submit.
Chapter 15
Creating Custom Properties

All Orion product installations have access to the Custom Property Editor, which allows you to add a custom property to any monitored device. Custom properties are additional fields, such as country, building, asset tag, or serial number, that you can define and store in your Orion database. After properties are added, they are available for display and filtering both within the Orion Web Console and within the Report Writer application. A few more examples of how custom properties may be used are as follows:
Add information to nodes, such as contact, owner, or support contract. Add a custom property that is used as an account limitation on nodes. Add a custom property to nodes for grouping them on the web or in a report. Add a custom property and display it as an annotation on a chart.
Custom Property Editor lets you choose from a provided collection of the most commonly used properties, or you can easily and efficiently build your own custom properties. For more information, see Creating a Custom Property on page 239. Once your custom property is defined, the Import Wizard allows you to populate your new property from either a text- or comma-delimited file. For more information, see Importing Custom Property Data on page 241. Alternatively, if you only have a few individual changes or additions, you may choose to make those changes using the Edit view. For more information, see Editing Custom Properties on page 242.
Creating a Custom Property

The following procedure provides steps required to create a custom property using the Custom Property Editor. To create a property with Custom Property Editor: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Grouping and Access Control > Custom Property Editor. 2. Click Add Custom Property. 3. If you want to add predefined properties, complete the following procedure: a. Select Add Predefined Properties. b. Check Show Advanced Properties to view additional predefined properties. c. Check the properties you want to add, and then click OK. 4. If you want to generate a completely new custom property, complete the following procedure:
a. Select Build a Custom Property from scratch. b. Select the Orion database table to which you want to add the new custom property. c. Provide the new Property Name. Notes: To ensure full custom property functionality, do not leave the Property Name field empty. Although most non-alphanumeric characters used in custom property names are replaced by underscores (_) when names are stored in the Orion database, SolarWinds recommends against using non-alphanumeric characters in custom property names. Hash characters (#) are not allowed in any property name.
d. Select the Property Type. e. Enter a Max. Text length. Note: Regardless of the value provided in this field, Orion does not support custom properties defined with more than 4000 characters. f. Click OK.
Removing a Custom Property

Custom properties are easily removed using the Custom Property Editor, as shown in the following procedure. To remove a custom property: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Grouping and Access Control > Custom Property Editor. 2. Click Properties > Remove Custom Properties. 3. Check each property you want to remove. 4. If you are satisfied with your selections, click OK.
Importing Custom Property Data

Once you have defined custom properties, the Custom Property Editor Import tool assists in populating the custom property data. For example, you may already possess a spreadsheet listing the asset tags of all your network nodes, and you would like to have this information available for reporting and publication in the web console. In this scenario, Asset Tag is added as a custom property, and then the import wizard is used to populate the asset tag values from the spreadsheet. The following steps outline the process for importing custom properties data. For more information, see Creating Custom Properties on page 238. To import custom property data: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Grouping and Access Control > Custom Property Editor. 2. Click File > Import, and then select Import from Comma Delimited File or Import from Text File as appropriate. 3. Navigate to the file that contains your custom property data. 4. Select the file that contains your custom property data, and then click Open. 5. Select the delimiter that separates the data in your file. 6. If your data file contains a header row, check First row contains field names. 7. Specify the characters that may surround text fields in your file. 8. Click Next. 9. Select the data table that has the custom properties into which you want to import your data. 10. Click Next. 11. Use the drop down menus to select the key field from your file on the left and the corresponding field of the table on the right. Note: Depending on your file data, you may need to specify multiple key fields so that the import wizard properly matches your data to the table fields. 12. Click Next. 13. Specify the fields from your file on the left that you want to import by clicking corresponding blank cell on the right, and then select the target field that you want your data field to populate. Note: Click the cell to enable a menu. Use the menu items to select the target field that you want your data to populate.
14. If you have specified all cell matches between your data and the Orion database, click Import. 15. If your import is successful, confirm the count of successfully imported rows, and then click OK.
Custom Property Editor Settings

The Custom Property Editor Settings window allows you to customize the display for nodes and volumes. Note: Orion Network Performance Monitor users may also customize the display for interfaces. To configure Custom Property Editor settings: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Grouping and Access Control > Custom Property Editor. 2. Click File > Settings. 3. Click Node Editing and check the system properties you want to see in the Edit Node Properties window. Repeat for Volume Editing. 4. If you want to enable Auto-Search, click Auto-Search, and then check Enable Auto-Search. Note: With Auto-Search enabled, the current column is searched as you type. Select a cell and then press Enter to edit its contents. With AutoSearch disabled, typing will begin editing the cell.
Editing Custom Properties

The Custom Property Editor allows you to easily modify custom properties. Note: Orion Network Performance Monitor users may also edit custom properties for interfaces. To edit a custom property: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Grouping and Access Control > Custom Property Editor. 2. Click Properties > Edit Object Properties, where Object is Node or Volume, as appropriate. 3. Click the cells in the table that you want to edit, and then enter or modify the cell contents, as necessary.
4. If you want to create or edit a filter for your custom properties, click No Active Filter or Filter Active, and then define the filter that you want to apply. For more information, see Using Filters in Edit View on page 243. 5. If you are satisfied with your edits, click OK.
Using Filters in Edit View

Filtering is available in the Edit Custom Properties windows for all devices, and you can apply filters to manipulate available data views. Custom Property Editor allows you to edit the text within custom property fields to which a filter is applied. The following procedures show how to use filters within Custom Property Editor.
Creating Custom Properties Filters

The following procedure creates a custom properties filter. Note: Orion Network Performance Monitor users may also create filters for interface custom properties. To create a filter: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Grouping and Access Control > Custom Property Editor. 2. Click Properties > Edit Object Properties, where Object is Node or Volume, as appropriate. 3. Click Filter Active or No Active Filter, and then click Apply Filter. Note: The text of the Filter Active / No Active Filter button changes dynamically, indicating the filter status for the currently viewed data. 4. Click the hyperlinked text to select the appropriate criteria. 5. Click the ellipsis, and then select from the following options: Note: The lists of available linked descriptors are dynamically generated in consideration of all other variables within the same condition. For more information, see Understanding Condition Groups on page 191.Click Browse () to select a condition type. Select Add a new elementary condition to generate a condition that is based on a direct comparison of network object data fields. Select Add a new advanced elementary condition to generate a condition based on a comparison of device data fields and values. Select Add a new complex condition to define a condition that filters other defined conditions.
Select Delete current condition to remove a selected condition. Select Move current condition forward or Move current condition backward to change the order of your conditions accordingly.
6. Continue to click hyperlinked text and use the cascading menus to select filtering criteria. 7. If you have completed the configuration of your filter, click OK. Note: The Edit Object Properties view changes, based upon the selected filter, and the text of the Filter Active / No Active Filter now displays Filter Active, indicating that the filter is being applied to the currently viewed properties.
Removing Custom Properties Filters

The following procedure removes a custom properties filter. Note: Orion Network Performance Monitor users may also remove filters for interface custom properties. To remove a filter: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Grouping and Access Control > Custom Property Editor. 2. Click Properties > Edit Object Properties, where Object is Node or Volume, as appropriate. 3. Click Filter Active, and then click Remove Filter. Note: The Edit Object Properties view now displays all custom properties.
Chapter 16
Creating Account Limitations

The Account Limitation Builder application allows you to create and customize account limitations for the Orion Web Console. These limitations ensure that users of the web console can only view the network objects that are pertinent to their job duties. The following are but a few examples of the uses of account limitation in the Orion Web Console: Limit customer views to specific network nodes Limit views by department or functional area Limit views by device type or device role Limit views based on the geographic location of devices
Orion provides predefined account limitations that use built-in Orion property to limit user access. For greater flexibility, however, you can use the Account Limitation Builder to create your own account limitations based on predefined or custom properties. For more information about enabling account limitations in the Orion Web Console, see Setting Account Limitations on page 167. For more information about custom properties, see Creating Custom Properties on page 238.
Using the Account Limitation Builder

Before you can use the Account Limitation Builder, you must have first created the custom property that you want to use to limit the Web Console view. For more information, see Creating Custom Properties on page 238. After you have defined custom properties and populated them with data, you may use the Account Limitations Builder as directed in the following procedure.
Creating an Account Limitation

The following steps create an account limitation. To create an account limitation: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Grouping and Access Control > Account Limitation Builder. 2. Click Start on the splash screen. 3. Click Edit > Add Limitation.
Creating Account Limitations 245
4. Select a Custom Property. Notes: If Custom Property is empty, you need to define a custom property. For more information, see Creating Custom Properties on page 238. The remaining boxes are populated automatically, based upon your selection.
5. Choose a Selection Method. Note: This is the selection format that will appear when you are choosing values for the account limitation through the web Account Manager. For more information, see Setting Account Limitations on page 167. 6. If you want to include your own description of your account limitation, type your description over the default text provided in the Description field. 7. Click OK. Your newly defined account limitation is added to the top of the table view. You may now use the new limitation in the Orion Web Console Account Manager. For more information, see Setting Account Limitations on page 167.
Deleting an Account Limitation

The following steps delete an account limitation using the Account Limitation Builder utility. To delete an account limitation: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Grouping and Access Control > Account Limitation Builder. 2. Click Start on the splash screen. 3. Click the row of the limitation that you want to delete. Note: Use Shift+click to highlight multiple consecutive rows or Ctrl+Click to highlight multiple non-consecutive rows. 4. Click Edit > Delete Selected Limitations. Note: Although Orion deletes the selected limitations from the table, ensuring that they will no longer be available through the web Account Manager, if you delete a limitation using the Account Limitation Builder, all accounts that have been assigned that limitation will remain limited. Deleting a limitation simply makes it unavailable for future use in the Orion Web Console.
246 Creating Account Limitations
Chapter 17
Managing the Orion Database

All Orion network monitoring and management products use a Microsoft SQL Server database to store web console settings and collected network performance and configuration data. The following database utilities are packaged with Orion products to help you manage your Orion database. Database Manager Allows you to perform queries, edit database values, export data, and perform database repair and compaction on your Orion database. For more information, see Using Database Manager on page 247. Database Maintenance Allows you to summarize, clean, and compact your Orion database. For more information, see Database Maintenance on page 257. The database Orion uses is hosted on a Microsoft SQL Server. When installing SQL Server, you have the option of installing the SQL Server Management Studio. If you are the database administrator for the SQL Server hosting your Orion database, SolarWinds generally recommends that you install this utility as it provides a number of features that are not currently available in the Orion Database Manager. For more information, see Using SQL Server Management Studio on page 254. Note: Orion Network Configuration Manager maintains its own additional database for device configurations and user activity logging.
Using Database Manager

The Database Manager can be used to perform queries, view database and table details, export data, and edit database values. You may also repair, compact, restore, or backup the database from the Database Manager application. The following procedures present some of the basic database management operations that are available with Database Manager.
Adding a Server
If you have not already designated a database for use with Orion as a backup or supplement, use the following steps to add a SQL server to the Database Manager. Once added, your selected server and associated databases display in the tree structure in the left pane of Database Manager.
Managing the Orion Database 247
To add a SQL server to Database Manager: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager. 2. Click File > Add Server. 3. Select from the SQL Server list or enter the IP address of the SQL server. 4. Select the login style. Note: You may choose to Log in using Windows NT Integrated Security to automatically pass the Windows user ID and password to the SQL server, or select Log in using an SQL Server userid and password to use a separate login. Upon selecting the latter option, the window changes to provide fields to enter the separate SQL Server User Name and Password that you want to use. 5. Click Connect to Database Server.
Creating Database Backups

You should periodically back-up your SQL databases. For more information about scheduling regular database backups, see Creating a Database Maintenance Plan on page 253. The following procedure is used to back-up your databases in Database Manager. To back-up a database in Database Manager: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager. 2. If the SQL Server hosting your Orion database is not listed in the left pane, you must add the SQL Server hosting your Orion database. For more information, see Adding a Server on page 247. 3. Click + to expand the SQL Server hosting your Orion database.. 4. Right-click the name of the database you want to back-up, and then click Backup Database. 5. Provide a Description of the database backup. 6. Specify a path for the Backup Filename either by clicking Browse () and navigating to the location or by entering the path directly. Note: Typically, the default backup location for an Orion database is designated as C:\Program Files\SolarWinds\. Ensure that the target location for the database backup has sufficient available disk space. 7. Select either Append to the end of the Backup File or Overwrite Backup File, as appropriate, and then click OK.
248 Managing the Orion Database
Restoring a Database
The following steps restore a database that you have backed up. To restore a database from backup: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager. 2. If the SQL Server hosting your Orion database is not listed in the left pane, you must add the SQL Server hosting your Orion database. For more information, see Adding a Server on page 247. 3. Click + in the left pane to expand the SQL Server hosting your Orion database, and then click your Orion database. 4. Click Database > Restore Database. 5. Click Browse () to navigate to the database that you want to restore, or enter a valid SQL backup database name and path. Note: Typically, the default location for an Orion database backup is C:\Program Files\SolarWinds\. 6. Click Verify to ensure that you have selected a valid SQL database. Notes: When you select a database, the remaining fields are completed for you. The Database Name field is populated with the name that SQL Server uses to refer to the specified database. The remaining two fields display the data (.mdf) and transaction log (.ldf) files for the database. You can change the values provided. Database Manager does not create directories. You may only specify a path that already exists. You also cannot restore a database that is currently in use.
7. Click OK to restore the selected database.
Compacting your Database

Compacting a database shrinks it, reindexes it, and removes whitespace. You can compact a database by performing the following steps. To compact a database with Database Manager: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager.
2. If the SQL Server hosting your Orion database is not listed in the left pane, you must add the SQL Server hosting your Orion database. For more information, see Adding a Server on page 247. 3. Click + in the left pane to expand the SQL Server hosting your Orion database, and then click your Orion database. 4. Click Database > Compact Database. Note: Upon completion, Database Manager displays a window comparing the size of the database before and after compaction. If the sizes are the same, there may not be enough free space in the database to rearrange data.If you need to free up more space for database compaction to occur, see Compacting Individual Tables on page 250.
Compacting Individual Tables

If you are not able to perform a full database compaction due to limited server disk space, you can compact database tables individually, using the Database Manager application, as shown in the following procedure. To compact individual tables: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager. 2. If the SQL Server hosting your Orion database is not listed in the left pane, you must add the SQL Server hosting your Orion database. For more information, see Adding a Server on page 247. 3. Click + in the left pane to expand the SQL Server hosting your Orion database, and then click your Orion database. Note: NetPerfMon is the default name of the Orion database. 4. Click a table to compact in the expanded database, and then click Table > Compact/Rebuild Indexes.
Viewing Database Details

The Database Details window in Database Manager presents two tabs that display property and tables information about a selected database. The following procedure is a guide to the information that is available in the Database Details window. To view database details:
1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager. 2. If the SQL Server hosting your Orion database is not listed in the left pane, you must add the SQL Server hosting your Orion database. For more information, see Adding a Server on page 247. 3. Click + in the left pane to expand the SQL Server hosting your Orion database, and then click your Orion database. Note: NetPerfMon is the default name of the Orion database. 4. Click Database > Database Details. Notes: The Properties tab provides general statistics and descriptions of the selected database. The Tables tab shows a list of the tables in the selected database and their respective sizes.
5. If the Last Backup field on the Properties tab is blank, you have not generated a backup of the selected database. For more information about scheduling a recommended regular database backup, see Creating a Database Maintenance Plan on page 253.
Viewing Table Details

The Database Manager Table Details window provides property, column, and index information about the selected table. You can also query the selected table directly from the Table Details window., as shown in the following procedure. To view table details: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager. 2. If the SQL Server hosting your Orion database is not listed in the left pane, you must add the SQL Server hosting your Orion database. For more information, see Adding a Server on page 247. 3. Click + in the left pane to expand the SQL Server hosting your Orion database, and then click + to expand your Orion database. Note: NetPerfMon is the default name of the Orion database. 4. Click a table to view in the expanded database.
5. Click Table > Table Details. Note: The Properties tab includes general statistics relating to the table size and creation date; the Columns tab describes the columns in the table, table keys, and field types; and the Indexes tab lists indexes used within the table. 6. If you want to query the open table, click Query in the tool bar. Warning: Special care should be taken while editing database values as you can easily compromise the integrity of your database. For more information, see Editing Database Fields on page 252. Note: A default SQL statement is provided, as well as radio buttons for displaying the data in read or read/write view.
Editing Database Fields

Database fields may be edited within the Database Manager application from the query view. The following procedure directs you in editing database fields in Orion Database Manager. Warning: Be very careful when you are editing database values, as you can jeopardize the integrity of your database. To edit database fields with Database Manager: 1. Stop the SolarWinds Network Performance Monitor service as follows: a. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Orion Service Manager b. Click SolarWinds Network Performance Monitor under Services, and then click Stop. 2. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager. 3. If the SQL Server hosting your Orion database is not listed in the left pane, you must add the SQL Server hosting your Orion database. For more information, see Adding a Server on page 247. 4. Click + in the left pane to expand the SQL Server hosting your Orion database, and then click + to expand your Orion database. Note: NetPerfMon is the default name of the Orion database. 5. Click a table to view in the expanded database. 6. Click Table > Query Table. 7. Use the provided SQL statement or enter your own in the query field. 8. If you want to view the query results in table view, click Refresh.
9. If you want to edit table fields, select Read/Write at the top of the window, and then edit fields as necessary. 10. If you use the same SQL query often, you can save time by making the query a favorite, as follows: a. Enter the query in the query field. b. Click Add to Favorites. c. Enter a name for the command, and then click OK. Note: Database Manager saves the command with the name that you have provided. You can now use this command again, directly, by clicking Paste from Favorites.
Detaching a Database
Detaching a database removes its reference from the SQL Server, allowing you to safely move files to different locations. Database Manager allows you to detach a database and leave the data files of a database intact, as shown in the following procedure. Note: SolarWinds does not recommend using the Detach Database option to migrate a database from one SQL Server to another. For more information, see Migrating your Database on page 257. To detach a database: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager. 2. If the SQL Server hosting your Orion database is not listed in the left pane, you must add the SQL Server hosting your Orion database. For more information, see Adding a Server on page 247. 3. Click + in the left pane to expand the SQL Server hosting your Orion database, and then click your Orion database. Note: NetPerfMon is the default name of the Orion database. 4. Click Database > Detach Database from the menu.
Creating a Database Maintenance Plan

Using Database Manager, you can create a database maintenance plan that will automatically compact and backup the database on a scheduled basis. As a security and information integrity issue, it is very important to regularly back-up your databases. Database Manager allows you to do this easily, using the following steps.
Note: SQL Server Agent must be running to execute database maintenance. To create a database maintenance plan for your database: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager. 2. If the SQL Server hosting your Orion database is not listed in the left pane, you must add the SQL Server hosting your Orion database. For more information, see Adding a Server on page 247. 3. Click + in the left pane to expand the SQL Server hosting your Orion database, and then click your Orion database. Note: NetPerfMon is the default name of the Orion database. 4. Click Database > Database Backup Schedule. 5. Select to run the backup either once a Day or once a Week. 6. If you to want to run the backup once a week, choose the Backup Day. 7. Set the Backup Time. 8. Click Next. 9. If you want to compact and shrink the database before the backup, check Compact and Shrink Database before Backup. Note: SolarWinds recommends both that you perform database compaction weekly and that you compact and shrink databases before backups. 10. Enter the path to the directory where you would like to place backup files or click Browse () and then navigate to an appropriate directory. 11. If you want to keep backup reports, check Generate a backup report each time the backup Job runs, and then enter the path to the directory where you would like to Place Backup reports or click Browse () and then navigate to an appropriate directory. 12. Click Finish.
Using SQL Server Management Studio

If you have a licensed, Standard or Enterprise Edition copy of SQL Server 2005 or 2008 with SQL Server Management Studio installed, you can use it to maintain your Orion database. The following procedure is a basic guide to configuring a daily Orion database maintenance plan in SQL Server Management Studio. Notes:
Your specific environment may require additional configuration. You may need to contact your database administrator to gain access to SQL Server Management Studio for your Orion database. The following procedure clears historical maintenance records and creates a backup of your Orion database. In general, however, SolarWinds recommends that you contact your database administrator and reference the Microsoft documentation provided with SQL Server for instructions on using SQL Server Management Studio to manage your Orion database.
To use SQL Server Management Studio to manage your Orion database: 1. Click Start > Microsoft SQL Server > SQL Server Management Studio. 2. Click View > Object Explorer. 3. Expand the SQL Server instance containing your Orion database in the Object Explorer pane on the left. Note: Expand the Databases folder for any instance to confirm included databases. By default, the Orion database is named NetPerfMon. 4. Expand the Management folder, right-click the Maintenance Plans folder, and then click Maintenance Plan Wizard. 5. Click Next to start the SQL Server Maintenance Plan Wizard. 6. Provide an appropriate Name and Description for your maintenance plan. 7. Click Browse () next to the Server field. 8. Check your SQL Server\Instance, and then click OK. Note: If your SQL Server\Instance is not in the list, provide it manually. 9. Select the authentication type that is used to connect to the SQL server, and, if required, provide appropriate User name and Password credentials. Note: Use the same authentication type and credentials you provided in the Orion Configuration Wizard to access your Orion database. 10. Check Clean Up History and Back Up Database (Full) Note: When a task is clicked, the Maintenance Plan Wizard provides a brief task description. 11. Click Next. 12. Set the order of task execution, top to bottom, by selecting tasks and clicking Move Up and Move Down as needed. Note: The following steps assume the Clean Up History task precedes the Back Up Database (Full) task. 13. Click Next when the task execution order is set.
14. On the Define Cleanup History Task view, check the types of historical data to delete, and then set the threshold age for historical data removal. 15. Click Next. 16. On the Database Back Up (Full) view, complete the following steps: a. Click the Databases field. b. Select These databases. c. Check your Orion database. 17. Click OK. 18. Select Database in the Backup component area. 19. In the Destination area, complete the following steps: a. Select Disk. b. Select Create a backup file for every database. c. Click Browse () to select an appropriate database backup file destination with sufficient free space. 20. Click Next. 21. On the Select Plan Properties view, click Change. 22. Configure the database maintenance job schedule as follows: a. Provide an appropriate Name for the new job schedule. b. Select Recurring as the Schedule type. c. Check Enabled, and then select Daily in the Occurs field. d. Provide an off-peak network usage time in the Occurs once at field. e. Select a Start date, and then select No end date. 23. Click OK. 24. Click Next. 25. Check Write a report to a text file. 26. Click Browse () to select an appropriate maintenance report file destination. 27. Review wizard results, and then click Finish. 28. When the wizard successfully finishes, click Close. For additional help with using SQL server Management Studio, visit the Microsoft Support Website at http://support.microsoft.com.
Database Maintenance
The primary tasks that are available for maintaining a SQL database are data summarization and database compaction. Data summarization occurs automatically as a part of the nightly maintenance program. You can also run database maintenance on demand from the System Manager or from the Windows Start menu.
Running Database Maintenance

Database maintenance performs a series of data summarizations that help you optimize the size of your Orion database. Data summarization consists of gathering all the collected network data for a defined period of time, calculating statistics from the data, and then discarding the data itself while retaining the statistics. By regularly running database maintenance, you can realize significant space savings and performance improvements. Database maintenance can either be run directly from the Start menu, or scheduled for a set Archive Time and initiated from the Orion Polling Settings view in the Orion Web Console. In either case, once started, database maintenance normally proceeds without further attention. For more information about setting the Archive Time for database maintenance on the Orion Polling Settings view, see Orion Polling Settings on page 173. The following procedure provides the steps to perform Database Maintenance: Note: Administrative privileges are required to run Database Maintenance. To run the Database Maintenance utility: 1. If you want to run database Maintenance from the Orion Web Console, complete the following steps: a. Click Settings in the top right of the web console. b. Click Poller Settings in the Settings group. c. Click Perform Maintenance Now in the Database Settings area. 2. If you want to run database Maintenance from the Start menu, click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Maintenance, and then click Start.
Migrating your Database

If you are modifying your Orion implementation to use a different database server, you can migrate data from one Orion database to another. Both the database from which you export data and the database into which you want to import data must be from the same version of Orion.
Warning: You will not lose Web Console customizations when you overwrite your website, unless you have manually overwritten or modified the HTML within the .asp pages. Note: Do not skip tabs or deviate from the tab order. Click Start, and then click Continue to complete the wizard in order. Completing tabs out of order may adversely affect the install process. For more information, see Preparing a SolarWinds on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. To export data from one Orion database and import it into another: 1. Connect to your database server with Database Manager. For more information, see Adding a Server on page 247. 2. Select your database, and then click Database > Backup Database. 3. Enter a Description of the database backup. 4. Enter a path or click Browse () and then navigate to a Backup Filename. 5. Click OK. 6. Copy the newly created backup file to a folder on the new server. Note: The backup file is named after your Orion database and given a .bak extension. For example, if you have designated OrionDB as the name of your Orion database, the backup is named OrionDB.bak. 7. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Database Manager. 8. Click Add Server. 9. Select the name of the SQL instance from the SQL Server list. If your server is not listed, complete the procedure in Adding a Server on page 247. 10. Select the appropriate authentication type, and then click Connect to Database Server. 11. Select your new server in the list, and then click Server > Connect to Server. 12. Click Server > Restore Database. 13. Enter the path to the database backup file on the server or click Browse () and then navigate to the location of the database backup file. 14. Click OK. 15. Close the Database Manager. 16. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Configuration and Auto-Discovery > Configuration Wizard.
17. Specify the newly restored database in the Database Setup section of the wizard. 18. When prompted, click Yes to use the existing database.
Chapter 18
Common Orion Tasks

The following chapter provides a number of common network monitoring and management scenarios for which Orion provides solutions.
Scheduling and Emailing Business Hours Reports

Orion Report Writer is a component available to all Orion products. Using Orion Report Writer with Orion Report Scheduler, you can create reports that you can then distribute as regularly scheduled emails. The following sections create and schedule for email delivery an example report of network node availability and response time during peak business hours.
Creating a Business Hours Report

The following procedure creates a monthly report of network node availability and response time during peak business hours, defined as between 7:00 AM and 7:00 PM. To create a business hours node availability and response time report: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Report Writer. 2. In the left pane, click Historical Response Time Reports > Response Time Last Month. 3. On the General tab, edit the Report Group, Report Title, and Description as appropriate. 4. On the Select Fields tab, click Browse (...), and then click Add a new field. 5. In the new field, click the Field asterisk (*), and then select Network Nodes > Historical Response Time and Availability > Availability. 6. On the Filter Results tab, click Browse (...), and then select Add a new elementary condition. 7. In the new field, click the first asterisk (*), and then select Date/Time (Response Time Filtering Only) > Time of Day (24 hour format). 8. Click is equal to, and then select greater or equal. 9. Click the second asterisk (*), and then enter the start time of your peak business hours in 24-hour hh:mm format (e.g. 07:00). 10. Click Browse (...), and then select Add a new elementary condition.
Common Orion Tasks 261
11. Click the first asterisk (*), and then select Date/Time (Response Time Filtering Only) > Time of Day (24 hour format). 12. Click is equal to, and then select less. 13. Click the second asterisk (*), and then enter the end time of your peak business hours in 24-hour hh:mm format (e.g. 19:00). 14. Click Browse (...), and then select Add a new elementary condition. 15. Click the first asterisk (*), and then select Date/Time (Response Time Filtering Only) > Day of Week. 16. Click is equal to, and then select not equal. 17. Click the second asterisk (*), and then select Saturday. 18. Click Browse (...), and then select Add a new elementary condition. 19. Click the first asterisk (*), and then select Date/Time (Response Time Filtering Only) > Day of Week. 20. Click is equal to, and then select not equal. 21. Click the second asterisk (*), and then select Sunday. 22. On the Field Formatting tab, click AVERAGE of Average Response Time, and then append (ms) to Average Response Time in the Column Header field. 23. On the Field Formatting tab, click Max of Peak Response Time, and then append (ms) to Average Response Time in the Column Header field. 24. Click Preview on the right of the Report Designer pane. 25. Click File > Save. The report is now saved to the Reports folder on your Orion server, and it will display as a member of the Report Group designated on the General tab of the Report Designer.
Scheduling and Emailing a Report

The following procedure schedules a selected report for distribution using email. To schedule an emailed report: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Click Reports. 3. Click + as required to locate the report you want to schedule for email. 4. Click the name of the report you want to schedule for email.
262 Common Orion Tasks
5. Copy the URL of the report you want to schedule for email. 6. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Alerting, Reporting, and Mapping > Orion Report Scheduler. 7. Click Edit > Add New Job. 8. Provide an appropriate job name for this scheduled report email, and then click Continue. 9. Paste the URL of the report you want to schedule for email into the link field. 10. If you need to provide Windows login credentials to view the report you are scheduling, click the NT Account login tab, and then provide the user account details needed to log in. 11. If you want to create a printable report that excludes the Orion Web Console banner and menu bar, on the Orion Web Login tab, check Retrieve a Printable Version of this Page. 12. If the report you are scheduling requires an Orion user account, on the Orion Web Login tab, check Send Orion Username / Password in URL, and then provide the required user credentials to view the Orion report. 13. Click Continue. 14. Configure the scheduling for your report job, and then click Continue. 15. Confirm that either Email the Web Page (as HTML) or Email the Web Page (as PDF) are selected, and then click Continue. 16. Provide required email addresses and a subject in the appropriate fields on the Email To tab. 17. Provide a name and reply address on the Email From tab. 18. On the SMTP Server tab, type the hostname or IP address and confirm the port number of the server used to send email from the Orion server. 19. Click Continue. 20. Enter the user name and password for the local Windows account that will email the report, and then click Continue. 21. Add any additional comments or notes about this job, and then click Finish.
Creating Geographic or Departmental Views

Using groups, it is a straightforward process to create custom web console views displaying informaton about monitored objects distinguished by geographic or departmental location. The following procedures create custom views that are then populated with appropriate group-based resources.
Creating a Custom Group

The following procedure creates a custom group of monitored objects in a defined geographic location. To create a custom group: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Log in to the web console as an administrator. 3. Click Settings in the top right corner of the web console. 4. Click Manage Groups in the Node & Group Management grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 5. Click Add New Group. 6. Provide an appropriate Name and Description for the custom group. For example, a group named Austin could be described as, All monitored network objects in the Austin office. 7. Click Next. 8. In the Available Objects pane, check all monitored objects fitting the group definition. For example, using the example above, select all objects located in the Austin office. 9. Click Add to Group. 10. Select all monitored objects in the new group pane on the right, and then click Create Group. The new group of monitored objects located in the same geographic location is now listed on the Manage Groups view.
Creating a Custom View

The following procedure creates a custom view that will be used to display monitoring information g for devices in a selected group. To create a custom, group-based view: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 2. Log in to the web console as an administrator. 3. Click Settings in the top right corner of the web console. 4. Click Add New View in the Views grouping of the Orion Website Administration page. 5. In the Name of New View field, provide a name for the custom view.
6. In the Type of View selection field, select Group Details. 7. Click Submit. 8. If you want to change the column layout of your custom view, click Edit to the right of the column widths, and then configure the column layout of your view as follows: a. Select the number of columns under Layout. b. Provide the width, in pixels, of each column in the appropriate fields.. c. Click Submit. 9. Repeat the following steps for each resource added to your custom view: Notes: Resources already in your view will not be checked on this page, as it is a view of all web console resources. It is, therefore, possible to pick duplicates of resources you are already viewing. Several options on the Add Resources page are added to the list of resources for a page, but the actual configuration of a given map, link, or code is not added until the page is previewed. Some resources may require additional configuration. For more information, see Resource Configuration Examples on page 115.
a. Click + next to the column in which you want to add a resource. b. Click + next to a resource group on the Add Resources page to expand the resource group, displaying available resources. c. Check all resources you want to add. d. If you have completed the addition of resources to the selected view, click Submit. 10. If you want to delete a resource from a column, select the resource, and then click X next to the resource column to delete the selected resource. 11. If you want to copy a resource in a column, select the resource, and then click next to the resource column to delete the selected resource. 12. If you want to rearrange the order in which resources appear in your view, select resources, and then use the arrow keys to rearrange them. 13. If you have finished configuring your view, click Preview. Note: A preview of your custom web console displays in a new window. A message may display in the place of some resources if information for the resource has not been polled yet. For more information, see Resource Configuration Examples on page 115.
14. Close the preview window. 15. If you are satisfied with the configuration of your view, click Done. Notes: For more information about applying limitations to this custom view, see Configuring View Limitations on page 114. For more information about adding a custom view to menu bars as a custom item, see Customizing Web Console Menu Bars on page 127. For more information about assigning your custom view as the default view for a user, see Editing User Accounts on page 166.
Troubleshooting your Installation

For troubleshooting inquiries see the SolarWInds Knowledge Base: http://knowledgebase.solarwinds.com/kb/
Chapter 19
Orion Product Family

In addition to IPAM, the following sections provide more information about other individual products in the Orion family: Monitoring Network Performance (Orion NPM) Monitoring Network Application Data (Orion APM) Managing IP Service Level Agreements (Orion IP SLA Manager) Monitoring NetFlow Traffic Analysis Data (Orion NTA) Orion Scalability Engines Using an Orion Additional Web Server Orion Failover and Disaster Recovery
Monitoring Network Performance (Orion NPM)

Orion Network Performance Monitor (Orion NPM) delivers comprehensive fault and network performance management that scales with rapid network growth and expands with your network monitoring needs, allowing you to collect and view availability and realtime and historical statistics directly from your web browser. While monitoring, collecting, and analyzing data from routers, switches, firewalls, servers, and any other SNMP-enabled devices, Orion NPM successfully offers you a simple-to-use, scalable network monitoring solution for IT professionals juggling any size network. Orion NPM does not require a team of consultants and months of unpleasant surprises to get Orion NPM up and running because Orion NPM far more intuitive than conventionally complex enterprise network management systems. In less than an hour, you can have cost-effective, realtime visibility into the health of the devices on your network, ensuring that can keep your systems running at peak performance. Out of the box, Orion NPM monitors the following critical performance metrics for devices on your network: Network availability Bandwidth capacity utilization Buffer usage and errors CPU and memory utilization Interface errors and discards Network latency
Index 267
Node, interface, and volume status Volume usage
These monitoring capabilities, along with a fully customizable web-based interface, alerting, reporting engines, and flexible expansion capabilities, make SolarWinds Orion Common Components the easiest choice you will make involving your network performance monitoring needs. For more information about monitoring network performance with SolarWinds Orion Network Performance Monitor, see the SolarWinds Orion Application Monitor Administrator Guide at www.solarwinds.com.
Monitoring Network Application Data (Orion APM)

The Orion Application Performance Monitor (Orion APM) module provides focused application monitoring for network engineers, but it is much more than m erely up/down status checks and process monitoring. By allowing you to create and monitor your own custom collection of monitored components, Orion APM provides an open field of opportunity to the network engineer. With Orion APM you can focus monitoring on your core services while easily ensuring application outages do not originate in the network. Orion APM provides the following features to help: Network service monitoring General TCP port monitoring WMI and SNMP process monitoring Service monitoring User experience monitoring using HTTP or HTTPS content checking
Built on the proven capabilities and solid architecture of Orion Network Performance Monitor, you know your current needs will be met and, as your needs grow, both the Orion platform and the Orion APM module will scale with you. For more information about monitoring network applications with SolarWinds Orion Application Performance Monitor, see the SolarWinds Orion Application Monitor Administrator Guide at www.solarwinds.com.
Managing IP Service Level Agreements (Orion IP SLA Manager)

SolarWinds Orion IP Service Level Agreement (IP SLA) Manager is an Orion NPM module offering an easy-to-use, scalable IP SLA network monitoring solution that integrates seamlessly into the Orion Web Console.
268 Index
Why Install Orion IP SLA Manager

Internet Protocol Service Level Agreement (IP SLA) technology offers a cost-effective and efficient response to the needs of enterprises of all sizes. As a network manager, you face more than the simple question of whether your network is up or down. You need to know specific quality of service measures for your network, and you need to know them both historically and in realtime. Orion IP SLA Manager gives you the tools to quickly test your current network fitness and then determine and track quality of service on your network over time. Orion IP SLA Manager leverages the proven functionality of Orion NPM, adding a number of IP SLA-specific data collection and presentation tools that enable IP SLA network monitoring and realtime status reporting. Because it is a module of Orion NPM, Orion IP SLA Manager maintains the function of Orion NPM while allowing you to narrow your network management and monitoring focus to the IP SLA-capable devices of your wider network.
What Orion IP SLA Manager Does

Orion IP SLA Manager provides a full-featured solution that gives you the ability to monitor and report both realtime and historical performance statistics for your IP SLA-capable network. Orion IP SLA Manager offers the following features to help you manage your entire network. Quality of Service (QoS) Monitoring with Cisco IP SLA Operations Custom Charts and Gauges Custom Alerts and Actions Custom Reporting Call Manager Monitoring
For more information about Orion IP SLA Manager, see the SolarWinds Orion IP SLA Manager Administrator Guide at www.solarwinds.com.
Monitoring NetFlow Traffic Analysis Data (Orion NTA)

Orion NetFlow Traffic Analyzer (Orion NTA) is an Orion NPM module providing an easy-to-use, scalable network monitoring solution for IT professionals who are juggling any size Cisco NetFlow-enabled network. NetFlow-enabled Cisco routers and switches provide a wealth of IP-related traffic information. Orion NTA collects this NetFlow data, correlates the data into a useable format, and then provides this data, along with detailed network performance data collected by Orion NPM, as easily read graphs and reports on bandwidth use in and to your network. These reports help you monitor bandwidth, track conversations between internal and external endpoints, analyze traffic, and plan bandwidth capacity needs.
Index 269
Orion NTA also provides the same flow data analysis capabilities for devices using sFlow and J-flow packets. For more information about Orion NetFlow Traffic Analyzer, see the SolarWinds Orion NetFlow Traffic Analyzer Administrator Guide at www.solarwinds.com.
Orion Scalability Engines

Orion Scalability Engines allow you to scale the monitoring and management capabilities of your primary Orion installation as your enterprise network expands and your network management needs change. SolarWinds offers the following scalability engine options: Distribute polling across multiple servers with Additional Polling Engines. Both Orion APM and Orion NPM may be installed as primary Orion servers. For more information about installing an Additional Polling Engine for Orion APM or Orion NPM, see the SolarWinds Orion Application Performance Monitor Administrator Guide and the SolarWinds Orion Network Performance Monitor Administrator Guide, respectively. Enable more users to access the Orion Web Console with Orion Additional Web Servers. For more information, see Using an Orion Additional Web Server on page 270. Protect against monitoring outages with the Orion Failover Engine and Hot Standby Server. For more information, see Orion Failover and Disaster Recovery on page 273.
Using an Orion Additional Web Server

The Orion Additional Web Server enables remote access to the Orion Web Console on your primary Orion server. With an Additional Web Server installed, remote users can view the primary Orion Web Console without deploying an entire Orion installation or excessively taxing the resources of your primary Orion server. The following procedure installs the Orion Additional Web Server. To install an Orion Additional Web Server: 1. If you downloaded the Orion Additional Web Server from the SolarWinds website, navigate to your download location, and then launch the executable. 2. If you received the Orion Additional Web Server on physical media, browse to the executable file, and then launch the executable. 3. If you are prompted to install requirements, click Install, and then complete the installation, including a reboot, if required. Notes:
270 Index
Downloading and installing Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 may take more than 20 minutes, depending on your existing system configuration. If a reboot is required, after restart, you may need to launch the installer again. If the installer launches automatically, click Install to resume installation, and then click Next on the Welcome window.
4. Review the Welcome text, and then click Next. 5. Acccept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next. 6. If you want to install the Orion Additional Web Server to a folder other than the indicated default, click Browse, and then provide a different destination folder on the Choose Destination Location window. 7. Click Next on the Choose Destination Location window. 8. Confirm the settings on the Start Copying Files window, and then click Next. 9. Click Finish when the Orion Network Performance Monitor Setup Wizard completes. 10. If you are evaluating Orion, click Continue Evaluation. 11. If you are installing a production version of Orion, click Enter Licensing Information, and then complete the following procedure to license your Orion installation: a. If you have both an activation key and access to the internet, select the first option, I have internet access and an activation key, enter your Activation Key, and then click Next. Note: If you are using a proxy server to access the internet, check I access the internet through a proxy server, and then provide the Proxy address and Port. b. If you do not have access to the internet from your designated Orion server, select This server does not have internet access, click Next, and then complete the steps provided. 12. If the Configuration Wizard does not start automatically, click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Configuration and Auto-Discovery > Configuration Wizard. 13. Click Next on the Welcome tab of the Configuration Wizard. 14. Select or type the SQL Server used by your primary Orion server. 15. If you are using Windows NT Integrated Security, select Use Windows Authentication, and then click Next. 16. If you are using a SQL Server login and password, complete the following steps:
Index 271
a. Select Use SQL Server Authentication. b. Provide your Login and Password. c. Click Next. 17. Select or type the Database Name that is connected to your Orion server, and then click Next. 18. If a dialog appears that says that multiple polling engines have been detected, click OK to continue database upgrade/verification. 19. When the database structure validation completes, click Next. 20. Specify a SQL account User Name and Password for the polling engine and web site to use to access the database, and then click Continue. Note: If you already have a SQL account, you can specify the credentials for that account. 21. To set up the web console, click Next on the Create Website tab, and then complete the following procedure: a. Specify the IP Address of the local server on which you are installing the new web-only interface. b. Specify the TCP Port through which you want to access the web console. Note: If you specify any port other than 80, you must specify that port in the URL that is used to access the web console. For example, if you specify an IP address of 192.168.0.3 and port 8080, your URL is http://192.168.0.3:8080. c. Specify the volume and folder in which you want to install the web console files, and then click Continue. 22. If you are asked to overwrite an existing website, click Yes. 23. When the new web console has been created, click Continue. 24. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 25. Enter the local IP address in the Address bar. 26. If you already have an Admin account and password, enter them in the respective fields, and then click Login. Note: You can log in without a password using Admin as the Account ID. 27. Confirm that the new additional web server displays the same view for the same account, as used both locally and on your primary Orion server.
272 Index
28. If you intend to install either Orion NetFlow Traffic Analyzer or Orion Application Performance Monitor on this Orion additional web server, complete the following steps to install the required additional web console components. a. Using your SolarWinds Customer ID and Password, log in to the Customer Port at http://www.solarwinds.com/customerportal/. b. Click Additional Components in the Customer Portal menu on the left. c. Click Download Orion NPM Components. 29. If you intend to use Orion Application Performance Monitor with this Orion additional web server, complete the following steps. a. Click Application Performance Monitor Additional Web Consolev2 in the Additional Components Orion v8 and v9 section. b. Click Save. c. Browse to an appropriate location, and then click Save. d. When the download completes, click Open. e. Launch the executable, and then complete the configuration wizard. 30. If you intend to use Orion NetFlow Traffic Analyzer with this Orion additional web server, complete the following steps. a. Click Application NetFlow Traffic Analyzer Additional Web Consolev3 in the Additional Components Orion v8 and v9 section. b. Click Save. c. Browse to an appropriate location, and then click Save. d. When the download completes, click Open. e. Launch the executable, and then complete the configuration wizard.
Orion Failover and Disaster Recovery

Depending on the version of Orion you currently have installed, SolarWinds provides either of two failover and disaster recovery solutions: Hot Standby Server and Orion Failover Engine. Hot Standby Server provides limited failover protection for Orion installations older than version 10.0. For Orion version 10.0 and higher, SolarWinds offers the Orion Failover Engine, which can protect your primary Orion installation and any installed modules. For more information about the Orion Failover Engine, see the SolarWinds Orion Failover Engine Administrator Guide and related documentation provided at http://www.solarwinds.com/support/failoverengine/FailoverEngineDoc.aspx.
Index 273
Using a Hot Standby Engine

For versions prior to Orion NPM 10.0, the Orion Hot Standby Engine is available as an additional product to provide seamless backup service for Orion polling engines. Note: For installations of Orion NPM version 10.0, the Orion Failover Engine is recommended. To provide failover and disaster recovery protection for Orion NPM versions 10.1 and higher, the Orion Failover Engine is required. For more information about the Orion Failover Engine, see the SolarWinds Orion Failover Engine Administrator Guide and related documentation provided at http://www.solarwinds.com/support/failoverengine/FailoverEngineDoc.aspx. In the event of an Orion server failure, the designated hot standby system immediately assumes monitoring, data collection, and basic alerting responsibilities for that server. If the Orion server becomes operational again, the Hot Standby Engine returns monitoring control to the Orion server. Warning: Orion Hot Standby Engines do not currently provide all the same data to custom pollers and Universal Device Pollers that may have been collected previously from the failed Orion server. Likewise, Orion Hot Standby Engines are not currently capable of collecting data and computing network performance statistics for EnergyWise, VMware ESX, or wireless devices. The following graphic shows how an Orion Hot Standby Engine assumes the polling duties of any one failed Orion server.
Note: A single Hot Standby Engine can serve as failover protection for multiple Orion servers and polling engines simultaneously, but a single Hot Standby Engine can only assume the monitoring functions of a single failed Orion server at any given time.
274 Index
Installing a Hot Standby Engine

Orion Hot Standby Engine installation is nearly identical to the installation of a standard Orion server, as shown in the following procedure. Notes: To ensure optimal performance, your Orion Hot Standby Engine should not be any older than the latest version of any of the Orion servers the Hot Standby Engine is supporting. For the same version, hardware and software requirements for both the Orion server and Orion Hot Standby Server are equivalent. For more information, see Orion Requirements on page Error! Bookmark not defined..
To install a Hot Standby Engine: 1. Install and configure an Orion server on your network. For more information about installing and configuraing Orion, see Preparing a SolarWinds Orion Installation on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. 2. Log on to the server you want to use as the Hot Standby server. Note: The Hot Standby Engine must be installed on a server other than the primary Orion NPM server. 3. Download or copy the Hot Standby Engine installer to an appropriate location on the server you want to use as the Hot Standby Server. 4. If you downloaded the Hot Standby Engine from the SolarWinds website, navigate to the download executable file, and then launch it. 5. If you received Hot Standby Engine on physical media, browse to the executable file, and then launch the executable. 6. If you are prompted to install any required components such as Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5, click Install, and then complete installation of the required additional components. 7. Review the Welcome text, and then click Next. 8. Agree to the license agreement, and then click Next. 9. Provide an installation destination folder on the Choose Destination Location window, and then click Next. 10. Click Next on the Start Copying Files window. 11. Click Enter Licensing Information. Note: You need your customer ID and password to successfully install the key. For more information, see Software License Key on page 13.
Index 275
12. Click Continue when the license is successfully installed, and then click Finish on the Installation Complete window. 13. Click Next on the Welcome window of the Configuration Wizard. 14. Select or type the address of your SQL Server. 15. If you are using Windows NT Integrated Security, select the available option, and then click Continue. 16. If you are using a SQL Server UserID and password, select the available option, type a username and password, and then click Continue. 17. Select Use an existing database. 18. Provide the name of the Existing Database that your primary Orion NPM server is currently using, and then click Next. Note: The Hot Standby Engine is designed to take the place of a failed server, so both the Orion NPM polling engine and standby polling engines must point to the same database in order to maintain network monitoring. 19. Select Use an existing account. 20. Provide an Existing Account and Password for the polling engine and web site to use to access the database, and then click Next. 21. If you need to specify a particular IP Address for your Orion NPM installation, provide the IP address of the web server that you want to use for the web console. Note: SolarWinds recommends that you retain the default IP address setting of All Unassigned, unless your environment requires the designation of a specific IP address for your Orion Web Console. 22. Specify both the port through which you want to access the web console and the volume and folder in which you want to install the web console files. Note: If you specify any port other than 80, you must include that port in the URL used to access the web console. For example, if you specify an IP address of 192.168.0.3 and port 8080, the URL used to access the web console is http://192.168.0.3:8080. 23. Click Next. 24. If you are prompted to create a new directory, click Yes. 25. Check the services to install on the Hot Standby server, and then click Next. Note: Selecting all available services will ensure that all network monitoring functions are maintained if and when the server fails. 26. Click Next to start configuration. 27. When SolarWinds services have been installed, click Finish.
276 Index
28. If you are prompted to send a request to start the Hot Standby polling service, click Yes. Note: The configuration wizard stopped all polling engines when you configured the Hot Standby server. 29. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Monitor Polling Engines. 30. Confirm that both your primary Orion server and the Hot Standby server are listed as Responding in the Monitor Polling Engines window. Note: Click an Orion NPM server to view server information in the lower half of the Monitor Polling Engines window.
Configuring a Hot Standby Engine

The Hot Standby server that you have installed and assigned has the ability to both alert you when it assumes the Orion server role and continue to alert you as long as the original server is stopped. However, the transition from the stopped Orion server to the Hot Standby Engine is not necessarily immediate, as the delay between primary failure and hot standby assumption is variable. The following steps configure the Hot Standby Engine alerts and delays. To configure a Hot Standby Engine: 1. Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Monitor Polling Engines. 2. Click your Hot-Standby server from the list in the top pane of the Monitor Polling Engines window. Note: The lower pane provides current information about the selected server. 3. Click Configure Hot-Standby. Note: The default view of the Hot-Standby tab in the Configure Hot-Standby Server window provides a list of the servers for which the currently selected server is a hot standby. 4. Check the Orion server for which you are installing the Hot Standby Engine. 5. If you want to enable an alert action for when the hot standby server is employed, click Fail-Over Notifications, and then click Add New Action. Note: For more information, see Adding Alert Actions on page 196. 6. Click Fail-Over Timing, and then position the top slider to set the delay between the stopping of the Orion server and the starting of your HotStandby server.
Index 277
7. If you set an alert action that you want to alert continuously, as long as the Hot-Standby server is enabled, check Continuously send Fail-Over notifications, and then position the bottom slider to set the delay between the stopping of the Orion server and the starting of your Hot-Standby server. 8. Once you have completed configuring your Hot Standby Engine, click OK.
Testing a Hot Standby Engine

After you have installed, assigned, and configured your Hot Standby Engine, test that it works properly with the following steps. Warning: Testing a Hot Standby Engine requires you to power off an Orion server on your network. SolarWinds recommends you conduct any testing in offpeak usage periods to minimize potential uptime interruption. To test a Hot Standby Engine: 1. Confirm that the SQL database you are maintaining with Orion is not on the same physical server as your primary Orion server. 2. On your Hot Standby Server, click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Advanced Features > Monitor Polling Engines. 3. On your Hot Standby Server, Click Start > All Programs > SolarWinds Orion > Orion Web Console. 4. Turn off your primary Orion server. 5. Confirm that the Hot Standby server has assumed Orion server duties by reviewing results from the Monitor Polling Engines window and the Orion Web Console. The lower pane of the Monitor Polling Engines window provides a number of helpful entries for determining engine state, including: Server Type, Hot-Standby For, and Last Fail-Over.
278 Index
Index
Index
adding IP address 43 IP address range 43 IPv6 56 Advanced Alert Manager creating alerts 73 advanced alerts configuration 73 creating 73 alerts viewing in System Manager 72 viewing in the Web Console 71, 72 attributes events 66
network statistics 64 nodes 65 report 64 available status 27
B C
bug reports 78 Chart View 30 checking license status 10 CIDR 27 Cisco DHCP credentials 16 monitoring 16 Classless Inter-Domain Routing 27 concepts 27
Index 279
configuring advanced alerts 73 creating alerts, advanced 73 DHCP Scopes 14 groups 50 subnets 51 supernets 55 custom fields configuration 21 customizing IP Address Manager view 22
editng subnets via spreadsheet 38 Engineers Toolset 77 events attributes 66 exporting IP addresses 41 settings 41 subnets 41
definition IP address status 31 deleting IP address range 45 IP addresses 45 DHCP Alerts 71 alerts (Web Console) 71 Cisco scope manage 16 scan settings 16 DHCP Scope removing 15 DHCP Scopes creating 14 editing 15 DHCP Servers graph view 59 removing 59 servers 58 status icons 35 DHCPservers add 36 edit 36
feature requests 78 features 1 feedback 78 graph view DHCP Servers 59 group status 28 groups creating 50 editing 51 managing 50 ICMP scanning 12 timeout 12 icons status 31, 34, 35 importing IP addresses 37, 38, 39 settings 37 subnets 37, 39 Toolset 37, 39 installation 9 installing License Manager 11 procedure 9 IP address adding 43 deleting 45 exporting 41 importing 37, 38, 39 management 43 orphaned 40 searching 48 status 34
editing DHCP Scopes 15 DHCP Servers 58 groups 51 IP address properties 46 subnets 52 supernets 56 editng exisiting IP addresses 38
280 Index
status icons 34 IP address properties editing 46 multiple editing 47 IP address range adding 43 deleting 45 IP address status definition 31 setting 45 IP Address View 34 personalizing 24 IP scopes status icons 35 IPAM introduction 1 ipv6 adding 56 launching Orion IPAM 27 license deactivating 11 maintenance 11 License Manager 11 installing 11 using 11 licensing 10
nodes attributes 65
Orion IPAM License Manager 11 orphaned IP addresses 40
personalizing IP Address View 24 Network View 24 predefined Alerts 71 remove DHCPservers 36 scopes 36 removing DHCP Scope 15 DHCP Servers 59 reporting bugs 78 reports attributes 64 creating a report 63 design mode 62 exporting 69 field formatting options 68 field options 67 footers 69 formats 69 general options 66 getting started 61 grouping options 68 headers 69 modifying a report 63 preview mode 62 scheduling 70 viewing 70 requesting features 78 requirements 8 reserved status 29 resources Custom List of Reports 33 Manage Subnets & IP Addresses 33
Index 281
managing groups 50 IP addresses 43 subnets 51 supernets 55 users 24 multiple edit IP address properties 47
network statistics attributes 64 Network view 30 Network View personalizing 24 views 35 networking concepts 27 terminology 27
Search for IP Address 33 Subnets by Address Space Usage 32 Thwack Recent IPAM Posts 34 Top XX DHCP Scope Utilization 32 roles assigning 26 definitions 24 scanning ICMP 12 neighbor 13 SNMP 12 scanning subnets 52 scopes add 36 edit 36 searching IP addresses 48 setting IP address status 45 settings Cisco CLI credentials 16 exporting 41 importing 37, 38, 39 SNMP credentials 18 subnet scan 12 Windows credentials 17 snmp credentials 18 SNMP timeout 12 SNMP credentials adding 18 deleting 21 editing 20 ordering 19 SNMP scanning 12 starting Orion IPAM 27 status available 27 group 28 icons 31 IP address 34 reserved 29 subnet 29
282 Index
transient 30 subnet status 29 status icons 34 Subnet Allocation Wizard 53 subnets allocating from supernets 53 creating 51 editing 52 exporting 41 importing 37, 39 managing 51 scanning 52 supernet 29 status icons 34 supernets allocating subnets 53 creating 55 editing 56 managing 55 System Manager viewing alerts 72
Thwack Recent IPAM Posts 34 timeout ICMP 12 SNMP 12 Toolset integration 77 transient 30
user management 24 users assigning roles 26 role definitions 24 viewing alerts (System Manager) 72 alerts (Web Console) 72 views Alerts 72 customizing 22 DHCP Servers 36 IP Address 34 IP Address Manager 32 network 30
Network 35 report 30 Report 35 Scopes 36
Web Console Alerts view 71, 72
Toolset integration 77 viewing alerts 71, 72 windows credentials 17 Windows credentials adding 17 editing 17
Index 283

Orion I Pam Administrator Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Orion I Pam Administrator Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Orion I Pam Administrator Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SolarWinds Orion

IP Address Manager Administrator Guide

ORION IP ADDRESS MANAGER

SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager Administrator Guide

About SolarWinds iii

Administrator Guide SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager

SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager Documentation

iv SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager Documentation

Scheduling a Node Maintenance Mode Time Period .................................. 155

Creating Network Maps ............................................................................. 217

Index ........................................................................................................... 279

SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager Administrator Guide

Why Install SolarWinds Orion IPAM

Key Features of Orion IPAM

Administrator Guide SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager

SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager Administrator Guide

Administrator Guide SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager

How Orion IPAM Works

SolarWinds Orion IP Address Manager Administrator Guide

Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM

Orion IPAM Requirements

Requirements for Orion Common Components

Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM 7

.NET Framework SNMP Trap Services Web Console Browser

Memory Application Ports

Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM 9

Hard Drive Space

10 Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM

Preparing a SolarWinds Orion Installation

Orion 1.6 2.0

Orion 1.7.1 2.0

Installing Orion IPAM

Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM 11

12 Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM

Activating Your License

Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM 13

Licensing Orion IPAM

14 Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM

Checking License Status

Maintaining Licenses with License Manager

Installing License Manager

Using License Manager

Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM 15

Configuring Orion IPAM

IPAM Getting Started Resource

16 Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM

Excluding Orion Data Directories from Anti-Virus Scanning

Configuring Subnet Scan Settings

Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM 17

Managing CLI Credentials for Cisco DHCP Scope Scans

Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM 19

Managing Windows Credentials

Managing SNMP Credentials

Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM 21

Creating and Configuring Custom Fields

24 Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM

Customizing the IPAM Summary View

Installing and Configuring Orion IPAM 25

Customize Manage Subnets and IP Addresses Tab Views